ISSN: 2278 – 473X
Journal of Politics & Governance
Vol. 3 No. 4
Honorary Editor
Nupur Tiwari
Indian Institute of Public Administration, New Delhi, India
Editorial Advisory Board
Abhinav Sharma
Banaras Hindu University, Varanasi, India
Akhilesh Chandra Prabhakar
College of Business, Universiti Utara Malaysia
Djamel Eddine Laouisset
Alhosn University, Abu Dhabi, UAE
Lopamudra Sengupta
Bangabasi College, Kolkata, India
Md Firoz
University of Wollongong in Dubai, UAE
Rose Mary George
P o ide e Wo e s College, Cali ut, India
Satish L Patel
Veer Narmad South Gujarat University, Surat, India
Simmi Agnihotri
Himachal Pradesh University, Shimla, India
October-December 2014
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Journal of Politics & Governance (JPG) is a peer-reviewed quarterly journal published in
March, June, September and December.
JPG is an independent publishing platform with profound interest in an interdisciplinary
critique of contemporary issues revolving around politics, governance, management,
development, public affairs, socio-economic concerns of communities, justice, ethics,
corporate social responsibility, human rights, poverty, social action, quality of life of diverse
communities, gender discourse, media, international relations, etc.
JPG invites research papers, reflective essays, review articles, conceptual notes, interviews,
and book reviews from thinkers, academics, journalists, administrators, social and political
activists, research scholars and larger community of students from any discipline. Length of
the contributions should be 3000-5000 words including references.
Annual Subscription: Rs. 1000/- (India) $ 200 (Overseas)
Editorial and Subscription Enquiry: editor.jpg@gmail.com
Copyright © Management Development Research Foundation, New Delhi
All rights reserved. No part of this publication can be reproduced without written
permission of the editor/publisher except for the purpose of quotes in research papers,
doctoral work or book chapters.
Any dispute arising out of publication of Journal of Politics & Governance (JPG) will be
settled in the courts of Delhi.
Disclaimer
Views expressed in the articles published in JPG are those of the contributors and
not necessarily that of the Editorial Board, Editor, Publisher, and trustees of
Management Development Research Foundation.
All the articles are published in good faith considering that the contributors have not
violated copyrights of any other authors/publishers. In case of any such violation,
contributors alone will be held responsible.
Due care and diligence have been exercised while editing and printing this issue of
JPG. However, the editor, publisher and printer will not be liable for any damage and
losses arising out of the content of the journal.
This issue carries papers presented at the International Conference on Globalization,
Governance and Sustainable Development organized by Academy of Politics &
Governance, New Delhi on 8 December 2013.
Printed & Published by Management Development Research Foundation, 4th Floor,
Statesman House Building, Connaught Place, Barakhamba Road, New Delhi –110001.
2
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Contents
Panchayati Raj Institutions as tool for Empowerment at Grassroots
Nupur Tiwari
5
P o Wo e or Empowered Politicians: Democratic
Decentralization & Panchayati Raj Institutions in Rural India
Tanusree Chakraborty & Ishita Mukhopadhyay
15
Gender & Language: A Study of Social Movements in India
Kshipra Sharma
25
The Third Gender and Gender Self-Identification in India: A Review
Aakanksha Kumar
31
Open Defecation in India: Issues and Challenges
S. Uma Maheswari
41
Decoding Gender Discrimination in Indian Patriarchal Society
Akshit Lamba & Aishwarya Dhancholia
49
Gender Justice and Equality through the Monocle of
Social and Legal Interface
Prakhil Mishra & Pranav Singh Rathore
55
‘ole of “o ial E te p ise i Wo e s E po e
A Case Study of Sadhna
Rhea Bhandari
63
e t:
International Humanitarian Law: Indian Perspective
Abidha Beegum V. S.
71
AFSPA and Human Rights
Prateek Vijayavargia
81
Refugee Problem and Human Rights: An Unparalleled Indian Dichotomy
Utkarsh Pandey
85
Does Cultu e Explain International Relations?
A Critical Perspective
Areeba Ahsanat Moazzam
93
Chi a Fa to i I dia-Pakistan Relations: A Review
Tanwir Arshed
103
3
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Changing Dynamics of Global Governance of Intellectual
Property: An Analysis
Makhan Saikia
111
Implication of TISA on Trade of Services
Harish K Raman
121
Politics and Economics of Mining in Goa
Sebastiao Anthony Rodrigues
129
Urban Water Supply: Contestations and Sustainability
Issues in Greater Bangalore
Srihari Hulikal Muralidhar
135
SEBI V/S Sahara Litigation: Protecting Investors or Money Laundering
Subhash N Sonawane
143
Decentralization in India: Reflections from Bihar
Pradip Kumar Jha
149
Political Communication and the Electoral Campaign:
A Case Study of the 2014 National Election
Radhika Kumar
157
New Governance, Public Policy, and Social Movements
in India: Rethinking MKSS Movement and RTI Act
Ramesh Kumar
163
Debunking Myths & Debilities: High Aspirations from the
Newly Elected Government in India
Parag Chandra
171
Imperatives for Reforms in Indian Political System
Rajiv Ranjan
177
Judicial Appointments in India: Imperatives for Reforms
Shubham Rathi
183
4
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Edito s I sights
Panchayati Raj Institutions as tool for Empowerment at Grassroots
Nupur Tiwari
Indian Institute of Public Administration, New Delhi
Abstract
Higher GDP rates during the recent years have not helped the larger masses in getting
integrated with the process of development. The present pattern of growth has the
potential of widening the inequality. If this inequality increases further ,social displacement
will result and it will be a major obstruction to higher growth. Being closest to the people,
the Panchayats and their elected representatives have the feel of the pulse, the sufferings of
the people and local conditions. The involvement of Panchayats ensures greater
transparency in working and fund utilization than in execution carried out by central or state
agency, many a times. It is important that Local governance be brought centre-stage as the
principal governance reform to reinforce economic reform in such a manner as to secure
inclusive growth. Local self-government, offers this opportunity, as communities, citizens,
right from the Gram Level, can participate in the designing of the development in their area.
When grass-roots planning processes strikes deep roots, economic empowerment is both
strong and sustainable.
Keywords: Panchayats, Governance, Participation, Inclusion, Empowerment, India
Introduction
Panchayati Raj in India is designed to strengthen the totality of our democratic institutions
and practices. The system of governance inherited by India has its roots in the feudalimperial legacy of the past, largely modified and adapted by the British to meet their
colonial ends. The efforts of leaders of freedom struggle who upheld the principle of selfreliant villages did not reflect much in the new constitution framed after Independence. In
India, the local governance system had no constitutional backing till the 73rd and 74th
constitutional amendments of 1993. With the passing of conformity act all the states and
union territories are expected to initiate activities for decentralization. The devolution of
powers to the Panchayati Raj institutions in different states has not been uniform. A few
states like Kerala, Karnataka and West Bengal did much to devolve 3Fs (funds, functions and
functionaries) at the grass root level. But in most of the states a great deal of confusion as
regards the nature of the transfer itself prevailed.
Experience over a decade and a half shows that the decision to devolve and the trigger to do
so has always been driven politically. However, since in different states, the impetus has
come from different political parties, it is difficult to say that one or the other party has
been more Panchayat friendly than the other. It would be more accurate to say that within
each political party, there are divided views on Panchayati Raj. However, no party today can
openly question Panchayati Raj, which would be political suicide.
5
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The other lesson that can be drawn from States that have devolved or are currently
devolving with reasonable success, is that in all of them, the bureaucracy has played its part
in proper design of systems, when backed by the political signal to devolve. Most such
states, brought out a road map on devolution, which was widely discussed in public, before
going ahead with a devolution plan. Behind successful devolution, there have always been
cabals of champions, from politics, the bureaucracy and civil society, who have contributed
collectively to its success. Politically driven decisions to devolve, without sufficient backing
in terms of changes in administrative and executive design have tended to flounder, with
adverse consequences on those who motivated such changes.
In India it has now been accepted that higher GDP rates during the recent years have not
helped the larger masses in getting integrated with the process of development. It is
important that Local governance be brought centre-stage as the principal governance
reform to reinforce economic reform in such a manner as to secure inclusive growth.
I lusi e G o th is g o th p o-poo , the bulk of the population of this country feel that
they ha e ot e efited i a o ious a f o the de elop e t of the last de ade.
There is need to reconceptualise inclusion as not only recognizing the usual marginalized
communities or sections of society as beneficiaries but by including them as thinkers who
thi k a d k o diffe e tl , a d hose p ese e i desig i g, is the eal i lusio . The e is
need to give the excluded agency inclusion - to include knowledge and analysis and
experience of minority groups, women and other excluded and deprived sections of society,
in development design. I lusio
eeds to e e o eptualised, as age
, the thi k
side of action.
Local self-government, offers this opportunity, as communities, citizens, right from the
Gram Level, can participate in the designing of the development in their area. With the
arrangements that have been made in the constitutional amendment to give voice to
historically discriminate against groups such as women and the SCs and STs, this is the space
where inclusion can really take place. Local self-government makes the link between
political and economic governance, and could lead to the alternative paradigm. The
Panchayati Raj system, the movement to devolve power, to deepen democracy in India, is a
movement for economic and social justice, and provides the vehicle to implement the vision
of inclusive growth in India. It is necessary to recognize that we cannot secure inclusive
growth without inclusive governance. And it is this, fundamental conundrum which local
government in our system is attempting to address. If gram Sabhas are largely nonfunctional and most elected representatives (other than Panchayat Presidents) left
uninvolved and, therefore, frustrated, this is because even as they see more and more
money being poured into rural areas, they also see that much of it is beyond their control or
responsibility.. But it is critically important that over the next decade and not much longer
than that we actually succeed in empowering our institution of local self-governance with
the functions, the finances and the functionaries that are essential to running of effective
local self-governance.
In India, the participatory planning that has been institutionalized in the state of Kerala has
been accepted as a good practice to emulate. Besides, functioning of Grama Sabhas capacity
building activities, gender mainstreaming, grievance redressal mechanism, Nyaya
6
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Panchayats and poverty reduction strategies have been highlighted as innovative models for
replication.
Transition to the New System Under Way
In India constitutionally mandated PRIs have moved into the second stage so the need is to
set in motion second-generation reforms .Elections have been held [thrice in most places]
and the relevant functions have also been devolved, as intended, in most states.
Considering activity mapping as the foundation for sound Panchayat Raj, various states have
prepared it on the principle of subsidiary. This involves identification of functions, within a
given sector and desegregations of these functions into tasks, activities and responsibilities
for the devolution for the three levels of Panchayats. However, there has been much less
action in devolving funds and functionaries, which are the other two legs on which the
structure must rest. The extent of financial devolution varies from state to state. While
some have devolved a significant proportion of the state budget to the PRIs, many others
have not yet done so. It was expected that local bodies would become financially
independent along with a constitutional guarantee of existence breathed through five yearly
elections. But there are doubts and financially local governments are largely dependent on
state governments. State governments have a large number of powers to inspect, dissolve,
remove and audit the functioning of local governments. Bureaucratic stranglehold may not
be absolute but functioning of local government has been restricted.
By contesting and getting elected to Panchayati Raj Institutions, women have shattered the
myth of their own passivity - that women are not willing to enter politics. For women,
successful grassroots experience has meant a chance to form coherent voice, to be heard
and to make a difference in their communities; however o e s ep ese tatio i the
decision-making positions with monitoring power is still negligible. The present rules of the
game and decision-making procedure do not allow a greater participation of women and in
the absence of women, there is no effort to recognize or change the game. The very
absence of women at these levels thus leads to preservation and reinforcement of maleoriented and male benefiting types of decisions. The reservation in Panchayats has provided
for the erosion of the traditional gender, caste, class roles and hierarchy but it has still to
cover a long and difficult process. Women not only have to fight for their right to be more
than proxy members but also to break the barriers of gender division of labour, illiteracy,
low level of mobility, seclusion, lack of training and information, which still continue to exist
ithout e ough suppo t f o the po e st u tu e. Wo e s lo self-esteem at the
household level and their new role in local politics where they are now expected to function
as leader creates a contradiction between wome s ole at ho e a d i lo al go e
e t.
The fact that the participation of women could be better if they had functional education
and also training on the various intricacies involved in the political field.
There is much importance of ICT in enhancing Panchayat capacity so that they can perform
their constitutionally and legislatively mandated functions better. When it comes to egovernance Gram Panchayat has unique importance for the reasons of Primacy of Gram
Sabha and its impact on the Gram Panchayat and requirement of keeping the Gram Sabha
(the citizenry) well informed, by the GP.E-governance can help at aiding Gram Sabhas to
take better informed decisions .E-governance can help in dissemination of internal
processes of Gram Panchayats: (agendas, resolutions, voting record); proceedings of Gram
7
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Sabhas and action taken, Progress reports, Dissemination of data (family surveys, property
lists, BPL lists, pensions, censuses), Services data: (education, health, water and
sanitation),Natural Resources and biodiversity data, Databases on Panchayat members and
staffing details, Availability of government and private infrastructure and village habitat
planningIt is important to position IT as decision making support system for Panchayats It
was also projected as important tool for transparency, disclosure of
There is much to do—and much to learn
Cynics are fond of pooh-poohing decentralisation in India on the ground that all that is
decentralised is corruption, and therefore, one needs to analyse why such a widespread
negative impression about PRIs has taken root. Much of it is a matter of selective memory
and autosuggestion – ignore the good stories and highlight the bad. However, the
functioning of Panchayats is quite distinct from that of higher level governments. First, being
closer to the people, a lot more corruption gets exposed to public view and compared to
corruption at higher levels. Second, while grass root level institutions have distinct
advantages in localising government, they also face proximate political and social pressures
that make traditional virtues of public administration such as impartiality, neutrality and
anonymity difficult to realise locally. Third, regardless of whether PRIs are elected on a party
basis or otherwise, they are political institutions. Elected members have constituencies both
in the geographical and socio-political sense. One cannot avoid legitimate aspirations to
u se o stitue ies i toda s o te t of highl o petiti e ele to al politi s a d o e ust
accept that there is bound to be a tendency to favour a region, a group of people or even
individuals in developmental decision-making. Fourth, unlike legislators, PRI elected
representatives are vested with executive authority and are empowered to take decisions
having financial implications and authorise expenditure from public funds, decide levels of
taxation, exercise power of collecting taxes and regulatory powers which are of a quasijudicial character.
Two things need to be done to make Panchayats more inclusive and effective as local
governments. First inclusiveness has meaning only if Panchayats are given responsibilities in
the letter and spirit of the constitution. Unfortunately, Panchayati Raj is often a charade in
several States and political rhetoric hides their marginalization. Both the centre and the
States need to bring in real devolution, which can be differentiated from the charade that
Panchayati Raj has often become, as follows:
Real Devolution:
Clear role assignment,
Power to spend money
Power to tax
Discretion in spending money,
Power to hire fire and control staff,
Direct Accountability.
Not-so-real devolution:
Somebody else (above or below) responsible
for Panchayat performance
Limited power to collect resources
Scheme bound expenditure
Staff owned and assigned by higher level
governments,
Somebody else (above or below) acting for
the Panchayats
8
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Second, Decision making processes in Panchayats need to be better defined, to diminish the
possibility of elite capture, proxy participation, single point decision making and corruption.
The formula for improving PRI functioning would follow a four-fold path; simplify, inform,
review and hold accountable for non-performance or mal-administration. Some key steps in
this regard are as follows:
(a)
Well functioning Gram Sabhas are essential.
(b)
Just as in the case of most government offices, a thick veil of secrecy hides
inefficiencies, arbitrariness, corruption and nepotism from public gaze in PRIs too. An
example of the secrecy that surrounds executive action in PRIs is seen in the selection of
beneficiaries for various schemes. The logical transparent sequence ought to be the laying
down of the selection criteria, publicising them, calling for applications through the Gram
Sabha, processing them with reference to the criteria, making selections and ending with
publicly explaining the rationale of the selection made. When there is a great deal of
arbitrariness in decision making at the local level, records will not show how the choice was
arrived at or whether various options and possibilities were analysed and on which criteria
the final decision was made. Fairness at the cutting edge will need to be seen and
corroborated by full disclosure, whatever may be the inconvenience and cost involved for
the administration. Therefore, systems that ensure easy access for the citizen to information
must be put into place. If the right to information is to have any meaning, information will
have to be systematised and packaged in a manner that makes sense to those who seek it.
(c)
We need to sytematise the process of recording decisions, to ensure the democratic
functioning of Panchayats There are seven linked aspects of ensuring that PRIs work more
democratically as described below:
(i)
The emphasis on consensus in decision making should be approached with caution,
While true consensus is appreciable, an unnecessary emphasis on consensus could stunt the
growth of democracy. Consensus undermines democracy in two ways. First, in a consensus,
the strongest voices prevail automatically. Thus it is easier for a situation of elite capture to
prevail if business rules of representative bodies expressly prefer consensus in decision
making. Reservations in favour of women and the socially disadvantaged do not make much
sense in a consensus situation because one can just as easily silence the poor. The second
disadvantage of a consensus situation is that elected representatives can hide behind a
consensus decision to avoid responsibility and accountability to their voters. Therefore
votes have always to be recorded. This is an important aspect of democratic PRI functioning.
If there is a consensus or unanimity, even this should be recorded. The record of voting by
individual members in PRI meetings could become the most important mechanism of
opening up the proceedings to the public, particularly if there is express provision in the law
for disclosing the voting pattern to the public. Mandatory public display of resolutions of the
pris along with the record of members voting for or against them will enable the public to
know what their members are doing for them. They will know how their member has
articulated their concerns in meetings. More than anything else, this alone will be an
effective Mechanism Of Downward accountability
9
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
(ii) Procedures for conduct of meetings will have to be laid may be necessary, in order to
ensure that those who do not feel up to articulating their concerns in an open meeting can
still make their presence felt in decision-making.
(iii) A strict quorum requirement will diminish the scope of marginalization in decision
making.
(iv) Ensure that the body is collectively responsible for its actions. The requirement of
collective responsibility is another method of increasing accountability of the body to the
people. Once a member knows that his position is also in jeopardy as he is also vicariously
responsible for wrong acts of his colleague-members in the body, there is a greater price to
be paid for being a passive spectator to the proceedings. Members will be induced to
participate meaningfully and there will be peer pressure on each other not to take wrong
decisions.
(v) Make decision making committee based. Most Panchayat legislations provide for
Standing Committees in Panchayats, but these provisions are neglected and hardly
operatonalised. Committee based decision making diminishes the scope for elie capture and
allows for the articulation of all voices.
(vi) Put in place mechanisms to open up the process of decision-making is opened up to
public gaze. Ordinarily, meetings shall be open to the public. There must be full disclosure of
facts in meetings, so that reasoned decisions can be taken. One method of doing this is to
ensure a prior circulation of the agenda for a meeting and if necessary, allow one meeting to
intervene before a decision is made. Thus a resolution can be introduced in a particular
meeting and discussed, but voting could be held in the next meeting of the body.
(vii) Intervals between the rotation of reservations for women and SC and ST
representatives need to be extended. If reservations are rotated after every 5 year term, it
leaves very little incentive for the member elected on a reserved seat to perform, because
he or she knows that next time around, there will only be a remote chance of being elected
as she will not have the benefit of reservation in the same seat.
(d) Provide a right to recourse to an independent institutional mechanism that gives speedy
relief to the aggrieved effectively bolsters empowerment through Panchayats. With greater
devolution and decentralisation there will be a need to investigate independently
complaints made by individuals, groups and even the Government relating to defective
administration by local bodies. An Ombudsman system could provide a convenient and
relatively low-cost mechanism to deal with complaints of mal-administration.
Conclusion
Panchayati Raj is a silent revolution and most importantly, this system has included the
marginalized sections, in the process of governance and these groups have found a place in
Indian polity and a new broad-based political leadership and wisdom is emerging. A large
number of women and other marginalized classes have come to power as a consequence of
reservation provided to them in Panchayats and it has rekindled the hopes of the local
citizenry.
10
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The Co stitutio al spe ifi atio of the ole of Pa ha ats i pla i g fo e o o i
de elop e t a d so ial justi e a d i ple e tatio of s he es to a ds these e ds, a d
furthe , the iti al ole assig ed to the g a sa ha a d dist i t pla i g a e ut the
building blocks for creating a more just, equitable and vibrant society. It is here, in imagining
the locality where lives are lived and everyday experiences are produced and reproduced,
that the conceptions of state, civil society and market must intersect privileging the
democratic ideal of citizenship.
We can conclude that the present pattern of growth has the potential of widening the
inequality. Such unequal opportunity structure weakens the positive role of growth in
reducing poverty and making growth inclusive. If this inequality increases further, social
displacement will result and it will be a major obstruction to higher growth . To achieve
inclusive growth, it is crucial that the poor are integrated with the dynamic sectors of
growth. We cannot overlook the fact that being closest to the people, the Panchayats and
their elected representatives have the feel of the pulse, the sufferings of the people and
local conditions. The effectiveness of providing services through local bodies cannot be
overemphasized as they know their real requirements, and are familiar with every nook and
corner of the village and, above all, they are answerable to the people. . The Panchayati Raj
institutions are eminently suited for service delivery as they can ensure equity and / or
equitability in the provision of services (in view of their nearness to the people),
inclusiveness (in view of the assured representation available to all sections of the society in
the Panchayati Raj Institutions), accessibility, transparency, local participation,
accountability and sustainability of services.
The involvement of Panchayats ensures greater transparency in working and fund utilization
than in execution carried out by central or state agency, many a times. Panchayats should
be given powers to decide on technology, cost, location, infrastructure and beneficiary
selection; and since they have a role in rural housing, primary health care, water and
sanitation in many states, should be given these functions by the coordinating authority.
Adequate resources should be provided to PRIs to build up their capacities
and
Sensitization and training of PRI members on related areas will have to be promoted and
capacity for the same should be institutionalized in the existing institutional framework in
the states.
In a mature and responsible administrative system where power is in the hands of the
people and their democratically elected local government institutions, relief operations,
day-to-day running of civic services, providing medical assistance, etc. could best be done by
the local government. Gram Sabhas can play a very meaningful role in selecting the
beneficiaries, prioritizing the beneficiaries to ensure gender and equity concerns and also in
deciding the appropriate rehabilitation or reconstruction programme that is needed for the
communities.
Moving from a model of central provision to that of decentralization to local governments
introduces a new relationship between national and local policy makers, while altering
several existing relationships such as that between the citizens, elected politicians and the
local bureaucracy. Such inclusive governance, besides ensuring political empowerment,
through enabling people to control their own destiny, would also yield significant inclusive
11
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
growths.. Social empowerment through inclusive governance would help safeguard social,
ethnic and cultural values of people, which in turn would lead to building trust of their
governments in tribal communities. Active participation of people in the political processes
and in grassroots planning will bring about the desired transformation of the region by
establishing peace and setting in motion the wheels of progress towards prosperity. When
grass-roots planning processes strikes deep roots, economic empowerment is both strong
and sustainable.
References
(April 2008) Fifteenth Anniversary Charter on Panchayati Raj.
Ministry of Panchayati Raj. (December 2004) Compendium of resolutions of the Seven Round
Tables of Ministers in-charge of Panchayati Raj.
MoPR (December 2004). Report of the Task force of officials in charge of Panchayati Raj in
States to examine the Centrally Sponsored Schemes.
MoPR (November 2006) The State of Panchayats Report; 2006-07.
MoPR, IRMA (April 2008). The State of Panchayats Report 2007-08, An Independent
Assessment.
MoPR. (March 2006) Report of the Expert Group on Grassroots level planning.
MoPR (August 2007) Report of the Expert Committee on Grassroots level planning in areas
not covered by Parts IX and IXA of the Constitution
MoPR, Planning Commission. (November 2008) Report of the Empowered sub Committee of
NDC on Financial and Administrative Strengthening of PRIs;
MoRD (August 2001) Report of the Task Force on Devolution of Powers & Functions upon
Panchayati Raj Institutions.
MoPR-GoI (2008). Note on Devolution of Powers to Standing Committee on Rural
Development. New Delhi, Ministry of Panchayati Raj.
MoPR (November 2006) Guidelines for the Backward Regions Grant Fund
MoPR (August 2006) National Capability Building Framework
MoPR, Planning Commission. (January 2009) Manual on District Planning,
Planning Commission. (August 2007) Report of the Committee to review modifications to be
made in the existing guidelines of Centrally Sponsored Schemes on identifying a domain for
the Panchayati Raj Institutions
12
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
PC-MoPR (2006). Report of the Working Group on Democratic Decentralisation & PRIs. New
Delhi, Planning Commission - Ministry of Panchayati Raj.
Planning Commission: Eleventh Five year Plan, Ch-10 (Decentralization and Strengthening of
PRIs
Rao, M.G. and U.A. Vasanth Rao (2008) Expanding the Resource Base of Panchayats:
Augmenting Own Revenues, Economic and Political Weekly, January.
Sethi, Geeta (2004) Fiscal Decentralisation to Rural Governments in India, The World Bank,
OUP, New Delhi.
Second-ARC (2007). Local Governance: An inspiring journey into the future. New Delhi,
Second Administrative Reforms Commission, Govt of India.
S.M. Vijayanand & T.R. Raghunandan (August 2004) Note of Parallel Bodies.
13
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
14
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Pro Wo e or Empowered Politicians: Democratic
Decentralization & Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) in Rural India
Tanusree Chakraborty & Ishita Mukhopadhyay
Wo e s “tudies ‘esearch Ce tre, U i ersit of Calcutta, Kolkata
Abstract
Wo e i I dia o stitute a out fift pe e t of the ou t s total populatio ut the
have been treated discriminatory because of the gender bias of the prevalent patriotic
values of Indian society. The dominant patriarchy has denied women equality of status and
opportunities in socio-economic and political spheres. During the last fifty years, several
attempts have been made to bring about effective decentralization, both political and
economic, with limited success. Objectives of this paper are to explore the extent to which
PRIs have contributed towards change in the position and status of women in India and
whether they have been actually empowered or do they live in the same state of
subordination and deprivation as earlier. The study was conducted on the basis of case
studies related to women in Panchayat in different states of India. The study revealed that
mere presence of women is not necessary synonymous with their participation, there is a
difference between formal power and effective power. The point that is raised for some
cases is analytically posing the dichotomy between seat reservation as an instrument of
development fo ge de e ualit a d o e s e po e e t a d formal power and
effective power to achieve this goal. The coexistence of obstacles and possibilities for
elected women tends to pictu e the ele ted o e eithe as p o
o e or as
empowered politicians.
Keywords: Grassroots Democracy, Gender, Local Governance, Elected women, Effective
power, Proxy women, Panchayati Raj Institutio , Wo e s E po e e t, I dia
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
[Authors Note
This esea h pape is p epa ed f o the out o e of a p oje t E plo i g the ‘elatio ship et ee
Po e t ‘edu tio a d Politi al E po e e t of Wo e fu ded
the De elopment Partnerships
in Higher Education. This project was a partnership between University of Calcutta (lead Institute),
Active Learning Centre, University of Glasgow, and Institute of Democracy, South Africa. We would
like to express our deep gratitude to the research assistants who helped in the survey.]
Introduction
Patriarchy as the dominant social form circumscribing all other social stratifications is
witnessed in India also along with rest of the world. Studies on Indian women in politics, in
aggregate, indicate that women in Indian society have been fallen vulnerable to
fundamental social, economic and political rights. The social hierarchies and inequalities
that exist in Indian society had deterred the women for centuries to play an active role in
15
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
the field of power including participation in political institutions. The dominant patriarchy
has denied women equality of status and opportunities in socio-economic as well as political
spheres. There are differences amongst women in terms of class, caste, status, space (ruralu a di ide et . ‘u al I dia Wo e ha e ee al a s t eated as O je t of
de elop e t athe tha the “u je t of de elop e t. Though it is a gued that atio al
development would be more effective with active share of men and women in all its
activities, in terms of government policies and programmes that we have undertaken we
ha e shifted the fo us f o the o ept of o e s de elop e t to o e s pa ti ipatio
in the social and political sphere consequently to lead towards wome s e po e e t.
But, the presence of women is not necessary synonymous with their participation, there is a
difference between formal power and effective power. The point that is raised for some
cases is analytically posing the dichotomy between seat reservation as an instrument of
de elop e t fo ge de e ualit a d o e s e po e e t ith formal power and
effective power to achieve this goal. The coexistence of obstacles and possibilities for
elected women tends to picture the elected women either as p o
o e o as
empowered politicians. The basic objectives of this paper are to explore, to what extent
these new arrangements have contributed change in the position and status of women in
India. Have they been actually empowered or do they live in the same state of
subordination and deprivation? The study was conducted on the basis of case studies
related to women in Panchayat in different states of India.
This paper is organized as follows: section I delineates the Panchayati Raj Systems in India: a
a to a ds de o ati de e t alizatio a d Wo e s E po e e t. “e tio II e plo es
ele ted o e eithe as p o
o e o as e po e ed politi ia s as a esult of thei
participation in Panchayati Raj Systems in India through case studies collected from
different states of India. Women's experience of PRI has transformed many of them. The
elements of this transformation include empowerment, self-confidence, political awareness
and affirmation of identity. Section III presents the conclusion of the paper.
Pa cha ati ‘aj “ ste i I dia: A Wa To ards de ocratic dece tralizatio & o e s
Empowerment
De e t alizatio
ea s de olutio of e t al autho it a o g lo al u its lose to the a eas
se ed. Autho it de ol es
this p o ess o people s i stitutions, and it is democratic
de e t alizatio . The tea headed
Bal a t ai Mehta
e o
e ded de o ati
de e t alizatio . A o di g to this o
ittee to delegate the po e s, espo si ilit a d
resources for planning and execution of the develop e t p og a
e to people s
institutions. As per the recommendations of the committee it was aimed to secure the
maximum participation of the rural people in their own development programmes.
The committee made several recommendations for better community development
through community participation on democratic lines. But they were interested in making
improvement of the house-keeping functions of the women. They seem to have taken a
conservative attitude to women. Women as participants in the decision-making process did
not draw adequate attention of the committee.
The Committee on Panchayati Raj Institution headed by Ashok Mehta (1978) laid stress on
the eed fo e og izi g a d st e gthe i g o e s ole i the de isio -making processes
16
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
of Panchayats. The Ashok Mehta Committee acknowledged the need for associating women
with the processes of decision-making, but could not give a clear direction1.
During the last fifty years, several attempts have been made to bring about effective
decentralization, both political and economic, with limited success. However, the year 1992
marks a new era in the federal democratic set up of the country. The idea that produced the
73rd Amendment was not a response to pressure from the grassroots, but an increasing
recognition that the institutional initiatives of the preceding decade had not delivered, that
the extent of rural poverty was still much too large and thus the existing structure of
government needed to be reformed. It is interesting to note that this idea evolved from the
Centre and the state governments. It was a political drive to see Panchayati Raj Institutions
(PRIs) as a solution to the governmental crises that India was experiencing. The
Constitutional (73rd Amendment) Act, passed in 1992 by, came into force on April 24, 1993.
It was meant to provide constitutional sanction to establish "democracy at the grassroots
level as it is at the state level or national level". A million women have been elected at the
village, block and district levels, following the landmark 73rd Amendment to the
Constitution of India (1992), reserving 33 percent of the seats in Panchayati Raj Institutions
for women. The process of decentralization has provided representation of women in the
political decision-making process. The 73rd Amendments to the Constitution of India
provide the legal basis for direct democracy at the local-level in rural areas. The
amendments stress the need to bring people belonging to marginalized groups into the
political process by reserving seats for women and for people belonging to the Scheduled
Castes (SC) and Scheduled Tribes (ST). It is envisaged that by mandating not less than onethird of the seats for women in local government bodies, the governance process at the
local government level will reflect the voices of women and the concerns and issues that
confront them.
There was a lot of opposition and criticism on this 33% reservation to the women at PRI
level. Critics argued that women are not experienced enough in politics and they will be only
du
politi al leade s . “o e people a gued that it ill e ou age i the eatio of e
categories of reservation which is discriminatory in democracy. Despite lot of resistance
against this policy change the amendment offered an opportunity to put women at the helm
of affairs in the PRIs. It is highly desirable to explore, to what extent these new
arrangements have contributed change in the position and status of women in India. Have
they been actually empowered or do they live in the same state of subordination and
deprivation?
Elected o e either as pro
o e or as empowered politicians as a result of their
participation in Panchayati Raj Systems in India through case studies collected from
different states of India
Women's experience of PRI has transformed many of them. The elements of this
transformation include empowerment, self-confidence, political awareness and affirmation
of identity.
Empowering women: Panchayati Raj System gave the rural women the ability to coerce and
influence the actions and thoughts of powerless (Power Over). Democratization involves the
creation of new knowledge and values, in effect a paradigm shift that brings about the
17
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
meaningful empowerment of groups relegated to subordinate positions. The following
dialogues drawn from an extensive case study analysis reveals the ground realities.
Respondent No. 1 Panchayat Pradhan of North 24 Parganas, West Bengal said:
Du i g o e Household su e fo BPL Belo Po e t Li e list, lo al s hool
teachers were appointed to do the job. But it was later found out by that me
that the school teachers unofficially appointed local boys who even came to
my house to do the BPL survey! And most surprisingly, boy went to just one
house where he collected information for rest of the villages at one go. I had
reprimanded the school teacher who did this, but from next time I involved
Anganwari workers who did the survey sincerely and the corrections were
ade .
Self-confidence gained through belonging to local organisations seems critical to enabling
women to step out of unequal relationships. This sense of freedom is even more profound
when the group to which women belong is the PRI. This freedom is carried into the very
activity of politics by these women. There is a visible difference, a sense of excitement, in
the women of rural India (power within).
Respondent No. 2 from Rampurhat Panchayat samity, district of West Bengal said:
Those ho a lie ha e got i to the BPL list. BPL Belo Po e t Li e
estimate is manipulated and has a lot of discrepancies. The deserving people
are left out and due to wrong measurement undeserving people are
i t odu ed.
Women have gained a sense of empowerment by asserting control over resources, officials
and, most of all, by challenging men.
Respondent No. 3 Sarpanch of Ramlapally Gram Panchayat in the district of Karunagar,
Andhra Pradesh said:
Whe e e the e is a p o le i the illages, the o e to e. We a e
more responsive to the community, we look after, we pay attention, and we
are truthful a d so the people o e to us.
She has launched programs for adult education, digging wells for drinking water and
repairing school buildings. She said:
Ia
ot highl edu ated, ut I k o
espo si ilities to a ds so iet . Edu atio
is necessary but at the same times self -determination and grit, which a woman has
i pletho a pla i g a sig ifi a t ole to o at these hi d a es.
Respondent No. 4, Anchal Samity Member (ASM) of Mirbuk village, East Siang district,
Arunachal Pradesh said:
We a e ele ted because the people expect us to do something good for
so iet .
18
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The women Panchayat leaders are actively taking part to uplift the common people at the
grassroots level. They are at different levels of awareness. Local people of each area comes
to know about different types of schemes are sanctioned through different sources.
Respondent No. 5, gram Panchayat pradhan, Puri Sadar, Orissa, said:
Wo e ep ese tati es a
ake e o ous diffe e e i ase of a a e ess
generation in the society. She can take initiative in giving training to rural
women for their economic upliftment. I arrange different training
p og a
es fo the .
She also mentioned:
I
G a Pa ha at, p e iousl o o e used to o e to ale G a
Panchayat Pradhan for any help, but now local women felt at ease and
started coming frequently to me for help whether it be domestic violence or
a thi g. ‘u al o e feel f ee to app oa h.
The community psychology literature views empowerment in part as the building of selfknowledge and self-estee of the i di idual to edu e feeli gs of alie atio a d e ha e
feeli gs of solida it a d legiti a
Astha a,
. I di idual e po e e t the efo e is
… the e ip o al i flue es a d o flue e of a o a d i o le el fo es that i pact
the e otio al og iti e a d eha iou al aspe ts of i di iduals “pee
, a d e tails
changes in meaning which revolves around beliefs, values and behaviours; competence or
self-efficacy, that is the belief of being able to carry out particular tasks or roles; selfdetermination or the choices individuals have in initiating or regulating their actions;
impact or the degree to which one influences the outcomes of others and how people
understand and relate to their social environment and the role of collectives in community
life (Speer, 2000; Spreitzer, de Janaszet al., 1999).
Understanding politics: The incorporation of women into Panchayati Raj (local-level
governance) institutions in India, following the statutory reservation of 33 percent of these
electoral positions for women, has been hailed as a significant step. Panchayati Raj
Institution has given many women a greater understanding of the working of politics. PRI
has helped to change local government beyond simply increasing the numerical presence of
women.
Respondent No. 6, Zilla Parishad Member of Sille-Oyan Block, East Siang district, Arunachal
Pradesh boldly pointed out that
Wo e a e also hu a ei g, so the ha e also ight e ual to e . Thus,
with the changing time and space the marginal gap between men and
women has disappeared. Women have equal right and opportunities to
participate in politics in compare with men. And interestingly, they are
p o i g to e est at e e field .
Respondent No. 7, an ASM of Pasighat block commented,
Wo e should take i Ke a g2 a d a o e s i g should e i t odu ed
under Kebang. All the women of Arunachal Pradesh should be together to
dis uss fo e adi atio of po e t .
19
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Respondent No. 8, ASM of Rani Village, Arunachal Pradesh said:
“o e people crack jocks on us telling that, our country is under Petikut (inner
skirt) government. From grassroots to high level, women are ruling. In a
positi e se se, this ea s o e pla a ital ole i go e i g ou atio .
Respondent No. 9, Gram Panchayat Pradhan, Mehboobnagar, Andhra Pradesh said:
‘ese atio of seats fo “ heduled Caste a d “ heduled T i es, people f o
deprived groups have a better chance of being elected members. Earlier, only
persons with money, higher class and of the upper castes could be elected to
a positio of i po ta e.
Due to their political attachment their interactional position in the society has been
elevated and they tend to involve themselves in community work, which has once
o side ed e s sphe e, a d the ha e got a hold on decision making both inside and
outside the household. After Constitutional reservation of seats at PRI, special constitutional
rights are made for women to participate in politics.
Affirming Identity: Wo e s i ol e e t i P‘I has helped them affirm their identity as
women and shared experiences.
Respondent No. 10, Gram Panchayat Pradhan, Kalchini, Jalpaiguri District of West Bengal
said:
Me i ou so iet
o side
o e to e apa le of household
responsibilities only, we want to prove that we too can be independently able
to take decisions, we too can walk along with them and bring change in this
ou t .
Respondent No. 11, Panchayat Pradhan for 15 years, Madhya Pradesh, said,
Dist i t Magist ate a e to isit
Pa ha at offi e on Sunday without any
prior information and demanded to know my working progress so far and
how I am managing the GP. I said that today is a holiday, even your own
se eta
o t o e to o k toda , a d the ho da e ou ask e to o e
orders? I am a Pradhan of this Panchayat. Please go back to your office and
su
o
e o a o ki g da .
This shows her confidence, inner strength and self- recognition comes from her capability to
work and increased individual consciousness which changed her ability to transform
aspiration into action.
Changing Priorities
The PRI Act has provisions, which enforce community participation, especially of the
women, poor and the marginalized sections of the region. Some of the ways in which
women, through PRI, is changing governance are evident in the issues they choose to tackle;
water, alcohol abuse, education, health and domestic violence, economic activity.
Respondent No. 12, Gram Panchayat Pradhan, Karim Nagar, Andhra Pradesh:
20
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
P e iousl the upstai s oo of the Panchayat office was used for drinking
and gambling, which is turned into a training centre for Self Help Groups
members. Now even, exhibitions are carried out to sell their products. More
o e sta ted o i g to Pa ha at.
Most of the Women Panchayat member admitted that no matter from which party do the
leaders represent, rather they should have alliance with people. They also focus their
discussion regarding development schemes implemented in the locality. Panchayat leaders
discuss on mode of distribution the facilities to beneficiaries among the different blocks and
segments of the area.
Respondent No. 13, Panchayat Pradhan of South 24 Parganas, west Bengal said,
‘egula
eeti g of othe s a d health o ke s a e o ga ized to dis uss
about health related matters, thus awareness regarding health had been
i eased.
Respondent No. 14, Pradhan of GP Kalchini in the Jalpaiguri District of West Bengal
mentioned
Du i g
te u e spe ial fa ilities e e o tai ed
o e i ase of
marriage and also helped families to rehabilitate after head of the family dies
u e pe tedl .
But apart from that there were some women who admitted that they communicate with
people through their husbands or any other male member of the family. The reason behind
that were the domestic workload and the traditional norms and values of the society.
Respondent No. 15, Zilla Parishad Member, Birbhum Zilla, West Bengal, explained
I a ot o
u i ate di e tl to the people. M hus a d does this. Bei g a
woman I cannot mix-up with the common people who are mostly men. But
our husband can do this. People tell their problems to him. He conveys it to
e.
The above statement shows a clear picture of the traditional norms of the society. For these
women it is very normal that their husbands or other male family members of the family
pe fo thei dut . But it does ot suppo t the o ept of ―p o
o e e ause as it a
be seen from the statement that the women representatives go to talk with the people but
they only talk to the women because tradition hinder them to talk to men. There is also
evidence that the burden of domestic works also restrain them to communicate with the
people.
Respondent No. 16, ASM of Yupia circle, Papum Pare district, Arunachal Pradesh,
comments:
Pu li gi e lots of te sio
he e e so e o t a t a e sa tio ed o ou
area, even if the contract is of low budget many people apply for that contact
o k. A d it is i possi le to sa tio ea h a d e e o e .
21
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Women leaders also face problems within family and at social levels. At their home, the
women are loaded with domestic work, so they have very tight schedule to fulfill their
responsibilities as both a family holder and public leaders. Society also gives equal pressure
to the leaders. In a broader sense, there are two types of obstacles face by women leaders,
family obstacles and society obstacles or both. Again this statement shows that these
women are not proxy but they accept the help because they really do not get time for going
out and talk to the people. There is also a suggestion that if there is more open society and
the domestic works will be shared between the members of the family these women can
also attain good communication skill. Some other women also informed that as there are
costs a d othe ost of ef esh e ts, the a t atte d the eeti gs egula l e ause thei
economic condition does not allow them to do so.
As respondent No. 17, Panchayat Samity Member, Andhra Pradesh explained the problem:
The eeti g pla e is fa a a from my home that I cannot go by foot. And I
a
ot i su h o ditio to spe d o e o pu li t a spo t.
Thus the study supports the conclusion of Buch´s (1999) work that the causes for failure to
attend meetings are generally related to domestic work and the inconvenience of distance.
It also indicates the deep impact of economic condition of persons on their work.
Furthermore it was obvious to know that if they do not attend meetings then who manage
their panchayat related work. When asked about most of them stated that their husbands
manage the work. Here this can be seen as an extension of the previous category where
male members of the family help these women to perform the duties. However this is only
one dimension of participation in meetings.
Respondent No. 18, Khairabad, Sitapur district, Uttar Pradesh stated:
I ha e so a
uestio s i
i d a d a t to ask it i the eeti gs ut
the male members in the meeting do not give chance to speak. Attitude of the
male members towards our opinion is very derogatory. It discourages women
to aise a issue.
Another reason that deters women to raise any issues is lack of education.
Respondent no. 19, district of Karunagar, Andhra Pradesh said,
Ia
ot edu ated e ough to e plai
p o le p ope ly. I normally do not
speak i
eeti gs. I feel e ous to speak.
Conclusions
Many obstacles to the realization of PRI's transformative potential remain. Skepticism about
decentralization persists in many quarters. There continues to be a resistance to really
devolving power and funds from centres of (male) power to the periphery. Women still face
considerable handicaps to their involvement in politics; for example, inadequate education,
the burden of reproductive and productive roles, a lack of self-confidence and the
opposition of entrenched cultural and religious views.
A number of factors limit the active engagement of women in the political sphere. In spite of
all these the 73rd Amendment has created an opportunity and has been the prime mover in
the process of empowerment for large number of rural women to take part in the public
22
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
institutions. Democracy has become more participatory in the process of implementing it. In
many places, women have been functioning well and have engendered the development
process, although in a limited sense.. The myth of being a proxy woman gets disproved,
according to my study. Despite the constraints, they are playing an extremely important
role, which needs to be recognized. Even now half of the women are illiterate and their
economic contributions don't get acknowledged. But a good beginning has been made to
achieve the long-neglected gender justice.
End-notes
Report of the Committee on Panchayati Raj Institutions, Department of Rural
development, Government of India, pp. 301(New Delhi, 1978).
2
The traditional polity of Adi tribe of Arunachal Pradesh.
1
References
1. Astha a, “.
: Wo e 's health a d o e 's E po e e t: a lo alit
perspe ti e , Health and Place 2(1): 1-13.
2. Boserup, E. (1970): Wo e s ‘ole i E onomic Development, New York: St. Marti s
Press.
3. Gaventa, J. (2003): To a ds Pa ti ipato
Lo al Go e a e: Assessi g the
Transfo ati e Possi ilities . Paper presented at Conference on Participation: From
Tyranny to Transformation, Manchester, 27-28 February.
4. Kabeer, N. (1994): Reversed Realities: Gender Hierarchies in Development Thought,
London: Verso Publications.
5. Mayoux, L. (1995): From vicious to virtuous circles? Gender and micro-enterprise
development. Occasional Paper No. 3, UN Fourth World Conference on Women
UNRISD, Geneva
6. Ma ou L.,
: The Magi I g edie t? Mi ofi a e a d Wo e s
Empower e t , A Briefing Paper prepared for the Micro Credit Summit, Washington.
7. Ma ou , L.
: Pa ti ipato
lea i g fo
o e s e po e e t i
microfinance programmes: Negotiating complexity, conflict and change. IDS Bulletin,
29(4), 39–50.
8. Ma ou , L.
: Pa ti ipato P og a
e Lea i g fo Wo e 's E po e e t
in Microfinance Programmes: Negotiating Complexity, Conflict and Change' in P.
Oakley (ed.) Evaluating Empowerment: Reviewing the Concept and Practice.
Management and Policy Series 13. Oxford, UK: INTRAC.
9. Ma ou , L.,
: Ta kli g the Do
“ide: “o ial Capital, Wo e s E po e e t
and Micro-Finance in Cameroon, Development and Change, Vol. 32.
10. Mayoux, L. (2003): F o Ma gi alizatio to E po e e t: To a ds a Ne
App oa h i “ all E te p ise De elop e t . Paper presented at the SDC Employment
and Income Division Workshop on Small Enterprise Development and
Empowerment, Centre Gerzensee, Switzerland, 9-10 January.
11. Nussbaum, M., (2000): Women and Human Development: The Capabilities Approach.
Cambridge University Press: Cambridge.
12. Oakle , P. ed.
: E aluati g E po e e t: ‘e ie i g the Co ept a d
P a ti e Management and Policy Series 13. Oxford, UK: INTRAC.
13. O aal, ). a d “. Bade
Ge de a d E po e e t: Defi itio s, App oa hes
and Impli atio s fo Poli . ID“ iefi g p epa ed fo “ida.
23
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
14. Sen, Amartya (1999): Development as Freedom. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
15. Speer, P. W.
I t ape so al a d i te a tio al e po e e t: i pli ations for
theo , Journal of Community Psychology 28(1): 51-61.
16. “p eitze , G.M., “.C de Ja asz, ‘.E Qui
: E po e ed to lead: the ole of
ps hologi al e po e e t i leade ship , Journal of Organizational Behavior 20(4):
511-526.
24
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Gender and Language: A Study of Social Movements in India
Kshipra Sharma
Centre for Political Studies, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi
Abstract
Gender is a broad spectrum that permeates every aspect of human lives. Language and
forms of knowledge is one such domain that facilitates man-woman hierarchies.
Interestingly, the pervasive character of gender biases thrives within social relations through
literature and interaction, and vice versa. It s no coincidence that the most powerful spaces
at every joint have been occupied by men. Dominant forms of literatures are not only
authored by men but also express a male-centred perspective in its outright neglect of the
o e s poi t of ie . E e a o g alternative visions of social movements, there is a
possibility of dominant gendered spaces. The literatures produced by them, the words
chosen to communicate their ideas and disseminate agendas are often said to be gendered.
In fact, feminists accuse such o e e ts of a gi alisi g o e s o t i utio s li ited
mention of even their names in the literatures produced. My concern here is to make a
survey of the gender and language theoretical discourses and use it as an entry point for the
study of social movements in an increasingly globalising world including India.
Keywords: Language, Gender, Social Movements, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
There are diverse theories on the origin and nature of language. Right from Charles Darwin
to Noam Chomsky, people have drawn epic tools to define the remarkable evolution of
so ethi g as di e se a d deep as la guage . Ho it e ol ed a d affe ted hu a s a d i e
versa, is a matter of great curiosity among scholars from diverse backgrounds. Feminist
scholars particularly drew attention to unexplored spaces linking language to gender
identities. Robin Lakoff rightly sa s that these so ts of i te se tio i oke the
ost
ago isi g, o ple , di e se a d ulti atel i solu le issues fa i g ou so iet Lakoff,
,
p.199). “u h e gage e ts thus, help u de sta d how, what and h of gender issues,
from various angles.
For research convenience, the paper is divided into two major parts: the first deals with
language and gender – theoretical backgrounds while the second deals with the case of
social movements in India.
Language and Gender: Theoretical Background
Bakuni ightl sa s the e a e o eut al o ds . Mea i g, e e
o d has a histo a d
symbolises face as well as place value (Ahem, 2001, p.111). Debates around gender and
la guage is oadl di ided i to t o poles he e o o e side it s elie ed that
as uline
25
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
ge e i te s a e ot iased, the a e just g a
ati al o e tio
hile o othe side, it
is believed that masculine generics facilitate invisibility of women (Weatherall, 2002, p.1).
Though engagement between language and gender is a step forward in understanding the
roots of gender and challenging patriarchy but these enquiries also deepen concerns over
gender based assumptions of heterosexuality and overall essentialism. To this, the gender
theorists say their intentions are to highlight the primacy of social construction over the
physical (Bergvall, 1999, p. 276).
Noteworthy, language helps us to understand the broader social landscape. It is a tool for
individual and community communication of emotions, beliefs, conventions, and culture.
O e s beliefs are influenced by and reflected in language and knowledge system. Gender is
one such stream that manifests in language. Language plays an important role in
determining as well as reflecting the socio-cultural patterns. By identifying how women are
seen in different cultural settings, women can understand their social birth and makeup.
‘o i Lakoff ightl sa s, ou la guage use e odies attitudes a d efe e tial ea i gs
Lakoff,
,
. I his fa ous a ti le titled, La guage a d Wo e s Pla e , Lakoff sa s
that women have a different style of speaking and their way of expression communicates
and produces at the same time their subordinate social position (Ekcert and Ginet, 2003 p.
1). Clearly, language can be used as a tool of oppression and ightl a gued, it is lea ed as
pa t of lea i g to e a o a
I id . This e i ds o e of “i o e Beau oi s o k The
Second Sex a d he fa ous o ds o e is ot o , ut athe e o es a o a .
Language, thus, is one of the agencies for the creation of a myth/image of a woman.
Subordination, marginalisation of women is not a new trend. It is witnessed at every major
site of po e hethe it s so ial, e o o i a d politi al sphe e. La guage a d k o ledge
system is one such terrain that happens to re-establish masculine version as the dominant,
universal truth. The earliest concerns about gender and language can be traced to linguistics
and feminist theory and political practice. Gender has been invoked as an explanation for
use of certain words, grammar, tones, pronunciation. According to Ann Weatherall,
a a e ess a out the e uatio s et ee la guage a d o e s so ial status a e fou d
in nineteenth- e tu pu li atio s of the o e s o e e t a d fe i ist philosoph
(Weatherall, p.11).
Victoria Bergvall was another scholar who summarised the overall discourse on language
a d ge de i to th ee ajo st ea s: that o e s la guage is ega ded as deficient when
o pa ed to e s; it fu da e tall efle ts e s dominance over women; or that it
arises from difference i the so ializatio patte s of o e a d e
Be g all,
.
Eckert- Ginet too gave a comprehensive analysis similar to the above. According to Penelope
Eckert and Sally McConnell-Ginet, over the years the debates and research on the study of
language and gender were bifurcated into two different paradigms – which came to be
called as the difference and dominance approach. The difference approach proposed that
women and men speak differently because of fundamental differences in their relation to
language, perhaps due to different socialization and experiences early on. Analysts
associated with the dominance framework generally argued that differences between
o e s a d e s spee h a ise e ause of ale do i a e o e o e a d pe sist in
order to keep women subordinated to men.
26
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
“ hola s like “a a Mills ha e a tuall atte pted to u de sta d the ea i g of se ist
language and locate its areas of operation. According to her, the sexist language is a blanket
that covers a wide variety of phenomenon ranging from generic pronouns, to sex-specific
words that are demeaning to women (Mills, 1992, 183). However, one may argue that the
user sometimes, may not even know that they are part of this exploitative structure. After
all, the speake s did ot ake the la guage E ke t a d Gi et, p. . “u h a sta d has ee
a ked
e tai a ade i li guisti g oups ho ie la guage as a s ste
e o d the
ea h of those ho use it I id. . P esu ptio s that o e f o dis u si e p a ti e and
gender discourses is an important factor in analysing roots of gender stereotypes. Such
factors according to scholars like Eckert and Ginet, if unchallenged lead to further
atu alizatio pa ti ularly in case of women (Ibid. 197). These differentiations clearly are
so internalised in and around us that it is often difficult to locate natural from manipulated.
Moving on, Mills goes on to define the features of a gender free language wherein it does
not mark the distinction between women and men. She goes on to propose the methods of
dealing with sexist language by altering language use. Whether its personal or political sites,
one can intervene in the process of making new meanings and attitudes rather than being
just a subject to it (Ibid. 188).
An interesting entry point for the study of this relationship can be through power dynamics.
“a a Mills is of the ie that a pe so s elatio s to la guage a e o sta tl the su je t of
egotiatio . Opposi g Dale “pe de s sta d, she a gues that i stead of looking at language
as a
ade , o e a ie it as the s ste
ith possi ilities fo o e . He e, o e has to
e a eful i a oidi g assu ptio s of o e as a ho oge eous g oup. Mo i g o , “a a
Mills comes back to the fact that instead of looking at women as passive victims of
pat ia hal la guages, it is o e p odu ti e to theo ize po e he ei o e a e see as
part of negotiation and capable of resisting oppressive social and discursive system (Mills,
p.10).
Survey of the above theories and debates highlights the fact that the relation between
language and gender is marked by endless intersections. Even research in these areas is
difficult than it looks, meaning analysing using a language that is embedded in the
patriarchal and phallocentric knowledge system is not neutral in full sense. Answer to the
gendered language is not to plan an overoptimistic strategy to work outside the accepted
structure but to mend the loopholes in knowledge through synthesis of the old and new.
There is need for greater debates on possibilities between language and gender.
Situating Social Movements in India
Social movements or collective actions like any other public platform may have gendered
patterns worth examination. Feminist researches in the past have brought to light the
i a ilit of su h fo atio s to p o ide e ual spa es to o e o full e og ise o e s
o t i utio s fo that atte . I othe
o ds, fe i ist studies ai at aki g o e s
e pe ie es isi le, e de the i po ta t, a d use the to o e t distortions from
previous empirical research and theoretical assumptions that fail to recognise centrality of
ge de Ta lo ,
, p.
. Mo e i po ta tl , it aids redressal of crucial questions within
collective actions as to how movement history interp ets o e s li es; ho o e
27
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
lea s/u lea s to e o e a o o a i
space in the broad movement history.
olle ti e ultu e a d do o e s sto ies get
Whether it is radical movement or religious movement, gender questions are often treated
as secondary. Position of women in their working groups and their proposed alternative
system are often unclear. No movement in India is immune from gender related
controversies. This section is a gender based study of such social movements using the lens
of language and knowledge system theories.
Befo e e gagi g i to a ge de ed stud of so ial o e e ts i I dia, it s e essa to
understand what social movements mean? Social movements often are seen as both the
cause as well as the product of history. There is o eat defi itio of so ial o e e ts .
Although such formations may exhibit some common features, not all movements
e essa il a t to e alled a so ial o e e t . Ho e e , the so iologi al u de sta di g
of so ial o e e ts defi es it as the o i atio of ha a te isti s like a p otest ,
olle ti e , ha ge-o ie ted . “o e s hola s des i ed it as
o d phe o e o a d
detrimental to societal stability while others see it as a tool for societal improvement. They
are generally seen as phenomena of the modern era and industrialised society, whether
located in the First world or not (Roth and Horan, second paragraph, p.1). Among all the
approaches, Marxist approach to social movements was far more detailed. Social movement
(revolution) in the eyes of the Marxist was a vehicle of change, class consciousness, and
capture of power. According to Marx and Engels, capitalist mode of production is the root
cause of all social oppressions and collective class struggle against such oppression is the
only way out.
A country like India has witnessed a wide range of collective activities right from socioreligious movements to radical movements. Not surprising, question of gender in all such
formations remain marginalised. Whether it is their own history or their contemporary
agendas, tone of literature is often gendered or there is absence of even the women related
terms. The tactics the movement participants use in the form of slogans, attires, symbols,
signs are also worth examining.
Whether it is the Telangana Struggle (1940s), Bodhgaya struggle of the 1970s, or the
Na alite o e e t
s o a ds , o e s position remained subordinated (Stree
Shakti Sangathan, 1989, p. 15-23 and Louis, 2002, p. 142-144)1. These communist led, male
dominated movements failed to recognise and fulfil aspirations of women participants
despite their tremendous contributions. In particular, Naxalite movement kept attracting
women into cadres, without a detailed agenda for their overall upliftment. At later stages,
some of these women were advised to go back to their homes when the movement lost
momentum. Clearly, male-dominated movement failed to understand the deep implications
of adi alis o
o e s li es a d ide tities du i g a d afte thei asso iatio
ith the
movement.
If looked i to the a o e e tio ed o e e ts lite atu e, it ill e lea that ost
(communist led) movements were least concerned with gender issues. Question like sex,
a iage, hild e
e e ig o ed i the a e of highe politi al auses . At the later stages,
even mainstream left parties like CPI (ML)-Liberation (descendent of Naxalite movement)
28
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
ha dl e e talked of the o e s issues, a d atego ised the as pe so al issues. Matte s
of revolutionary marriages and children although once or twice raised in their party
do u e ts, the e e ot i luded i thei ai age das. Wo e s leade ship as a othe
issue that was given little attention. Their slogans, symbols were neither women-oriented
nor remotely gender concerned. Though they often talked of rights but they failed to steer
atte tio to e ual ights fo e a d o e .
Coming to other kinds of social movements like religious movements, promising alternate
systems are also not immune from above shortcomings. Although these movements are
generally based on innovative spiritual/religious ideas, many at times they forward orthodox
traditions in a new package. In their documents they represent women as the bearer of
sacrifice, manners, generosity, but symbol of sex lust. In India, religious movements like
Brahma Kumaris, Satya Sai Baba can be defined to this category. Although all such
movements call themselves as liberatory, it is surprising to see that their teachings hardly
e e defi e a f a e o k fo o e s e po e e t. Audie e of ost of their literatures
is also not clear. In audio-videos of these movements, women are generally showed as
odestl lad, ith ut ost atte tio to eli ate p a ti es. Pa ti ula l the B ah a Ku a is
literature portrays modern, working women as bad and diverted from their true nature
(Mahila Adhyatmik Sashaktikaran, p. 5). Even pictures in some of their text shows women
wearing a bindi, saree, with wedding chains around their neck in positive light while women
in western outfits are shown in poor light (Ibid., 4). According to some scholars, such
instances are evidences of reinforcing stereotypes in the garb of spirituality.
Lastly, these movements whether radical or religious fail to reach out to their female
participants. In an attempt to satisfy collective goals, they sometimes subsume individual
identities. Even their language and knowledge system reflect least attention and concern for
gender equality.
Conclusion
No doubt, our idea of the world is inevitably mediated by language. It constructs and
deconstructs reality for individual through a combination of sounds and signs called
language. The problem arises when this reality is painted differently for two sets of people
i.e. males and females. Language sometimes might be used as a gendered tool against
women. However as mentioned earlier, language both reflects and influenced by gender
structures. Social movements are one such platform that is expected to materialise an
alternative system but sometimes subsumed by such gendered linguistic structures. In my
opinion, in order to be called a liberatory formation, these movements must retrospect and
ai at e i i g a d e og isi g o e s o t i utio s, fo e ost i thei la guage use.
End-notes
In the Telangana struggle, communist leaders failed to re og ise o e s o t i utio . I
terms of distribution of land, women were not counted as individuals. Bodhgaya movement
was a movement led by Chhatra Yuva Sangharsh Vahini (a youth organisation) against the
feudal order of Bodhgaya Math, (Bihar). Women constituted large part of this movement,
whose main aim was to fight for equal rights of men and women.
1
29
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
References
Ahe , Lau a M.
. La guage a d Age
, Annual Review of Anthropology, Vol. 30.
Be g all, Vi to ia L.
. To a ds a Co p ehe si e theo of La guage a d Ge de ,
Language in Society, Vol. 28, No. 2, Communities of Practice in Language and Gender
Research.
Be ita ‘oth a d Ma ia Ho a , What a e “o ial Mo e e ts a d What is Ge de ed a out
Wo e s Pa ti ipatio i “o ial Mo e e ts: A “o iologi al pe spe ti e , Retrieved 13
March, 2013, from
miller.faculty.arizona.edu/.../What%20are%20Social%20Movements,%2...
Eckert, Penelope and Sally McConnell-Ginet (2003). Language and Gender, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Lakoff, Robi Tol a h.
No. 1.
. La guage a d Wo a s Pla e , Language in Society, Vol 2,
---------- Robin Tolmach. (1999). Talking Power: The Politics of Language in our Lives, New
York: Basic Books.
Louis, P akash.
. People s Po e : the Na alite Mo e ent in Central Bihar.
Mahila Adh at ik “ashaktika a , Wo e s Wi g, Mou t A u: P ajapita B ah aku a i
Ishwariya Vishwa Vidyalaya Publication.
Mills, “a a.
Mi di g ou La guage: I ple e ti g Ge de F ee Poli ies , Critical
Survey, Vol. 4, No. 2.
Stree Shakti Sangathan (1989). We Were Making History: Life Stories of Women in the
Tela ga People s “t uggle.
Ta lo , Ve ta.
. Ge de a d “o ial Mo e e ts: Ge de P o esses i Wo e s “elfHelp , Gender Society, Vol. 13, No. 1, Special Issue: Gender and Social Movements, Part 2.
Weatherall, Ann. (2002). Gender, Language and Discourse, Sussex: Routledge.
30
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The Third Gender and Gender
Self-Identification in India: A Review
Aakanksha Kumar
National Law University, Jodhpur
Abstract
In a historic ruling on April 15, 2014, the apex court of India, in the case of NALSA v UoI,
NAL“A,
de la ed that Hij as, Eu u hs, apa t f o
i a ge de , e t eated as thi d
ge de fo the pu pose of safegua di g thei ights a d that these pe so s have the right to
decide their self-identified gender. Interestingly, this ruling came in the wake of another
Ja ua
uli g, he ei a othe “C e h had tu ed the lo k a k o ho ose uals
by withdrawing the legal protection granted to them by the Delhi High Court in 2009. The
judgment does give some brilliant and original jurisprudential interpretations of the
intentions of the framers of our Constitution with respect to sex stereotyping and gender
self-identification while reaching their conclusions. This paper seeks to analyse the
Constitutional bases for recognition of the rights of this community to gender selfidentification as well as make an attempt to highlight the importance of the aforesaid ruling
for Indian law making and social justice aims.
Keywords: Hijras, Gender Self-Identification, Social Justice, Gender justice, Third Gender
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
In the recent past, there had been mounting controversy and general disagreement and
debate over the legal and societal position; and rights of gay and other third-gender groups
in India. Questions that have jostled for answers include concerns over whether they are to
be dreaded and rejected as a force that threatens to corrupt our cultural beliefs whilst
within our midst or; that they are to be merely ignored and hidden away, being denied the
basic rights and privileges that other citizens enjoy. On the other hand, there also exist
g oups ho hoose to see a e p essio of o l the atu e s di e sit i the a d ish to
el o e the as another color within the rainbow of human variety. Wilhel , Tritiya
Prakriti). Peculiar to India, especially its Hindu majority, hijras, i.e. persons who are usually
PAGMBs [persons assigned gender male at birth] and rarely persons with intersex variations
but identify with the characteristics, roles and behaviours conventionally associated with
the feminine (Chapter 1, Expert Committee Report, January 2014); have been treated with
caution and mixed acceptance. The ancient Vedic literature and subsequent writings on
Hindu mythology and beliefs continually recognised the third gender and those of mixed
ge de ide tities [Lo d Vish u s Vaa a a a ata , Lo d “hi a s A dh-narishwar form,
“hikha di, a d A ju a s assu ptio of a i ed ge de ole as B iha ala i the Maha ha ata,
etc.] a d assig ed spe ifi ge de oles fo these pe so s of the tritiya prakriti Wilhel ,
31
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Tritiya Prakriti; Na da,
, as ell as ode p a ti es still e og ise the shagun [good
omen] of having hijras visit Hindu households on occasions of celebrations like child birth,
marriage and festivals, consequent to the Ramayana narration of Lord Rama having
conferred upon them the power to bless such occasions for badhai. (NALSA, 2014 at ¶13).
On the other hand, owing in major part to a skewed version of these religious beliefs, the
hijra and transgender community has also come to be feared. Nobody wants to be
approached by one of them – be nudged with their elbows, stroked on the cheek, taunted,
cursed and flashed. Dutt,
. A d o-one wishes to incur the wrath of the curse of an
unappeased hijra. (Sindhe, 2012; Hartless and Weems, 2011).
From a legal stand-point, the legislations in our country too did little to recognise those of
the third gender. Two archaic British Raj laws – The Criminal Tribes Act of 1871(repealed in
August 1949) and the prohibition vested in S.377 of the Indian Penal Code (still in existence),
set the stage for harassment and surveillance by the police of these persons. The 1871 law,
by the sub-title An Act for the Registration of Criminal Tribes and Eunuchs, e ui ed the
local government to keep a register of the names and residences of all eunuchs who were
reasonably suspected of kidnappings or castrating children or committing offences under
Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code. “i dhe,
“.
, that i i alized all pe ile-nonvaginal sexual acts between persons, including anal sex and oral sex, came to include
transgender persons as they were also typically associated with the prescribed sexual
practices. An Allahabad High Court decision in Queen Empress v. Khairati (1884) is also
noteworthy, wherein person was arrested and prosecuted under S. 377 on the suspicion
that he as a habitual sodomite a d as late a uitted o appeal. Mukhe jee,
However, once the 1871 Act was repealed and replaced by a more inclusive and reformative
law, that was eventually renamed the Habitual Offenders Act 1952 with the tribes being
o
alled the De- otified T i es . E e though o Ce t al legislatio i I dia ope l
recognised the third gender, gender-sensitivity within the Indian bureaucracy took a small
step, ith eu u hs ei g gi e the optio to e te thei se as 'E' i stead of eithe 'M' o
'F' in passport application forms on the internet, in 2005 (The Telegraph, 2005). Later in
2009, India's Election Commission gave those recognising themselves as t a sse uals a
independent identity by letting them choose their gender as "other" on ballot forms.(BBC
News, 2009). However, until the NALSA decision, there was no other express
acknowledgement of their legal status as a third gender except in a few states. State of
Tamil Nadu is one such state that has taken several positive steps for their welfare.Few
States like Kerala, Tripura, Bihar have referred to trans-ge de s as thi d ge de o se .
Ce tai othe states e og ize the as thi d atego
NALSA, 2014 at 70).
The NALSA decision came as a much welcome respite to third gender activists and
transgender persons alike, as it heralded the beginnings of a new era of inclusivity and
protection of the law. The petition had raised pertinent questions like – could) the word
pe so g aduall epla e " a " a d " o a " i the te t of legislatio s? Wh a e the e so
few gender-neutral toilets? The Supreme Court ha(d) the opportunity not just to address the
immediate concerns of the transgender community, but also to radically change the way we
think of gender. Na ai , “iddha th,
. The la d a k uli g asks the Ce t e a d state
governments - to t eat the as so iall a d e o o i all a k a d lasses , to e a le
them to get reservations in jobs a d edu atio …to g a t the all fa ilities i ludi g a ote s
ID, passpo t a d d i i g li e se….to take steps fo
i gi g the o
u it i to the
32
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
mainstream by providing adequate healthcare, education and employment.
2014).
Mukhe jee,
The Constitutional basis of NALSA – The hol tri it of Articles 14, 19 and 21 for Transgenders
The P ea le s E ualit ai s a d A ti les 1 , 1 a d 1 : The Preamble of the Indian
Constitution establishes the objectives and goals of the Indian polity. Among these are to
secure to all its citizens social, economic and political justice and liberty of thought,
expression and belief; equality of status and opportunity and to promote among them
fraternity so as to secure their individual dignity. (Pal and Pal, 2013 at p.17). The Supreme
Cou t has e phasized that the o ds f ate it assu i g the dig it of the i di idual ha e
a spe ial ele a e i the I dia o te t…. e ause of the so ial a k a d ess of e tai
se tio s of the o
u it … ho had ee looked do
upo i the past (Sawhney, 1993,
at p. 3, 391)
Article 14, the guarantee of the fundamental right to equality, grants equal protection of the
la s to ea h pe so . It is a esse tial featu e of I dia Co stitutio alis a d a asi idea
of the ‘ule of La as propounded by A.V. Dicey, that everyone is equal before the law.(Pal
and Pal, 2013 at p.9). Thus the underlying object of Art.14 is to secure to all persons, the
equality of status and opportunity referred to in the Preamble of our Constitution.(Natural
Resources Allocation, 2012 at p. 94). This aspect of non-discriminative equality of status and
oppo tu it , to all pe so s , i espe ti e of thei ge de as e p essl laid do
the
apex court in NALSA thus – A ti le 1 does ot est i t the o d pe so a d its appli atio
only to male or female. Hijras/transgender persons who are neither male/female fall within
the e p essio pe so a d, he e, e titled to legal p ote tio of la s i all sphe es of “tate
activity, including employment, healthcare, education as well as equal civil and citizenship
rights, as enjoyed by any other citizen of this country. NALSA, 2014 at p. 54). It was further
clarified, based on the conclusions in the Expert Committee Report, that – Both gender and
biological attributes constitute distinct components of sex.
Biological characteristics, of course, include genitals, chromosomes and secondary sexual
featu es, ut ge de att i utes i lude o e s self i age, the deep ps hologi al o e otio al
sense of sexual identity and ha a te . The dis i i atio o the g ou d of se u de
Articles 15 and 16, therefore, includes discrimination on the ground of gender identity. The
e p essio se used i A ti les 1 a d 1 is ot just li ited to iologi al se of ale o
female, but intended to include people who consider themselves to be neither male or
female NALSA, 2014 at p. 59). Thus, via these conclusions, the apex court further
st e gthe ed the ideas of hu a dig it hi h a e e essa fo the hu a personality to
flower to its fullest and cannot be realized if a person is forced to grow up and live in a
ge de , hi h the do ot ide tif ith o elate to La e s Colle ti e,
. The ou t
based its findings not only on having gauged the intention of the framers of the
Constitution, but also on principles of international human rights law, especially on sexual
orientation and gender identity, by stating that these must inform the understanding of the
p ote tio s a d gua a tees u de the Co stitutio La e s Colle tive, 2014; NALSA, 2014
at p. 47-48).
33
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
However, concerns remain over an observation made at paragraph 34. The court opined
that, for transgender persons who have undergone SRS, i.e. Sex Re-assignment Surgery, the
test to e applied is ot, the Biologi al test , ut the Ps hologi al test , e ause
psychological factor and thinking of transsexual has to be given primacy than binary notion
of gender of that person. Seldom people realize the discomfort, distress and psychological
trauma, they undergo and man of the u de go Ge de D spho ia hi h a lead to
mental disorder. A d the fu the at pa ag aph
, it as held that – a person has a
constitutional right to get the recognition as male or female after SRS, which was not only
his/her gender characteristic but has become his/her physical form as well. This seems to
suggest that while for those transgender persons who psychologically identify themselves as
belonging to the third gender, the requirement of SRS is not there, but if a transgender
person wishes to self-identify as a male or female, because of a psychological factor,
ithout ha i g had eassig e t su ge , su h pe so s f eedo to do so is u tailed.
(Dutta, 2014) This apparent damage is remedied by the eventual ruling that – any
insiste e fo “‘“ fo de la i g o e s ge de is i
o al a d illegal. NALSA, 2014 p. 129).
The right to life ith dig it for tra s-genders – Article 21 expansion
It is o a esta lished p opositio that A t. , hi h e odies a o stitutio al alue of
sup e e i po ta e i a de o ati so iet Francis Coralie, 1981); is open to the most
e pa si e of i te p etatio s, o e i g a a iet of ‘ights, hi h go to o stitute the
pe so al li e t of a a d pe so al li e t
akes fo the o th of the hu a pe so
(Maneka Gandhi, 1978). The right to dignity forms an essential part of our constitutional
culture which seeks to ensure the full development and evolution of persons and includes
expressing oneself in diverse forms, freely moving about and mixing and comingling with
fellow human beings . Francis Coralie, 1981). Thus, the apex court held in NALSA that –
‘e og itio of o e s ge de ide tit lies at the hea t of the fu da e tal ight to dig it .
Gender, as already indicated, constitutes the core of o e s se se of ei g as ell as a
i teg al pa t of a pe so s ide tit . Legal recognition of gender identity is, therefore, part of
right to dignity and freedom guaranteed under our Constitution (NALSA, 2014 at p. 68).
Here, it is seen that, basing itself on an empathetic reading of the plight of the transgender
person, the judgment puts in place a comprehensive regime of rights, recognising them as
humans with a right to life, with dignity (Narrain, Arvind, 2014).
Sexual identity, freedom of expression and gender self-identification – Article 19
The Maneka Gandhi de isio ga e i th to the p i iple of utuall e ip o ati e as ell as
utuall i lusi e eadi g of A ts. , ,
a d ; oth i o te t a d o te t. A nexus
was established between these A ti les a d it as laid do
that the e p essio pe so al
li e t ought ot to e ead i a a o a d est i ted se se a d that a p o edu e
dep i i g a pe so of his o he pe so al li e t
ust e assessed agai st the A t.
freedoms attributes yardstick. The freedom of speech and expression enshrined in Art.
19(1)(a) is regarded as the first condition of liberty.(Pal and Pal, 2013 at p.1428). This
f eedo of e p essio has ee e pa ded to i lude that of f eedo to e p ess o e s selfdetermined gender identity as – Article 19(1) (a) of the Constitution states that all citizens
shall ha e the ight to f eedo of spee h a d e p essio , hi h i ludes o e s ight to
expression of his self-identified gender. Self-identified gender can be expressed through
d ess, o ds, a tio o eha io o a othe fo . No est i tio a e pla ed o o e s
34
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
personal appearance or choice of dressing, subject to the restrictions contained in Article
19(2) of the Constitution NALSA. 2014 at p. 62).
It is pertinent to note that while making this observation, the SC pointed out that in other
parts of the world like the UK, Argentina and Germany a transgender person has only the
choice of transitioning from female to male or vice versa, the third gender not being
provided as an option (NALSA. 2014 at p. 35-41).In some other countries like Pakistan
(Khaki, 2009) and Nepal (Pant,
, the ou t e og ised hat it alls the ights of the
thi d ge de . Ho e e , as a histo i fi st, the I dia ape ou t took the principle of selfdetermination of gender to its logical end by noting that persons can identify as either male,
female or third gender. By doing so it recognised the complexity of gender identity and
made space for a range of possible ways of identifying oneself. (Narrain, Arvind, 2014) The
court thus guaranteed to the trans-genders, the right of self-identification of their gender,
hile at the sa e ti e a k o ledgi g that o e s hoi e of atti e is a e p essio of
individual liberty, protected under the right to freedom of expression. And thus,
t a sge de s a ifestatio of thei ide tities th ough the
ishi g to oss d ess a d
identify themselves as female, is also an element of trans-identity protected under
nondiscrimination and equality guarantees. (SOGI Casebook, 2011 at p. 159)
Impact of the NALSA Ruling
I pa t fo the thi d ge de : The ape ou t has le e l t ied to aft a ha te of
t a sge de ights Not just His a d He s,
, hile a k o ledgi g that the moral
failure lies in so iet s u illi g ess to o tai o e
a e diffe e t ge de ide tities a d
expressions NALSA, 2014 at p. 1). The judgment engaged in some originalist reasoning that
broadly interpreted "sex" to include sex-stereotyping, (Robson, 2014). In the closing
pa ag aph, the judg e t ot o l e ui es the go e
e t to e og ize a third gender
a d to g a t legal recognition of their gender identity such as male, female or as third
gende , ut also di e ts the go e
e t to take positi e steps i edu atio , health
p o isio s, a d se iousl add ess a ious p o le s. NALSA, 2014 at p. 129). And the
guideline for these steps is envisioned to be the Expert Committee Report – …Expert
Committee has already been constituted to make an in-depth study of the problems faced by
the Transgender community and suggest measures that can be taken by the Government to
ameliorate their problems and to submit its report with recommendations within three
months of its constitution. Let the recommendations be examined based on the legal
declaration made in this Judgment and implemented within six months NALSA, 2014 at p.
130).
Thus, the implications of NALSA are far-reaching. As legal status has now been accorded to
thi d ge de , t a sge de pe so s a e e titled to e jo full o al itize ship . The de isio
ill go a lo g a i stopping egregious police practices of stripping, feeling up breasts and
genitals and subjecting transgender persons to intrusive body searches or medical
examination to ascertain their gender. Discrimination in the areas of public employment,
health care, education and access to services will be open to challenge and redress.
Transgender women may be able to seek protection under gender-specific laws for
women La e s Colle ti e,
. Ho e e , these changes will not come overnight. The
judg e t s u dou ted p og essi e ess - i that it p oje ts I dia s ope ess to fi all
e og isi g the t a sge de s as e ual ; does so e hat o e shado its e t e e
35
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
belatedness. It will nonetheless, be a reminder to us of the unacceptable ways that our
society and law treat people of difference — with contempt, injustice and violence — and
paves the way for a more humane and inclusive world for people who may or may not be like
you or me, but that in no way makes them less human. Equal in every way, 2014)
Concerns for the homosexuals and S.377, IPC: In some respects, the NALSA judgment is in
sharp contrast to the one in Koushal v Union of India. It is ironic that, while at paragraph 17
of the judgment, Justice Radhakrishan observes that S.377 has been abused and misused
agai st the t a sge de o
u it , a d Justi e “ik i i his su
a also poi ts out that –
Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code was misused and abused as there was a tendency, in
British period, to arrest and prosecute TG persons Under Section 377 merely on suspicion. To
undergo this sordid historical harm caused to TGs of India, there is a need for incessant
effo ts ith effe es e e at para 110, they stop just there and do not further delve into
the issue, opining that the apex court has already settled the matter. Justice Radhakrishnan
also otes at pa a that gender identity is one of the most fundamental aspects of life… it
efe s to ea h pe so s deepl felt i te al a d i di idual e pe ie e of ge de … i ludi g
the personal sense of the body which may involve a freely chosen modification of bodily
appearances or functions by medical, surgical or other means and other expressions of
gender, including dress, speech and mannerisms.
Thus, the judges do not clearly distinguish gender identity from sexual orientation, but the
atte is t this si plisti . But the uestio the a ises – if o e s ge de ide tit a d its
e p essio is o p ote ted, should t also o e s se ualit a d its a ifest expression, also
e p ote ted? Fu the , he dis ussi g the ea i g of se fo A ts.
a d , the ou t
also i ludes oth ge de a d iologi al att i utes as distinct components of sex. This u s
counter to the reigning understanding of both the terms: sex, as the biological or
physiological features of a person, and gender as the socio-cultural construction of what it
means to be masculine or feminine.(Mukherjee, Anindita, 2014)
Also, at para 20, Justice Radhakrishnan observes that Each person's self-defined sexual
orientation and gender identity is integral to their personality and is one of the most basic
aspects of self-determination, dignity and freedom and no one shall be forced to undergo
medical procedures, including SRS, sterilization or hormonal therapy, as a requirement for
legal e og itio of thei ge de ide tit … As e plai ed ea lie , to the e te t that A ti le
19(1)(a) protects core expressions of our identity, it includes our sexual identity. So even if
the Cou t does t ish to collapse conduct and identity – even if it wishes to hold the two to
be separate – the logic of NALSA leads inexorably to the conclusion that at the very least, in
criminalising conduct, S. 377 criminalises the expression of homosexual identity, and
therefore suffers from a 19(1)(a) problem ICLP Blog,
.
Conclusion
The NALSA decision, recognised trans-genders as the third sex, allowing them equal access
to education, healthcare and employment, and prohibiting discrimination against them. The
move reflects a growing wave of recognition of the rights of trans-genders internationally
(Matharu, 2014). And to pass on a stronger message, the judges went further to classify
trans-ge de s as othe a k a d lasses , the e
aki g the eligi le fo affi mative
reservations in education and public employment. Apart from ushering in a new era of
36
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
inclusion and open-mindedness, from a purely academic perspective, the judgment also
eads as a o de ful pie e o Co stitutio al I te p etatio a d I dia s o
it ent to its
International law human rights obligations.
Another very positive impact of the NALSA decision is that, in its wake, the SC finally decided
to conduct oral hearings and accepted the curative petition filed by NAZ on April 22, 2014,
in the Koushal case (Ratnam, 2014). The NALSA atio ale of eadi g oth ge de ide tit
a d se ualit i to the o stitutio , is the asis to eope the Koushal case, as opined by
senior lawyer Anand Grover (Ratnam, 2014).
This judgment also expands the meaning of privacy, links it to autonomy and extends it to
our core right to be who we are. It eliminates state regulation of not only the privacy of our
ho es, ut also the p i a of ou thoughts. Its pote tial effo ts go e o d e e the la ge
LGBT community. This judg e t is a pa t of ou olle ti e o stitutio al he itage Lahi i,
2014).
References
BBC News (2009, November 13). Indian eunuchs given separate IDs. Retrieved from the BBC
News website: 1
Dutt, Nabanita (2002, July 21). Eunuchs -- India's Third Gender. Retrieved from the Things
Asian website: http://www.thingsasian.com/stories-photos/2022
Dutta, Aniruddha (2014, May 20). Thoughts on the Supreme Court Judgment on Transgender
Recognition and Rights. Retrieved from the Project - as I am website: http://project-as-iam.com/thoughts-on-the-supreme-court-judgment-on-transgender-recognition-and-rights/
Equal in every way, (2014, May 4). The Hindu Sunday Magazine. Retrieved from The Hindu
website: http://www.thehindu.com/todays-paper/tp-features/tp-sundaymagazine/equal-inevery-way/article5973899.ece
Expert Committee Report (2014, January 27). Report of the Expert Committee on the Issues
Relating to Transgender Persons submitted to the Ministry of Social Justice and
Empowerment, Government of India. Retrieved from the MSJE website:
http://socialjustice.nic.in/transgenderpersons.php
Francis Coralie v. Union Territory of Delhi, (1981) 1 SCC 608
Hartless, Jaime and Weems, Mickey (2011, December 8). Hijra. Retrieved from the Qualia
Folk:
Qualia
Encyclopedia
of
Gay
People
website:
http://www.qualiafolk.com/2011/12/08/4706/
Indian Constitutional Law and Philosophy Blog, (2014, April 15). NALSA v. UoI: The Supreme
Court on transsexuals, and the future of Koushal v. Naz, Retrieved from the Indian
Constitutional
Law
and
Philosophy
Blog
website:
http://indconlawphil.wordpress.com/2014/04/15/nalsa-v-uoi-the-supreme-court-ontranssexuals-and-the-future-of-koushal-v-naz/
37
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Indira Sawhney v. Union of India, AIR 1993 SC 477
Khaki v. Rawalpindi, (2009, December 12). Supreme Court of Pakistan
Lahiri, Karan (2014, April 20.) Supreme Court's judgment on transgenders will positively
impact
society.
Retrieved
from
the
Economic
Times
website:
http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2014-04-20/news/49266254_1_judgmenttransgender-third-gender
La e s Colle ti e
, Ap il ). Supreme Court recognises the right to determine and
e p ess o e s ge de ; g a ts legal status to thi d ge de . Retrieved from the La e s
Collective website: http://www.lawyerscollective.org/updates/supreme-court-recognisesthe-right-to-determine-and-express-ones-gender-grants-legal-status-to-third-gender.html
Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India, (1978) 1 SCC 428.
Matharu, Aleesha (2014, April 19). Figure this: Gender and identity. Retrieved from the
Indian Express website: http://indianexpress.com/article/india/politics/figure-this-genderand-identity/99/
Mukherjee, Anindita (2014, April 15). SC landmark transgender judgment: What it says,
what is good and what it muddled up. Retrieved from the Legally India website:
http://www.legallyindia.com/201404154605/Legal-opinions/sc-landmark-transgenderrights-judgment-what-it-says-what-is-good-and-what-it-muddled-up
Mukherjee, Ramanuj (2014, May 30). The Third Gender and the Indian Law – a brief history .
Retrieved from the iPleaders website: http://blog.ipleaders.in/the-third-gender-and-theindian-law-a-brief-history/#ixzz371KbAZmL
Nanda, Serena (1999). Neither Man nor Woman: The Hijras of India. Wadsworth Publishing
Company. Retrieved from: http://petervas.files.wordpress.com/2013/03/serena_nanda.pdf
Narrain, Siddharth (2013, November 07). The Third Option. Retrieved from the Indian
Express website: http://archive.indianexpress.com/news/the-third-option/1191670/0
National Legal Services Authority (NALSA) v. Union of India, SC Decision of April 15, 2014.
Retrieved
from
the
Supreme
Court
of
India
website:
http://supremecourtofindia.nic.in/outtoday/wc40012.pdf
Natural Resources Allocation, In Re (2012, September, 27), Special Reference No.1 of 2012.
Retrieved
from
the
Supreme
Court
of
India
website:
http://supremecourtofindia.nic.in/outtoday/op27092012.pdf
Not just His and Hers, (June 23, 2014). The Indian Express Opinion Page. Retrieved from the
Indian Express website ; http://indianexpress.com/article/opinion/columns/not-just-hisand-hers/99/
38
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Pal, Justice Ruma and Pal, Samaraditya (2013). M.P. Jain Indian Constitutional Law with
Constitutional Documents. Vol. 1. LexisNexis.
Queen Empress v. Khairati (1884) ILR 6 All 204
Ratnam , Dhamini (2014, April 22). SC agrees to hear arguments for curative petition on
Section
377.
Retrieved
from
the
Live
Mint
website:
http://www.livemint.com/Leisure/niu1YzYdbkJpTikDRZv1CJ/SC-agrees-to-hear-curativepetitions-on-Section-377.html?utm_source=copy
Robson, Ruthann, (2014, April 15). India's Supreme Court Recognizes Transgender
Constitutional Rights of Equality as "Third Gender". Retrieved from the Law Professors blog
website:
http://lawprofessors.typepad.com/conlaw/2014/04/indias-supreme-courtrecognizes-transgender-constitutional-rights.html
Sindhe, Ujwala Sunil (2012, December). Gender Justice and Status of Eunuch. International
Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention, 1(1), 01-06. Retrieved from the
International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention IJHSSI website:
http://www.ijhssi.org/papers/v1(1)/Version-2/A110106.pdf
SOGI Casebook, (2011, September). Sexual Orientation, Gender Identity and Justice: A
Comparative Law Casebook. International Commission of Jurists. Retrieved from the
International Commission of Jurists website: http://icj.wpengine.netdna-cdn.com/wpcontent/uploads/2012/05/Sexual-orientation-gender-identity-and-Justice-report-2011.pdf
Sunil Babu Pant v. Government of Nepal, (2007, December). Supreme Court of Nepal.
Suresh Kumar Koushal and Anr. v. NAZ Foundation and Ors., (2014) 1 SCC 1
The Telegraph (2005, March 10). 'Third sex' finds a place on Indian passport forms. Retrieved
from the Inforchangeindia website: http://infochangeindia.org/human-rights/news/thirdsex-finds-a-place-on-indian-passport-forms.html
Wilhelm, Amara Das. Tritiya-Prakriti: People of the Third Sex: Part I and II, GALVA-108 - GAY
& LESBIAN VAISHNAVA ASSOCIATION - Information & Support for LGBTI Vaishnavas &
Hindus. Retrieved from the GALVA website: http://www.galva108.org/#!Tritiya-PrakritiPeople-of-the-Third-Sex-1/cu6k/098C3AAD-92BC-4F13-91FB-550C133537CD
39
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
40
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Open Defecation in India: Issues and Challenges
S. Uma Maheswari
SRM University, Chennai
Abstract
India continues to be the country practicing highest number of open defecation. Unhygienic
environment, resulting from, open defecation causes serious health issues. Apart, from
health issues open defecation has been one of the major reasons for sexual crimes
committed against women. Hence, open defecation is a serious threat to health and gender
discrimination. This paper is written with a serious concern that unnoticed encouragement
of open defecation has been result of various stigma caused to human being especially
against women. Hence, first, this paper would deal with issues giving rise to open
defecation. Second, measures taken in international arena and by Indian government to
eradicate open defecation. Third, suggestions are given to overcome the problem of open
defecation, finally, bringing in a zero open defecation India. This paper concludes apart from
tough governmental plans, awareness program, and monetary support to build individual
toilets to family it has emphasized strict penalty for open defecation would reduce
practicing open defecation.
Keywords: Open Defecation, Heath issues, Rape, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
Indian religions and culture emphasize on cleanliness, but why did it allow practicing open
defecation? Though, this could be a drawback raised out of non-invention of toilets in the
olden days and it would not have caused serious effects on health due to meagre
population. But now too, this practice continues and people are in no mood to change,
besides, supporting their arguments for open defecation. There are so many reasons for
practice of open defecation. The two major reasons for practicing open defecation are
poverty and behavior of people. The open defecation arising out of poverty could be
completely eradicated if Indian government evolves with an effective plan to help every
house to build individual toilets and by building enough number of toilets in public. But how
to bring in the change in behaviour of people, who consider open defecation, helps them in
maintaining a healthy life style. The sole solution would be to seriously penalize the open
defecators by taking deterrent measures and to encourage more awareness Programme in
rural areas by preaching the drawbacks of open defecation to completely eradicate this
practice.
This paper would extensively deal with issues giving rise to open defecation, measures taken
by India and International actors to control open defecation and finally come up with
suggestions to eradicate open defecation. This paper stresses the need to penalize open
41
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
defecators with effective statutory provisions and address the above issues that give rise to
open defecation through correct government measures, in order to, achieve zero open
defecation and bring in a safe India to live in.
Issues giving rise to Open Defecation
More than half of all people in the world who defecate in the open lives in India. The
following are the issues giving rise to open defecation. Poverty has forced people to practice
open defecation. Poverty had hampered people from constructing their individual toilets.
But, there arises a question if sufficient toilets are built, whether open defecation would
e d. The a s e
ould e a solutel No , e ause, it is ot only a problem of
infrastructure, but completely a problem of sanitation behaviour. Part of a research team
that recently surveyed over 3,000 rural households about their sanitation behaviour
found, in four north Indian states, almost half of households that have a working toilet
have at least one person who defecates in the open. Half of the people who do so told
interviewers that they do so because it is pleasurable, comfortable and convenient.
Access to water is one of the most important reasons for open defecation. Water has been
added to the list of expensive products and affordability for a common man to use enough
water for his basic needs has become a day dream (Report, 2010). Water mystery has
deprived people to take a proper bath. Some bath with 3 mugs of water too. If this is the
water condition for bathing, then how people could be expected to flush their toilets which
minimum requires 20 liters of water? Hence, these are the reasons for unclean toilets
leading people to defecate in open.
Overcrowding of urban areas by rural people, who move for employment has resulted in
space constraint to building toilets. The number of toilets in urban is so low to
accommodate large population to soil (Bank, 2009, p. 20). If space is a problem government
should take steps by restraining rural people moving to urban areas for employment, by
creating enough employment opportunities in rural areas. Hence, overall rural development
could also reduce population in urban areas.
Lack of political will, to fix the problem pertaining to sanitation is another drawback (Bank,
2009, p. 125). Clogging of water pipelines and blocking of drains results, lack of proper use
of toilets leading to uncleansed toilets, thereby forcing people to resort open defecation.
This result from lack of political will to fix the problem immediately. People in India
complain that manholes or sewage seepage and blockage are not attended, sometimes
attended with delay and even after attending, the problem persist due to improper finish of
work. The water pipelines are denied checking periodically. Municipalities fail to utilize the
tax collected from its citizens to check and fix the problem pertaining to sanitation. As many
as 95,000 toilets and 58 'Mahila Sulabh Shauchalaya' were constructed across 612 Gram
Panchayats under the Nirmal Bharath Abhiyan scheme. However, due to lack of
maintenance the toilets in most of the Gram Panchayats of Kanpur Dehat are in shambles.
Hence, this is the result of lack of political will to maintain the constructed toilets1.
Failure to provide adequate information to improve health is another short coming. Open
defecation causes innumerable water borne diseases like Diahorrea and cholera leading to
death in children and adults. Recent research reports have suggested that open defecation
42
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
affects growth of the children and there by affecting the human gene to its core and has
resulted in transformation of genetics. Hence, addressing the above issues by Indian
government would bring zero open defecation.
Measures taken by India and international actors to control open defecation
In 2003 the United Nations Committee on Economic Social, and Cultural Rights, an
international expert body provided with an authoritative commentary on the International
Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, adopted as General Comment No. 15 on
the right to water. General Comment No. 15 on the Right to Water lays out the obligations
of states to take measures to prevent, treat and control diseases linked to water, in
particular ensuring access to adequate sanitation. 2 In her 2009 report, Caterina de
Albaquerque, the Special Rapporteur on the Right to Water and Sanitation defines
sanitation as: A system for the collection, transport, treatment and disposal or reuse of
human excreta and associated hygiene. States must ensure without discrimination that
everyone has physical and economic access to sanitation, in all spheres of life, which is safe,
hygienic, secure, socially and culturally acceptable, provides privacy and ensures dignity.3
The same is addressed in our Indian constitution in Directive Principles of State Policy and in
sui generis laws. Hence, at first hand we shall discuss about constitutional provisions that
connect with decent health and dignified sanitation facilities.
Though state provide immense right to Indian people through our constitution, right to
health is not addressed directly. Instead, measures to protect health of people have been
imposed on state as duties under Part IV of the constitution, containing Directive Principles
of State policy. Article 38 imposes liability on State that states will secure a social order for
the promotion of welfare of the people but without public health we cannot achieve it. It
means without public health welfare of people is impossible. Article 39(f) implies that a child
should be provided with opportunities and facilities to develop in a healthy manner and in
conditions of freedom and dignity and that childhood and youth are protected against
exploitation and against moral and material abandonment. Article 47 stresses the duty of
state to raise the level of nutrition and the standard of living and to improve public health.
Article 48A ensures that State shall Endeavour to protect and impose the pollution free
environment for good health. Hence, these articles in its strict sense would imply state to
take measures to protect health of individuals. This implies that duty of state to provide
proper sanitation facilities to protect health of individuals (The Constitution of India, 2007).
Apart from state, the panchayats and Municipalities inserted through 73 rd Amendment Act
1992 in Part IX of the constitution plays an important role in improving and protecting
health of people. Article 243G sa s “tate that the legislatu e of a state may endow the
Panchayats with necessary power and authority in relation to matters listed in the eleventh
“ hedule . The e t ies i this s hedule o tai se tio s elated to i p o e sa itatio a d
health of people and water supply for domestic industrial and commercial purposes.
Apart from constitutional provisions, Indian government has created Sui generis laws like
Natio al U a “a itatio Poli
NU“P i
a d Ni al Bha ath A i a NBA fo
coming up with 100% sanitized society. National Urban Sanitation Policy instructs states to
come up with their own detailed state-level urban sanitation strategies and City Sanitation
Plans. It suggests usage of multi-stakeholder City Sanitation Task Force to achieve 100%
43
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
sanitized society. Environmental considerations, public health implications and reaching the
unserved urban poor are given significant emphasis in this policy. Funding options are laid
out including direct central and state support including through existing schemes, publicprivate partnerships, and external funding agencies.4
Nirmal Bharath Abiyan is a policy to improve rural sanitation. The UPA government has
come up with Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment (MGNREGA) to include works
relating to rural sanitation in collaboration with the NBA. MGNREGA has pooled money for
NBA project to set up Individual Household Latrines. The Ministry of Drinking Water and
Sanitation has not engaged any Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) to work on rural
sanitation and no funds have been released to them for the same. However, as per NBA
Guidelines, NGOs can assist Panchayat Raj Institution in Information, Education and
Communication and Capacity Building activities leading to demand generation, construction
and use of sanitation facilities. NBA has also introduced Nirmal Gram Puraskar Yojana for
villages that achieve 100% sanitation. The goal of the NBA is to achieve 100% access to
sa itatio fo all u al households
a d esta lish Ni al G a s . The e ,
t a sfo
u al I dia i to Ni al Bha at
adopti g o
u it satu atio app oa h.5
Hence, NUSP and NBA will bring in necessary changes in Urban and rural sanitation by
rendering 100% sanitized society respectively.
Suggestions to overcome Open Defecation
The former rural health i iste Ja a a ‘a esh, hile add essi g a o fe e e o
hild
height and stunting; early-life disease, ate ualit a d sa itatio
said that
the
malnutrition paradox in India cannot be understood and addressed without looking at the
sanitation issues. He also stressed the services of rural health workers and Women Self Help
Groups (SHGs) are necessary to address the problem. Because as many 25 lakh rural women
are part of SHGs.6 Hence, women self-help group could help in to solving defecation
problem. Alok Kumar in India Infrastructure Report published in 2007 by the UNICEF has
given a best illustration of Bihar where SHG has helped to enhance sanitation and hygiene
under Total Sanitation Campaign. Hence, the support of SHG could be availed in other states
too to e ha e thei h gie e
usi g lat i es. “tates like Ha a a a paig o No toilet,
No ide esulti g i
illages go f ee of ope defe atio . He e, this ould e follo ed
by other states to achieve zero open defecation.
Second, the government has to construct free use public toilets in public places like Bus
stand, Railway station, Schools, courts, temples, parks, market places and other palaces as it
deems necessary. These toilets should have proper water supply, with persons employed by
government with decent salary, to maintain toilets cleanliness and repair. Though, through
Programme of NSUP and NBA, Indian government funds individual to build Individual House
Hold Latrines. But it is not certain whether people use the money for constructing toilets or
an additional living room or for any other purpose. Instead, government could provide
employment for unemployed youths by producing materials for building toilets, involve
them in constructing toilets, and allow them to supervise whether people of every
household uses toilets or not by allotting them certain area.
44
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Third, for lack of water supply to use in toilets, on one hand, government could invest in
research to innovate toilets, which could serve the purpose with less quantity of water. On
the other hand, states could encourage people by saving water from rain water harvesting
and improve the quantity of ground water level. Next would be rationing of water to
individuals, despite their rank of rich or poor. Because, even water tax would allow rich
people to use more, this would deprive poor people of their share. The poor though ready
to pay more for improved services on supply of water and sanitation, the potential revenues
collected from low income group is not large to invest in major investments. To solve the
equity problem, the subsidies should be specially directed towards the lower income
population. Unfortunately, at the opposite, higher income populations drew most of the
benefits from any subsidy Programme. Hence, Cost-sharing arrangements and beneficiary
participation, if not sufficient, are essential to guarantee the correct policy regarding
government subsidies (Porto, 2004).
Fourth, campaigning against open defecation and its impact on development on health of
an individual through self- help g oups, NGO s a d
e o ed pe so alities ith effe ti e
measures like constant advertisements, cause based movies in television could improve the
individual to remain hygienic. Like rewards for cities and municipalities for achieving Zero
open defecation, effective campaigners could be encouraged with reward if they could
achieve people using indoor toilets with recognition, money, power and pension for life.
This would involve more people to involve themselves for a noble cause like 100% sanitized
society.
Fifth, people defecating in open could be subjected to deterrent punishment by bringing
open defecation as a serious offence as per section 269 and 270 of IPC. Indian Penal Code
(45 of 1960) in Chapter XIV mentions offences and punishment affecting the public health,
safety, convenience, decency and morals. Especially, sections 269 and 270 provide an act
committed negligently and malignantly likely to spread infection of disease dangerous to life
respectively (Indian Penal Code 1860, 2003). Hence, this section indirectly covers people
who defecate in open, because they pollute the environment and naturally likely to spread
the infection of any disease dangerous to life. But open defecators are not punishable under
section 269 as it mentions the phrase u la full and no where there is an Indian Act,
which mentions open defecation is unlawful. Open defecators are not punishable under
section 270 of IPC because it cannot be declared a malignant action, because this has been
the impact of mismanagement, lack of infrastructure and lack of political will on part of
government. The same way open defecation cannot be declared as a public nuisance and
punished under section 268 of IPC, because majority of people who practice open
defecation are poor and denied of proper sanitation facility. Hence, in order to declare open
defecation as an offence Indian government should provide proper sanitation facility to its
people. By making open defecation as an offence we can also bring change in behaviour of
people who practice and consider open defecation is comfortable, convenience and
healthier.
“i th, I
Asia De elop e t Ba k, pu lished I dia s “a itatio fo All: Ho to Make it
Happe this epo t e a i es the u e t state of sanitation services in India and offers six
recommendations that can help key stakeholders work toward universal sanitation coverage
in India: scaling up pro-poor sanitation programs, customizing investments, exploring cost
45
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
effective options, applying proper planning and sequencing, adopting community-based
solutions and forging up innovative partnership.7
Hence working on these
recommendations by Indian government would eradicate open defecation.
Finally, Pathak s8 model could be implanted by Indian government to overcome the problem
of open defecation. Pathak has been proposing Indian government to install toilets that
includes two tanks with holes that turn excreta in to fertilizer, which does not require much
maintenance. This has been used by many countries and model is a successful all around the
world. This model is patent free and can be used by anyone in the world without a fee. The
only problem that lies with Indian government is raising fund to install these toilets. Pathak
has put forth that the amount for raising these toilets would be 16 times more than the
investment made by Indian government since 1999 to construct toilets. Hence, Indian
government has to concentrate on raising funds and encourage philanthropist to invest on
building toilets. Corporates could be encouraged to utilize their share of profit on the realm
of corporate social responsibility to build up many toilets and maintaining them, as this
would make their contribution effective for protecting environment (Meharothra, 2014).
Hence, the suggestion can be worked out if public participation and partnership from
community organization succeeds in achieving zero open defecation.
Conclusion
Open defecation not only affects the defecators but also the people in neighborhood who
do not practice open defecation. Open defecation affects the growth of children by
impacting genetics. Hence, sanitation reflects an emergency not only for health, but also for
the economy. Because open defecation brings in diseases that brings premature death and
unproductive individuals.
Apart from health issues, it is a proven fact that crimes against women has been in increase
due to open defecation. A lack of toilets also deters tourists, with at least three studies
showing India poses the highest risk to travelers of picking up multiple drug-resistant strains
of fecal bacteria (Meharothra, 2014)9. By following the above suggestions and especially
concentrating on penalty to open defecators, India could zero open defecation. In order to,
bring change in mind of people who believe in taboo that open defecation is healthier and
save them from getting polluted should be punished as for practicing untouchability and
polluting the environment. The penalty should be deterrent and the punished should not
dare to do the act again of committing open defecation and should serve as a lesson to
others who practice open defecation.
End-notes
1
http://indiasanitationportal.org/18749
2
CESCR, General Comment No. 15: The Right to Water, para 37(1).
3
UN Hu a ‘ights Cou il, ‘epo t of the I depe de t E pe t o the Issue of Hu a
‘ights O ligatio s elated to A ess to “afe D i ki g Wate a d “a itatio , Cata i a de
Albuquerque, July 1, 2009, A/HRC/12/24,http://www.refworld.org/docid/4a9d1beaa.html
(accessed June 15, 2014), p. 20.
4
http://indiasanitationportal.org/78
5
http://indiasanitationportal.org/18752
46
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
6
http://indiasanitationportal.org/17765
http://indiasanitationportal.org/160
8
Pathak is the founder of Sulabh International.
9
http://www.bloomberg.com/news/2014-06-11/open-air-defecation-of-600-millionindians-targeted-by-inventor.html
7
Bibliography
Bank, A. D. (2009). Urban Poverty in India. Delhi, India: TN Ninan for Buisness Standard
Books.
Indian Penal Code 1860. (2003). Universal Law Publishing Co Pvt Ltd.
Meharothra, K. (2014). Inventor Targets Open-Air Defecation of 600 Million Indians.
Porto, M. (2004). Water and Ethics (Human Health and Sanitation). Paris: United Nations
Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation.
Report, I. T. (2010). Water Security for India: The External Dynamics. Delhi, India: Institute
for Defence Studies and Analyses.
The Constitution of India. (2007). Professional book publishers.
CESCR, General Comment No. 15: The Right to Water, para 37(1).
UN Hu a ‘ights Cou il, ‘epo t of the I depe de t E pe t o the Issue of Hu a ‘ights
O ligatio s elated to A ess to “afe D i ki g Wate a d “a itatio , Cata i a de
Albuquerque, July 1, 2009, A/HRC/12/24,http://www.refworld.org/docid/4a9d1beaa.html
(accessed June 15, 2014), p. 20.
“hee aj Latif Ah ad Kha , ight to health .
“CJ
-34, at 30.
http://indiasanitationportal.org/18749 (accessed on July 1 , 2014)
http://indiasanitationportal.org/78} (accessed on July 4, 2014)
http://indiasanitationportal.org/18752 (accessed on July 2, 2014)
http://indiasanitationportal.org/17765(accessed on June 15 , 2014)
http://indiasanitationportal.org/160 (accessed on July 3, 2014)
http://www.bloomberg.com/news/2014-06-11/open-air-defecation-of-600-million-indianstargeted-by-inventor.html (accessed on June 17 2014)
47
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Abbreviation used:
IHHL: Individual House Hold Latrines
IPC: Indian Penal Code
MGNREGA: Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment
NBA: Nirmal Bharath Abhiyan
NGO: Non-Governmental Organization
NUSP: National Urban Sanitation Policy
SHG: Self Help Group
UNICEF: United Nations Children's Fund
UPA: United Progressive Alliance
48
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Decoding Gender Discrimination in Indian Patriarchal Society
Akshit Lamba & Aishwarya Dhancholia
KIIT School of Law, KIIT University
Abstract
India is considered to be a very religious and culturally a rich and diversified country.
However, gender biasness and discrimination is an issue leading to destruction. For the
betterment of the country, it is very important to treat both the sexes equally. There is a
need to advance the social role of women. There are two basic beliefs. First, men and
women are treated as two different kinds i.e. discriminated, and second, this discrimination
is wrong and should be overturned. To solve this problem, it is necessary to know the root
ause. O e of the ost o t i uti g fa to is that ou so iet is ased o pat ia h . A
patriarchal society is where men dominate women which often leads to the exploitation of
women. Women are being discriminated because of socially generated differences rather
than biologically constructed differences. Gender is a political construction based on
stereotyped feminine and masculine characteristics of women and men. Hence, we must
look forward to remove the social and gender inequalities, injustices, and take steps to
overcome this problems which pose a big threat to the existence of a peaceful society.
Keywords: Gender, Discrimination, Patriarchy, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
Patriarchy in our society can be described as the unequal power relationship between
women and men. It is characterized by present lifetime as well as the historical period.
Patriarchy treats women as oppressed and disadvantaged. This discrimination takes place in
every aspect of life but it can be noticed particularly in institutions, places where decisionmaking is an important aspect, employment, industry, etc. Women suffer discrimination and
violence created by men which also represents patriarchy. Discrimination in society, class,
race, sexuality, etc. shows that women are at a level down from men. Feminists use the
o ept of pat ia h to des i e the po e elatio ship et ee
e a d o e . The
te
lite all
ea s ule
fathe , a d a efe a o l to the sup e a of the
husband- father within the family, and therefore to the subordination of his wife and
hild e . It efe s to the
ale sup e a
o the
ale do i a e ithi a fa il .
Patriarchy also refers to the male dominance in other walks of life: in education, at work,
and in politics. Patriarchy is therefore commonly used in broader sense to mean quite
si pl ule
e , oth ithi the fa il a d outside.
A suffocating patriarchal shadow hangs over the lives of women throughout India. Indian
culture is a patriarchy which thinks that men should dominate everywhere. We treat
women as second class citizens who cannot think or act independently. Their ordeal starts
49
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
even before they are born. However, even though India is moving away from the male
dominated culture, discrimination is still highly visible in rural as well as urban areas,
throughout all strata of Indian society. From all the sections, castes and classes of society,
women are victims of its repressive, controlling effects. Those subjected to the heaviest
u de of dis i i atio a e Dalit o “ heduled Castes . Thei pe asive negative attitudes
of mind remain, as do the extreme levels of abuse and servitude experienced by Dalit
women. They experience multiple levels of discrimination and exploitation, much of which is
barbaric, degrading, appallingly violent and totally inhumane. There are several traditions
a d easo s hi h de o st ate I dia s pat ia hal t aditio s. Fi st a d fo e ost of su h
traditions is the Dowry Tradition, because of which much of the discrimination against
o e a ises, he e the ide s fa il gi es the g oo s fa il
o e / a d o gifts.
Dowries were made illegal in India in 1961, however the law is almost impossible to enforce,
and the practice persists for most marriages. Unfortunately, the iniquitous dowry system
has even spread to communities who have not traditionally practice it, because dowry is
sometimes used as a means to climb the social ladder, and to accumulate material wealth.
The ideg oo s demand for dowry can easily exceed the annual salary of a typical Indian
family, and consequently be economically disastrous especially in families with more than
one or two daughters. Secondly, women in India are considered as a Liability: Though the
Indian Constitution grants equal rights to men and women, strong patriarchal traditions
persist i
a diffe e t so ietal pa ts, ith o e s life shaped
usto s that a e
centuries old. Hence, daughters are often regarded as a liability, and are made to believe
that they are inferior and subordinate to men. There are several reasons as to why men are
regarded as an asset for the family whereas women are as a liability: Men are considered
capable of earning money, carrying on the family line, and are also considered to be able to
provide for their ageing parents, and of bringing a wife into the family. Also particularly in
Hindu religion men play a very important role in performing the rituals. On the other hand
the women are considered incapable of earning money, and are seen as economically and
emotionally dependent on men. While they help in domestic duties during childhood and
adoles e e, the go to li e ith thei hus a d s fa il afte a iage, hi h ea s loss of
money due to dowry traditions. This is why the birth of a daughter is not celebrated
whereas the birth of a son is considered a great honor and is celebrated in a grand manner.
Discrimination against women starts within the womb of a mother or as an infant, then as a
child, then after marriage, and finally even as a widow. Thus we can see that how the
women are discriminated against at each and every step of their lives. India is one of the
few countries where males outnumber females; the sex ratio at birth is, that is, the number
of boys born to every 100 females, is quite imbalanced in India, where the Sex Ratio at birth
is 113 according to the 2011 census; also there are local differences between the North/
Western regions such as Punjab, or Delhi where the sex ratio is as high as 125, whereas in
the Eastern/ Southern India the sex ratio is 105. Hence, preference for male child persists,
quite often because of financial concerns as the parents cannot afford the heavy amount of
do
fo thei daughte s a iage, a d so the hild se atio is uite less i I dia efe to
Table No. 1 at the end). This leads to some of the most gruesome acts when it comes to
gender discrimination, such as: Selective abortions, Murdering of female babies, and/ or
A a do e t of fe ale a ies. Though pa e tal se dis i i atio
as legall a ed i
1996, the law is nearly impossible to enforce and is not even familiar to all Indian families.
50
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Parental tests to determine the sex of the fetus were criminalized by Indian law in 1994, but
the imbalances in child ratio at birth clearly point out to gender selective abortions. In total
11 million abortions take place annually and around 20,000 women die due to abortion
related complications.
As a child, girls are again discriminated and are often treated differently from male children
in terms of nutrition and healthcare, which means that the male offspring is given a more
preferential treatment. This is a major reason for high levels of malnutrition. This leads to
harmful consequences for women: They never reach their full growth potential, and develop
anemia, which causes many problems while pregnancy, complicating child bearing and
resulting in maternal and infant deaths. As far as education is concerned, again women
occupy a secondary position in terms of literacy. According to the Census of India conducted
in 2011, the literacy rate of women in India is 54% whereas the literacy rate for men is 76%
(Refer to Table No. 2). I dia s o stitutio gua a tees f ee p i a s hool edu atio fo
both girls and boys up to the age of 14, but primary education in India is not universal, and
often times not seen as really necessary for girls. Their parents might consider it more
important, that they learn domestic chores, as they will need to perform them once they get
married. This results in one of the lowest female Literacies of the world.
Child marriage is anothe e a e i the I dia so iet . As the o
o Hi du ph ase: The
ou ge the g oo , the heape the do
suggests, that if the a iage is fi ed at a
younger age, the parents of the female have to pay lesser amount of dowry which leads in
child marriage. Girls married off as children many a times move in with their husband and
in- laws right after marriage. In that case, many child wives are inclined to experience
domestic violence, marital rape, deprivation of food, and lack of access to information,
healthcare, and education. Thus, the vicious cycle of illiteracy and abuse is likely to be
continued and passed on to their own daughters. The prohibition of Child Marriage Act 2006
prohibits marriage below the age of 18 for girls and 21 for boys, but accordi g to UNICEF s
“tate of the Wo ld s Child e
epo t, % of I dia s o e aged
to
ee
married before the legal age if 18, with 56% in rural areas. The report also showed that 40%
of the o ld s hild a iages o u i I dia.
After their marriage also, the discrimination against the women continues. There is mainly a
bias towards men and their superiority in marital relationships. Though the women are
ought to be respected, protected and kept happy by their husbands, they are also kept
under constant vigilance, since they cannot be completely trusted or left to themselves.
Under the existing cultural and social ethos of India, a married girl/ woman is no longer
considered to be a part of the family of her birth, instead she has become a part of the
family of her groom. Hence, after marriage the woman leaves her parental home and lives
ith he hus a d s fa il ho is supposed to take a e of he a d keep he i his ustod ,
whereas the woman is required to assume all household labor and domestic responsibilities.
In certain parts of the country women are taught from their birth to be submissive not only
to their future husbands, but also to their in- laws. Accordingly, the society mandates a
o a s o edie e to he hus a d a d i - laws. Any disobedience would bring disgrace to
both the woman and family, and might lead to the woman being ostracized and neglected
by her own family. There is no cultural or religious tradition behind one of the most ghastly
incidents of female oppression, but the prevalence of the dowry tradition has supposedly
51
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
lead to B ide Bu i g , o a othe fo of u de i g of the ife
the hus a d a d i laws who claim, that she died in a domestic accident, so that the widowed husband would
be free to marry again and collect another dowry.
Women also face discrimination as widows
The I dia go e
e t has e a ted u e ous la s to p ote t ido s ights, i ludi g
prohibitions against traditional practices, such as the burning of widows (Sati). A widow is
still seen as a liability in some parts of the Indian Society, which might result in her being
abandoned by her in- laws. As her originating family often unwilling to take her back as well,
she might be left on her own, without any education, skills, or financial assistance. Instead
she is subjected to many restrictions, and might be required to shave her head permanently,
or to wear white clothes for the rest of her life. She is also not allowed to enter in any
celebration e.g. weddings, as her presence is considered inauspicious. Widows are also not
allowed to remarry. Child marriages may lead to child or teenage widows who are bound to
be isolated and ostracized for the rest of their lives. There remains a strong bias against
gender equality in those societal parts of India, where patriarchal traditions prevail.
Consequently, any inheritance of a deceased husband or father passes down to the oldest
son while the wife or daughter does not receive any financial benefits, which shows that
women are discriminated.
The structural hierarchy of Indian society, which puts patriarchy at the top of gender cycle,
has been predominant in deciding how women lead their lives in India and elsewhere across
the globe. With the Badaun gang-rape and murder case in the spotlight and Samajwadi
Party leaders' lack of empathy, the issue of gender-based violence is surmounting on a daily
basis. From the records, India has clearly lost the plot to curb the rising cases of rapes, laxity
in convicting criminals and providing security to women. It is always women who have to
face the brickbats and toe the line. Whether it is curbing freedom, being married off at an
early age or giving preference to the boy child, this prejudice stems from the fact that
parents treat the girl child as a liability rather than an asset. Jawaharlal Nehru, Leader of
I dia s I depe de e o e e t, a d I dia s fi st P i e Mi iste uoted: You a tell the
o ditio of a Natio
looki g at the status of its Wo e . Now, having looked at the
status of women in India, if we analyze this quote we can clearly state that India is not in a
healthy condition, as the women are being oppressed and are disadvantaged sections in the
society. Sustainable and long- term development is not possible without the participation
and empowerment of women.
Only if they participate in the economic and societal development, the full potential of the
Indian Society will be unfolded, as Kofi Annan quotes: Gender equality is more than a goal
in itself. It is a precondition for meeting the challenge of reducing poverty, promoting
sustai a le de elop e t a d uildi g good go e a e.
52
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Table 1 (Child Sex Ratio)
Table 2 (Literacy)
53
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
54
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Gender Justice and Equality through the
Monocle of Social and Legal Interface
Prakhil Mishra and Pranav Singh Rathore
Institute of Law, Nirma University, Ahmedabad
Abstract
Gender equality and justice has been an outrageous issue from many years. India faces
umpteen number of challenges in the promulgation and safeguarding social and gender
justice. Our paper is trying to go underneath the wellspring of the vital cause of gender
dispa ities. The pi otal uestio that ou pape seeks to a s e is Ho fa the issue of
so ial a d ge de justi e is ei g add essed
the i st u e t of politi al go e a e .
According to the survey of world economic forum 2013 gender inequality is being prevailed
everywhere and employability has been judged on the basis of gender which is a sheer
breakage of women civil liberties. Social justice is a key parameter to up class the position of
a woman in the society so that she will get a better exposure in other endeavours.
Keywords: Status of Women, Gender Justice, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
Gender justice and equality has been a debatable and an imperative issue to address in the
modern politico-socio arena and governance. Society has provided us with ample of values,
ethics and morals which are unequivocally providing no grounds to discriminate between
men and women. Society is an amalgamation of men and women, their efforts and
contributions is the key to stabilize peace and harmony. Our society taught us to treat
women as shakti a d do o ship its po e a d g a e.
Participation of women in various aspects is a pivotal issue to take into conformity with the
mainstream scenario and their politico-socio status. The modern world where we live, those
values that are the foundation of humankind should not be undermined otherwise this
place will sink into crises that can never recollect. One major concern we are confronting
with is increasing rate of sexual violence and abuse and major cases of domestic violence for
dowry. In this paper, we will meticulously indulge in a discourse with the present condition
of women in our society. Quite a few issues related to their rights and civil liberties will be
dealt in order to escalate the awareness about their condition and position. There are
several things, we tend to forget and ignore in furtherance to women rights and liberties,
such as participation in governance, economic activities, health and survival, fostering
societal peace and planning. To keep a check upon them is paramount to give birth to a
constructive interference of humanity and to reach the goals of development process.
55
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Role of Political Governance and Participation of Women
Socrates and Plato, the great philosophers, explicitly emphasized upon the participation of
women in the political sphere and guardianship for attaining wisdom and harmony, as there
is no difference between men and women in terms of qualities and strengths. Democratic
governance involves developing institution and process that are more responsive to the
needs of ordinary citizens1. The call for the time speaks about enriching social and political
institutions, here the role of the democratic and political governance is to inculcate various
measures, which are binding towards harmonious up gradation of those who are
marginalised and excluded from the mainstream of political and social arena. It should
address issues related to inequalities prevailing and associated with gender. For an example,
if the current scenario is considered then the vision of Mr. Narendra Modi s Go e
e t
2
2025 is also p odu i g a g eat e du a e fo e la gi g the s ope of o e s pa ti ipatio
in political governance and heading towards developing the Nation at a higher pace.
These policies have envisaged a great vision. However, if it is inclined towards the real
change that will only bring some real gain, which is a grey area and a great concern for that
matter. In India, there were several occasions when efforts have been made towards
designing a constructive interference but some or the other difficulties always polluted the
path. It has it essed the o ld s o e of the drastic changes in its conventional political
s e a io, the i lusio of P‘I s Pa ha ati aj i stitutio s th ough the e eglass of rd and
74th amendments in the Indian Constitution.3 For the very first time Women have given, a
share through reservation of one-thi d seats i the P‘I s a d this a out e e t ide ed the
a it of o e s pa ti ipatio at the g ass oot le el. I additio , go e
e t has
introduced sundry quotas for escalating the women participation and representation at
different levels of governance. However, there are many loopholes and underpinnings that
undermining the growth of these initiatives. If we vouch into the reality, a different picture
ill d a
efo e ou e es. Toda , if e a ess a
illage s Pa ha ati go e i g ou il
then, a flabbergasted fact will be that most of the women representatives or members
belong to elite group of classes of that particular village.4 Nevertheless, women
participation is there but that is not a direct one, an indirect regulation by some influential
males of elite classes of that village. This is a general picture of the survey done by ICRW
(International centre for research for women) in 2013. Likewise, many other belts are there,
he ei
o e s ights are being jeopardised and subjugated. There have been several
debates over inclusion of one-third reservation of seats for women legislators in the
parliament, but anomaly and ambiguity is persisting about the final placing of the bill. It is an
idea that is still a dream to fulfil for the house of people.5
India has been a place of holy pilgrimages and many other pious destinations that boast of a
pure soil with integrity and justice. However, this depiction of Indian culture will be
construed folly and filthy if we are not going to pursue a commonality in men and women,
in their abilities as individuals and in the area where perseverance is the key and
temperament is the source of rationality. Role of the political governance broadens the
ambit of vision we have for social justice and gender equality: It can act as a harbinger in
implementing certain laws, which are lacking at providing a carapace to women in the
modern Indian society. The rampant increase in the rate of crimes against women is also an
ala i g i sta e he e i pe a le go e
e t s i te e tio is eeded. “e o dl , a
responsible government owes a duty of strengthening safety and security issues of its
56
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
people by intensifying the sexual surveillance of citizens, disciplining the sexual behaviour of
individuals and regulating and monitoring sexual conduct through law enforcement
agencies.6
Gender Equality and Justice In the light of laws
Indian society is always construed as a cultural and ethics based junction of values but the
harsh picture of veracity is also a part of that land which ostensibly boasts of religious ethics
and moral conduct. If we look behind and scale the history of Indian immoral practices then
the veil of ignorance will torn apart. The barbarous practice of sati system, child marriage,
do
de a ds, ido s e ploitatio , fe ale i fa ti ide, nebulous property rights, etc. are
just making a synopsis of what women have been facing till now irrespective of the fact that
the country is developing and evolving. In Indian society, girls are socialized from their
tender age to be dependent on males; their existence is always subject to men.7 From the
childhood itself, girls are not treated at par with the males. They are taught to give respect
to every command of the elder males. Moreover, they are always kept behind the gas
stoves and forced to do what they have been asked, mutely and numbly. The patriarchal
system in India made women to live at the mercy of men, who exercise unlimited power
over them.8
Several legislations had enacted by the legislatures (British and Indian) in order to
ameliorate the condition of women and render justice to their disposal:
In 1829, Abolition of Sati was prioritised
In 1856, Widow Remarriage got legal assent
In 1870, Female infanticide was prohibited
In 1872, Inter-caste, Inter-community marriages made legal
In 1891, age of consent raised to 12 years for girls
In 1921, women get rights to vote in Madras Province
In 1929, Child marriage restrain act passed
In 1937, Women get special rights to property inheritance
In 1954, Special marriage act enacted
In 1955, Hindu marriage act passed
In 1956, Suppression of Immoral traffic in women and girls act enacted
In 1961, Dowry prohibition Act passed
57
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
In 1981 Criminal Law Amendment Act executed
In 1986 The Indecent Representation of Women (prohibition) Act portrayed
In 1987 Commission of Sati (Prevention) Act playacted
Likewise, several enactments are being sanctioned until this date to bring gender parity in
industrial and economic set up. That will be discussed under the purview of economic
disparities in the next section.
The initiatives taken by the virtue of political governance are trying to take in hand the
problems faced by women in day-to-day life in an Indian society, nevertheless
discrimination and victimisation of women is not coming to a halt. The Indian constitution is
the bedrock of law and policy in India. It is a religion of law, through which we vouch into
the litigiousness of every act, every reaction and rights of the people. There must had been
firm things in the mind of the framers of the constitution for the fortification of women
rights as they have enshrined quite a few provisions, which act as a carapace to women civil
liberties.
Article 14 provides equality before law and commands to not discriminate or exploit
because of gender. Article 15 defines the rights of the women and safety of the same
through legal jurisprudence. Article 16 protects the equal opportunity in matters of public
employment. Additionally, articles 17, 18, 20, 21, 22 and 23, envisaging a legal framework
fo shieldi g o e s i il li e ties. Mo eo e , to shoulde the espo si ilit of
safeguarding and supervising all the laws and provision, a strong judicial set had been
envisioned, and undoubtedly, it has stood firmly whenever the stern tasks have been
assigned to it for imparting justice. Some of the landmark judgements by Indian judiciary are
as follows:
CB Mutthama vs Union of India9
In this case, the validity of Indian Foreign service (conduct in discipline) rules of 1961 was
challenged under which a woman employee has to sign a written permission before her
marriage is solemnised that her employment can be terminated at any course after her
marriage or she may has to resign. Supreme Court straight forwardly slashed the ruling as it
was against article 14 and 16 of the Indian constitution and abrogating a woman to continue
in foreign services even after her marriage. In addition, Supreme Court predicated that men
and women are not different in the eyes of law. If the rule is discriminating because of
societal interpretation of consequences of a marriage then it should be discarded.
Air India v Nargees Mirza10
Supreme Court in its ruling struck down the provisions of rules stipulated termination of a
woman from the airhostess services once she becomes pregnant. Therefore, providing a
carapace to women employee from discrimination.
58
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Pratibha Ranu v Suraj Kumar11
In this case, Supreme Court held that stridhan property of a married woman should not be
placed with the man as dowry is totally prohibited and the property is a sheer deed of love
presented to her by the parents and should be used for her usage only.
Vishakha and others v State of Rajasthan12
Supreme Court stood firmly against the sexual harassment at the workplace and
recommended the Parliament to enshrine laws to protect women from this assault. With
reference to which sexual harassment at the work place (Prevention, Prohibition and
Redressal) Act and Rules, 2013 have been notified by the ministry of women and child
development.
Similarly, at several instances, the Indian Judiciary has rectified the underpinnings in the
protocol of laws and its functioning in order to address the sensitivities of social and
administrative set up of the country. This has incepted a hope of goodwill and provided a
vision to the dreams that are thriving for gender equality through the monocle of social and
legal interface.
Economic Discrimination and Gender
Wo e a e paid less tha
e e ause the hoose to lo -pa i g jo s.
Me ea
o e e ause the a e ade to do high-ea i g jo s.
Me ha e a g eate espo si ilit i suppo ti g the fa il tha the o e a d therefore
ha e a g eate ight to the jo .
Such are the accepted wisdom, which are very popular when it comes to the wage gap
between male and female. This and many others arguments and defenses are put forward
by those who justify and argue from the sides of male dominance in the society. Gender, is
not only related to the social role and status, but also has great economic significance,
perceptible in long-term outcomes. Gender equality represents a key factor for unlocking
the economic potential of nation-states and for leveraging economic growth.
Economic Discrimination is different rates of compensation for the same ability or output,
ased o fa to s su h as the o ke s age, eth i it , a e, eligio , o sex.13 Whilst we
contemplate about economic discrimination in Indian context, the disparity between the
rich and poor and between the men and women occupy most of the debates. India is a land
he e ultu e a d t aditio has a st o g hold o e e pa t of the so iet . I I dia, o e s
participation outside the home is viewed as inappropriate, subtly wrong, and
unquestionably perilous to their chastity and womanly virtue. When a family recovers from
an economic crisis or attempts to improve its status, women may be kept at home as a
demonstration of the fa il s o alit a d as a s
ol of its fi a ial se u it . Well-off and
better-educated families may send their daughters to school, but are able to afford the
cultural practice of keeping women at home after schooling is complete.14 Such cultural
reasons are known for creating barriers for women to work. Even inside India, the land of
diversity, the same pattern is not found everywhere. India of North has less women
participation in labor and industrial sector as compared to Southern regions where women
have comparatively higher freedom in the society. An important conclusion which can be
drawn out from these statistics is that, in the south, where more freedom is given and the
59
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
education rate is high, the problem of gender gap and gender discrimination is less as
compared to other areas.
We now try to look over the problems, their possible reasons and their solutions when it
comes to removing or diminishing the gender gap. The biggest problem in analyzing the
status of this country is to know the difference between a poor or a rich, developed or
developing nation. Many researchers have found difficulties whenever they try to scrutinize
the status of the countries. They assert that the developed countries are rich because of its
greater technological progress, a higher rate of investment and saving, better education,
skill levels and infrastructure.15 Nevertheless, over the past three-four decades, the World
Bank and IMF have spent a lot of money on developing countries, which ended in
disenchantment, causing no change in the GDP rate differences of Developed and
Developing Nations. This strained people to change their focus to culture and social
infrastructure of the developing nations. When these things gained attention in determining
the economy of the country then the need to understand the role, status and behavior of
the neglected population until now, i.e. women, arose.
When the focus shifted from the wealth to the social wealth, a very new concept of
development emerged. Today, it is not about increasing the Gross Domestic Product only.16
Development in poor countries, as Amartya Sen argues, should not be about increasing their
GDP and increasing the wealth, real development will be achieved when the people enjoy
the freedom associated with wealth like the freedom to choose and the freedom to become
educated. When you restrict a particular class to enjoy their freedom, they act as
disincentives to economic growth. Women in India make up for almost half of the total
population and the restrictions and the lack of freedom given to them can be attributed to
the failure of Indian economy to stand amongst the developed nations.17 India, in the
process of neglecting women from the economy has wasted a lot of its human resource
because there has not been any proper utilization of the best possible and available
resources.
A e e t su e a d the epo t
I stitute fo Wo e s Poli ‘esea h illust ated that
women earn less than men even in the women dominated jobs.18 The notion that men can
do the work more effectively has been accepted by largely all the fields. The cardinal issue
fo the e e ge t dispa it et ee
e a d o e is glo alizatio . The effe ts of
globalization widen the gap between men and women in terms of the access to the political
and economic power. The main reason why this problem has always remain hidden and
unnoticed is that they are caused by structural attitude and social problems, and reporting
them and compiling their data becomes an almost unworkable task. Government from time
to time has tried to remove or to minimize the gap. However, the inequality still prevails. In
developing countries like India, the main problem is not the different wage rates, but the
differential access to wage employments.19 The discrimination still persists, even in
promotions, where a men get privileges and the women, on the other hand, gets increased
workload as is evident from the stats provided by women commission of India.20
Therefore, for economic development it is crucial to try and to erode the discriminatory
social norms by encouraging policies and education that underline the value of women in
society and particularly in the labor market. We need to think about targeted policies that
60
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
ha ge so ial o s a d so iet s pe eptio s of hat omen are capable of.21 There is a
role for the government in financing projects like Mahila Samakhya, a women's
empowerment project launched in 1986 by the Ministry of Human Resource Development
,which through the building of village level collectives, seeks to bring about a change in
women's perception about themselves and that of society regarding women's traditional
roles. Respect for human rights, democracy, rule of law and transparency are those factors
which are necessary, but not sufficient to guarantee equal opportunities for men and
women in the country. Positive gender discrimination is also necessary22. Meanwhile,
political will is a decisive factor in achieving gender equality.
Suggestions and Analysis
In order to attain genuine gender equality in several steps should be taken:
The appropriate legislation for achieving gender equality should be strengthened
and its implementation should be guaranteed by the public/state and private
sectors.
Women should be given legal advantages, as their household function requires
special treatment.
Gender awareness activities should be widely implemented in order to explain the
meaning of gender equality, how to achieve it and what benefits society and the
country will gain by ensuring gender equality.
Approp iate so ial i f ast u tu e eeds to e
eated to suppo t o e s
involvement in the labour force.
“pe ial state aid p og a
es should e i itiated to e og ize a d fa ilitate o e s
household functions.
Structural gender discrimination should be overcome by legal means and
appropriate transparent systems based on equal rights and merit should be initiated.
Gender statistics should be applied more widely.
The gender impact of any law and policy should be examined before it is
implemented.
The gap between salaries in masculine and feminine sectors should slim down by
eradicating vertical segregation.
All this if properly implemented can very effectively solve the problems of Economic
and social discrimination in gender.
End-notes
( United Nations, 2002)- the politics of democratic governance, report of seminar held in
London on march 1-2 2007
2
Aj e “i gh Fe ua
. Bjp s Visio
: Pa t to e phasize ide pa ti ipatio i
governance , gender justice. Retrieved on 11 June 2014
from,http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2014-02-03/news/46962919_1_bjppresident-nitin-gadkari-vision-document-vote-bank-politics
3
Indian governance report synthesis 2013 - Oppo tu ities a d halle ges of o e s
politi al pa ti ipatio i I dia - ICRW- UN women joint publication.
4
Ibid 3.
5
PTI (21 February 2014). Women bill: an idea yet to come in loksabha. The Hindu. Retrieved
on 12 June 2014 from, http://www.thehindu.com/news/national/womens-bill-an-ideawhose-time-is-yet-to-come-in-ls/article5713978.ece
1
61
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
6
Ratna Kapur (29 March 2013). Gender Justice, interrupted. The Hindu. Retrieved on 13
June 2014 from,http://www.thehindu.com/opinion/lead/gender-justiceinterrupted/article4559007.ece
7
Vijay Pal Singh.Gender justice in India. retrieved on 20 June 2014 from,
http://www.legalserviceindia.com/articles/gen_j.htm
8
Ibid
9
VR Krishna Iyer. The sotomayor Saga and justice- 1976 SCC(4) 260
10
AIR (1981) 4 SCC 355
11
AIR 1985 SC 628
12
AIR 1997 SC 3011
13
Definition- Business dictionary. Retrieved on 5 July 2014, from
http://www.businessdictionary.com/definition/economic-discrimination.html
14
Sunita Kishore and Kamla Gupta,Women and Equality in India. retrieved on 5 july 2014,
from
http://dhsprogram.com/publications/publication-OD57-Other-Documents.cfm
15
Annie Mikkola and Carrie A Miles. Development and gender equality: consequences,
causes, challenges and cures. Retrieved on 6 July 2014.
16
Ibid
17
Supra note 3
18
Market watch, the wall street journal. Women earn less than men even in woman
dominated
jobs.
Retrieved
on
6
July
2014
from,.http://blogs.marketwatch.com/capitolreport/2
014/04/07/women-earn-less-thanmen-even-in-woman-dominated-jobs/
19
Alex Collier, (1994). Gender Discrimination and Growth: Theory and Evidence from India.
retrieved on 6 july 2014.
20
Ibid
21
Berta Estve – Volart (2004). Gender discrimination and growth: theory and evidence from
India. Retrieved on 6 july 2014 from,
http://eprints.lse.ac.uk/6641/1/Gender_Discrimination_and_Growth_Theory_and_Evidence
_from_India.pdf
22
Eka Sepashvili (2012). Economic aspects of gender discrimination in the Georgian labour:
Myths and realities. Retrieved on 6 July 2014.
62
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
‘ole of “ocial E terprise i Wo e s E po er e t:
A Case Study of Sadhna
Rhea Bhandari
Pandit Deendayal Petroleum University, Gandhinagar
Abstract
Sadhna is proud to have completed ten years of functioning as a social Enterprise that is coowned by 700 women of Rajasthan. Seva Mandir a NGO in Udaipur started a small appliqué
work program in the year 1998-the patchwork program (as Sadhna was called then) with a
group of 15 women. The journey in the early years seemed long and difficult but there was
probably more to it. The hard work and persistence paid off and Sadhna in 2004 became
registered as for- Profit Mutual benefit trust with 235 members. Sadhna continues to walk
with pride and confidence by attempting to make a remarkable change in the lives of
o di a
u al o e .“adh a s task does t get fulfilled
alte ati e ea s of i o e
generation but it goes on to make the poor women aware about their individual and social
responsibilities and thus empowering them. Sadhna has continued its efforts in increasing
the number of its artisans (beneficiaries) every year. Sadhna regularly interacts with its
artisan members through meetings and workshops and tries to solve their problems/issues
arising both at a personal and professional level. The foundation and the mission of Sadhna
has always been to be committed to empower women, both economically and socially and
enhance their self-esteem. Making its artisan members, self-sustainable and give them
access and control over a significant financial and social resource, a status in their family and
society.
Keywords: Artisans, Social Enterprise, Empowerment, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
[Acknowledgement: I am thankful to Ms. Leela Vijayvergia, CEO of Sadhna who in spite of her busy
schedule answered all my questions and the artisans to whom this paper is dedicated. Lastly, I would
like to thank Santosh Kumar sir for his inputs on the paper.]
Women Empowerment
Women face many social challenges today whether it be making soaps and incense in order
to secure an income for her family to raising children amidst the harsh economic crisis. A
woman is dynamic in the many roles she plays. In the village of War here in Maharashtra
400 women stood up and raised their voices to ban alcohol and drugs. Women have
withstood perennial health problems due to the lack of toilet facilities and are forced to use
fields and open spaces for defecation. Gender equality is, first and foremost, a human right.
A woman is entitled to live in dignity and in freedom from want and from fear. Empowering
women is also an indispensable tool for advancing development and reducing poverty.
63
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Empowered women contribute to the health and productivity of whole families and
communities and to improved prospects for the next generation.
The importance of gender equality is underscored by its inclusion as one of the eight
Millennium Development Goals. Gender equality is acknowledged as being a key to
achieving the other seven goals. Yet discrimination against women and girls - including
gender-based violence, economic discrimination, reproductive health inequities, and
harmful traditional practices - remains the most pervasive and persistent form of inequality.
Women and girls bear enormous hardship during and after humanitarian emergencies,
especially armed conflicts. There have been several organisations and institutions
advocating for women, promoting legal and policy reforms and gender-sensitive data
collection, and supporting projects that improve women's health and expand their choices
in life. Despite many international agreements affirming their human rights, women are still
much more likely than men to be poor and illiterate.
They usually have less access than men to medical care, property ownership, credit, training
and employment. They are far less likely than men to be politically active and far more likely
to be victims of domestic violence. The ability of women to control their own fertility is
a solutel fu da e tal to o e s e po e e t a d e ualit . When a woman can plan
her family, she can plan the rest of her life. When she is healthy, she can be more
productive. And when her reproductive rights — including the right to decide the number,
timing and spacing of her children, and to make decisions regarding reproduction free of
discrimination, coercion and violence — are promoted and protected, she has freedom to
participate more fully and equally in society. Women's empowerment is vital to sustainable
development and the realization of human rights for all. Whe e o e s status is lo ,
family size tends to be large, which makes it more difficult for families to thrive. Population
and development and reproductive health programmes are more effective when they
address the educational opportunities, status and empowerment of women. When women
are empowered, whole families benefit, and these benefits often have ripple effects to
future generations. The roles that men and women play in society are not biologically
determined - they are socially determined, changing and changeable. Although they may be
justified as being required by culture or religion, these roles vary widely by locality and
change over time.
Social Enterprise
The te
so ial e te p ise a e a out f o
e og itio that i the UK a d a oss the
world, there were organisations using the power of business to bring about social and
environmental change without a single term to unite them. Since the term started being
more widely used in the mid-1990s, there has been a lot of discussion and sometimes
confusion about what social enterprise is. At Social Enterprise UK we feel we must be clear
but pragmatic when it comes to defining social enterprise. Here are what we believe are
the characteristics of a social enterprise.
Features of Social Enterprises
Clear social and/or environmental mission set out in their governing documents
Income through trade
Reinvestment of major part of profits
64
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Autonomous
Controlled in the interests of the social mission
Accountable and transparent
Sadhna: Initial Phase
Sadh a, the o e s e te p ise set up
“e a Ma di has o o pleted te ea . The
paper talks about the challenges and the successes. The steady feature is that the
commitment, courage and tenacity of both artisans and staff in making Sadhna a very
special experiment. The everyday struggles for equality, recognition and respect- both are
simple and profound and that is what has kept everyone going. On, the economic front , this
year saw no change in the low growth trend on the last few years. Sales only grew by 5%
and production by 7%. And even this modest increase in production and sales came from
the increased use of silk fabrics than an increase in the total number of pieces produced or
sold.
The total number of artisans involved with Sadhna, has also for the first time since inception
reduced from 697 to 657 this year, 30 new women joined Sadhna during this year and, 70
existing members dropped out. While some of this can be attributed to the overall
economic environment, but it is also the case situation WHICH calls for introspection and
out of the box thinking from our side. However, the year has also not been without its year
of silver linings –two of the artisans were invited to take part in the republic day parade and
not only did they meet the president of India, but also showcased their art before the entire
nation. And the collector of Rajsamand gave a certificate of appreciation to Sadhna as a part
of the Republic Day celebrations at Rajsamand. Another big milestone was the inauguration
of the Common Facility Centre at Delwara --an initiative that has been in the making for
many years. The First conversation around this happened in Delwara in 2001 on a warm
bright November morning, when at the end of a very inspiring meeting, Prof. Mary
Katzenestein asked the women about their dreams. And the women of Delwara said they
would like to have their own space.
Ma
etu ed f o a f ie d s eddi g a d de ided to ake this the eddi g gift- she
promised the women that she would help them get started with money for the land. But, it
took women and Sadhna five years to find the land.And another couple of years till NABARD
joined hands, and they got the money to make the building. Finally on 22 nd June this year
the Wo e s o
Co
o Fa ilit Ce t e CFC as inaugurated by Mr. Jiji Moumen, the
CGM of NABARD -a poignant and most fulfilling moment for everyone. In summay, the years
have been good. Sadhna with its enviable band of artisans and staff its enormous goodwill
and with a supporter like Seva Mandir will be successful.
Since its registration as an independent entity in 2014, Sadhna has been a learning
experience with new challenges and opportunities helping the enterprise to grow over the
years. Although, the growth cannot be measured in terms of volumes and members but by
overcoming business and social challenges its almost winning half the journey. Seva Mandir
being the backbone of Sadhna has played a major role- right from initiating the income
generation program (appliqué and patchwork program) in
till date.“adh a s G o th
also lies in the collective strength of its member artisans who have continuously supported
the enterprise in good and hard times. Today the enterprise consists of 657 registered
65
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
members from different locations based in and around Udaipur and Rajsamand district of
Rajasthan. There are 46 groups in total comprising of each 15-20 women each. Out of the
total 46 groups, 6 are tribal groups comprising of 105 artisans. There are 7 stitching groups
comprising of 72 artisans.
Turn-around Phase in Sadhna
“adh a s a tisa
e e s this ea ha e edu ed f o
to
.
o e joi ed the
membership and 70 members dropped out this year. This has been a crucial phase for
Sadhna. If we look at the other side of the coin, the phase definitely shows a positive side of
Sadhna. The objective of Sadhna is not only empowering women but also to make them
socially and economically stable and having control and access over significant financial and
social resources. The development of Udaipur city along with opening of new malls and
other similar organizations like Sadhna has created new job opportunities for the women.
The brighter side is that it is achievement for Sadhna that it trains its artisans over the years
and allows them the independence to choose options for becoming economically stable and
confident to take their own decisions. These artisans have emerged as confident and
responsible citizens of the society and negotiation power has increased. Empowerment
today has no doubt led to development of artisans as they stand as strong decision maker
no doubt led to development of artisans as they stand as strong decision makers not only in
their family but also in their society. Sadhna has made efforts to conduct a household survey
this year so as to study how many artisans/fa ilies ha e ee i pa ted ith “adh a s o k.
The survey was conducted on the 700 members who constitute the Sadhna family,
benefiting more than 5000 family members and ultimately benefiting the community at
large.
Sadhna conducted a survey at educational level and skill level and the findings are as given
below:
Literate Artisans- 25%
Illiterate Artisans- 75%
Skilled Artisans-42%
Semi-skilled artisans- 31%
Unskilled artisans-27%.
Over the years Sadhna has tried to make a change in the lives of the artisans by not
providing them economic and social security but also to upgrade their skills through skill
development trainings and workshops. Keeping in mind the social aspect, Sadhna conducts
training programmes and workshops for its artisans every year. This helps to motivate them
and brings out the best in them. These training programs bring forward various social issues
arising in their villages and personal problems which are tackled by our social manager.
Through, the support of Trifed, Sadhna has conducted Design Workshop Training (DWT)
and Primary Level Training (PLT) for Bhil basti artisans. Advance Level Training (ALT) was
provided to 20 Bhil basti artisans in order to improve their efficiency and skill so that their
output can be increased with good quality and exquisite handwork. Sadhna in collaboration
with ILFS Skill School Jaipur has provided Sewing Machine Operator (SMO) Training to 30
artisans at CFC Delwara. These tailoring artisans have been absorbed by Sadhna at Delwara
office.
66
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Exposure Tours
Akashara –a workshop was conducted. The main aim of conducting exposure tours and
workshops are to showcase crafts from different states and to display best handcrafted
quality work. The object of study is even to study exports, what factors should be taken
while producing products that are to be exported focus on product quality etc.., The best
thing that is learnt is sample for the customers based on the market forecast and take the
feedback.
Social Security for Artisan Members
The artisans need for a safe secure future by applying for various pension, health and
provident fund schemes to a large group of artisans has been a challenging task for
Sadhna. Every year Sadhna makes efforts to provide the artisan members with various social
security schemes like- Scholarships, health insurances, medical check-ups etc. Sadhna had
applied for scholarships for 142 students of the artisan families out of which 140 received
scholarships .The total amount received against 140 students is 168000. The reason of
sending less application forms over the years were that BPL families were getting the
benefit from the schools themselves and as per the decision taken by LIC they can avail the
benefit of scholarship either from them or from their respective schools or LIC.
Artisans ID cards from Development commissioner (DC) Handicrafts were issued to 161
artisans this year, out of which 80 artisans availed loan facility of Rs. 25000 each. All Sadhna
artisans have been benefited from Janshree Bhima Yojana. An ESI scheme was introduced
last year and from this onwards all Sadhna artisans are covered under ESI. The artisan this
year through maturity benefits, general illness, operation and other hospitalization benefits
etc. 15-20 artisans have availed maternity benefit this year that covered their wages even
though they were not working. Also the artisans who have done good work and are earning
higher wages are benefited more through the scheme as they are getting best medical
facilities/ treat e t i p i ate hospitals f ee of ost hi h othe ise the ould t ha e
afforded. This has motivated other artisans who try and work better to avail the facilities
from ESI. Internal Loan facility of Rs. 5000 was provided to 15 artisans.
Production and Sampling
The total amount of production for the current year stands to Rs. 2,30,90,200 and the
estimated growth is of 7%. This is due to increase in number of pieces and production of silk
items through Fab India order which are high in value. The number of factors affect the
sampling are increase in manpower, increase in the production unit leading to increase in
expenditure .On the other hand there were shortage of artisans due to which we were not
able to meet the expected delivery lines. Also value addition to the product has become
more complicated which makes it difficult for the artisans to work. Another progress was
that Sadhna reviewed a new opportunity to do high end work plan through Plan Denmark
order by production of khadi jackets. This was a learning experience for the artisans who
showed the skill and efficiency. Sadhna focused on small buyers by developing samples as
per the design specification.
Market Promotion and Branding
Sadhna has marked its products in both, retail domestic and international markets.
Advertisments of retail outlets have been in magazines and in visitors guide book like Go
67
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Udaipur etc. which help a lot of tourists to reach out to Sadhna. New hoarding has been set
up at Airport and at busy areas within the city. Sadhna this year has focused on social media
marketing and has tried to makes its presence on Facebook. New arrivals, update of events
and upcoming exhibitions were highlighted which helped to promote sales. Sadhna has
worked on its website trying to give it a new look. New product catalogue and arrivals have
also been updated.
Fair-Trade Forum
India is actively involved in promotion of its brand and being a member, Sadhna launched
Fair Trade branch at both its retail outlets within Udaipur city. The objective of the same
was to promote Sadhna Products under fair Trade Brand and also promote the products of
other Fair Trade members.
Sales of Sadhna Products
The total sales figu es fo the ea s a e ‘s. , , ,
a i ease of . %. “adh a s i t a
sales performance for the last five years have improved. Fab India orders have been
increasing over the years, but this year there have not been visible growth.
Table 1 Comparative Sales Chart for The Last Five Years (Figures in INR)
Channels
Sadhna
Stores
Exhibitions
Domestic
orders
(excluding
Fab India)
Fab India
Order
Export
Orders
Total
2009-10
30,88,786
2010-11
33,58,653
2011-12
38,00,735
2012-13
29,35,129
2013-14
31,16,136
31,47,164
51,06,558
26,50,390
40,99,506
32,43,908
31,42,178
35,59,447
15,84,908
36,38,956
39,62,571
1,25,13,280
1,46,20,114
1,85,31,056
2,09,88,627
2,10,29,123
25,22,365
42,60,289
43,48,206
54,40,207
40,14,240
2,63,78,153
2,86,31,306
3,27,80,44
3,35,42,501
3,51,33,506
Over, the years Sadhna has received constant support of the buyers who have constantly
worked with them and supported their cause. Sadhna has always thanked its buyers who
have continuously worked with them and supported their cause. Sadhna whole heartedly
thanked its buyers who contributed to the success journey and growth namely- Mata
Traders, USA, Sustainable threads, Press Alternatives Co. Ltd. and Shiho Yamaski, Japan.
Conclusion
Over the past years Sadhna has been facing problems in sourcing the fabric which has been
major reasons for delay in supplying the customer order. To overcome this Sadhna has
made serious efforts to tap new suppliers and visit the existing suppliers to study and
analyze the problem in delay in receiving the fabric.
68
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Web Resources
www.thp.org
www.jaipurrugs.org/
www.hic.in/empowerwomen. htm
www.womenempowermentinindia.com
www.artofliving.org>----->case studies
asianphilantrophy.org/a-reminder-of-the-importance-of-womens-empow.
Httfs://www.unfpa.org/gender/ic/-07.htm
www.womenempowernment.org.in
sitesresources.worldbank.org/__womens _economic_empowernment.pdf
www.sadhna.org
www.womensempowermentinindia.com>womenempowernemt
www.udaipurblog.com>social
www.udaipurtimes.com/sadhna_a_womens_handicraft_enterprise of Sewa
www.sevamandir.org/empowering.org/empowering_women
www.sevamandir.org/_/annual report 2011-12 with audit report.pdf
www.fsdinternational.org/node/277
www.india.youth-leader.org>adult
www.ashanet.org/projects_new/___/876/sevamanidr_field_visit.doc
69
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
70
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
International Humanitarian Law: Indian Perspective
Abidha Beegum V. S.
Aligarh Muslim University Malappuram Centre, Malappuram
Abstract
Human rights form a fundamental component of any democracy (Landman, 2013). Its
enforcement attaches a significance of equal measure. It is imperative therefore for any
country that purports to uphold and observe the principles of democracy to put in place
strong legal frameworks and institutional structures to ensure the attainment of human
rights. In order to gain a substantial insight to this topic, it is imminent to first gain an indepth understanding of what international humanitarian law means, what in encompasses
and the its modus operandi. The United Nation has made significant legislative and
institutional strides towards ensuring that both member and non-member states treat their
citizens with dignity and humanely. In these regards, International Human Rights Law, which
is intended to advocate for and to protect human rights at international, regional and
domestic fronts, suffices. Made up of treaties between member states, international
humanitarian law contains obligations and penalties for non-conforming states. Member
states ratify the treaties as a sign of legally binding themselves to the obligations therein.
Some members ratify the treaties in whole while others take it in part. A majority of the
members domesticate the treaties through national legislations. The treaties that make up
international humanitarian law range from regional treaties to international treaties. This
paper tries to analyze the position in India and how far India ensuring its enforcement.
Keywords: International Humanitarian Law, United Nations, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Internally Displaced Persons (IDPs): Concepts, Implications and Theories
The definition and conceptualization of interior uprooting and IDPs has not seen all inclusive
understanding. While numerous backer a compact definition that anxieties evacuating by
clash, roughness or oppression, others see inward uprooting as a more extensive idea
epitomizing any individual or persons evacuated by these reasons notwithstanding regular
catastrophes and advancement1. Just two unmistakable peculiarities are all around
acknowledged as qualities of inside removal: automatic or pressured development, and the
event of such development inside national outskirts2.
This exposition receives a changed form of the meaning of IDPs displayed in the Guiding
Principles on Internal Displacement (GPID), centering just on IDPs uprooted by clash:
Persons or gatherings of persons who have been constrained or obliged to escape or to
leave their homes or spots of ongoing home, specifically as an aftereffect of or to dodge the
impacts of equipped clash, circumstances of summed up brutality, infringement of human
71
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
rights or common or human-made catastrophes, and who have not crossed a worldwide
fringe3.
The IDP idea is extraordinary because of its political, social and compassionate intricacy and
the clashing nature of talk encompassing IDP insurance. While the circumstances that create
inside relocation are similar to those that deliver exiles, a large number of the needs of IDPs
and of refugees are totally unrelated. Refugees, having crossed a universal outskirt, are
ensured by International Humanitarian Law (IHL) and International Human Rights Law when
states oppose impulse to act and diminish their anguish. IDPs, interestingly, are compelled
to depend on the security of the state. Inner removal is consequently frequently imagined
as a local issue; yet close by the horrible infringement of human rights that happens when
IDP needs are unprotected, IDPs represent a risk to security and solidness in a country,
locale and the global framework4.
Legitimate Measures for Protection of the Internally Displaced
IDP assurance at last falls under the obligation of the state in which they are relocated 5.
Subsequently, issues relating to the assurance of IDPs lie in clash with ideas of state sway.
Under the sanctuary of sway, states have damaged human rights, denied assurance to IDPs,
and banned global support to IDPs in their region. In spite of the fact that the GPID state
that offers of backing from universal on-screen characters ought not be viewed as an
unwelcome impedance in a State's inner issues, India has communicated expect that such
mediation would bring about infringement of state power and that 'philanthropic support'
would turn into a defense for the obstruction of capable states in the undertakings of
weaker states. A remarkable absence of help systems and formalized assurance frameworks
brings about an absence of essential human flexibilities for IDPs when the state neglects to
give security. Rather, they fall into a hole unprotected by hard law and depend on state
agreeability with delicate laws and universal standards, for example, the GPID. While states
are starting to recognize the significance of the GPID, there is no legitimate commitment to
do so and there is no formal global lawful skeleton by which IDP rights are recognized and
implemented. In 2006, no global organization had a formal order through which a
commitment to help IDPs was organized. Fuse into household law has been constrained,
with India holding no legitimate order in its Protection of Human Rights Act to secure the
inside uprooted. Around the world, just seventeen nations have concocted enactment or
approaches particularly went for tending to IDP needs.
Regularly under risk of assault by their legislatures, numerous states have given negligible
security to IDPs dislodged by clash and human rights infringement. Further issues emerge
when states adjust their origination of IDPs to deny insurance or to secure just a certain
gathering of IDPs6. The unmistakable quality of dissident equipped gatherings in numerous
social orders has additionally raised compassionate concerns when these gatherings test
state power and can control certain gatherings of individuals or regions because of the
shortcoming of the state. In spite of the fact that Guiding Principle 2 states that that the
GPID must be seen "by all powers, gatherings and persons independent of their legitimate
status and connected without any unfriendly refinement, adherence to IHL in equipped
bunches' medication of such individuals has been to a great degree constrained.
72
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Protection of Internally Displaced Persons in India
This section deals with the Indian government's reactions to the insurance needs of
Internally Displaced Persons (IDPs) in two Indian locales: Jammu and Kashmir and the
Northeast7. While exiles have pulled in universal consideration and accept a formalized,
organized framework for assurance, IDPs fall into a great extent unaddressed classification
where obligation is seemingly with the state in which they are relocated. In India, however
the administration's reaction systems have been unsuccessful in tending to IDP needs, it has
regularly dismisses the support of worldwide associations and endeavored to address its IDP
circumstance locally at the state level.
Notwithstanding the contrast in beginnings and reason for uprooting between the two
districts, there has been a discernible distinction in how state governments have reacted to
the needs of their subjects. In Jammu and Kashmir and the Northeast, two unique
circumstances of clash instigated dislodging have emerged that vary definitely in reasons,
character of relocation, and gatherings included in removal. Despite the fact that the
numerous ethnic gatherings that constitute the Northeast could be contrasted and the
ethnic and religious gatherings that embody Jammu and Kashmir, revolts and radical
outfitted gatherings contradicting Indian guideline of the state in Jammu and Kashmir have
detailed an alternate nature to the tribal, ethnicity-based clash in the Northeast.
Government reactions have been greater to IDPs in Jammu and Kashmir than to those in the
Northeast.
Starting with an applied review of IDPs, this study introduces two separate instances of
uprooting and IDP reaction techniques by state governments, dissecting contrasts in the
reactions to viciousness and dislodging in the two locales. With reference to government
parts in clash and demeanor to those influenced by savagery and uprooting, it further
explores the way of relocation in both areas and inquiries why the Indian government has
reacted in distinctive ways. These disposition and parts have molded political investment
that give themselves to distinctive reactions to clash incited removal. In Jammu and
Kashmir, reactions have been connected with government goals to battle Muslim aggressors
looking for autonomy or promotion to Pakistan. In the Northeast, there is a relationship
between reactions to IDPs and the legislature's abnormal state of inclusion in driving clash
and removal, with oppressive conduct to a few gatherings and an unwillingness to help
assets to insurance.
Local Level Responses: The IDP Situation in India
Removal in India has been principally brought on by equipped clash and ethnic roughness,
frequently focusing on citizens and powerless gatherings. The Indian IDP circumstance
contrasts others, for example, in Colombia where the national government has consolidated
the GPID into the legitimate framework. In India, refusal of uprooting has dominated the
production of household enactment for IDPs. National obligation has been acknowledged
just for those removed by the Kashmir clash, despite the fact that these individuals are
recognized as "vagrants" as opposed to IDPs in place for the legislature to abstain from
giving help on helpful grounds and deny state shortcoming in securing natives 8. In spite of
the fact that there are in excess of 650,000 IDPs across the country, there is no focal
government organizations or approach for checking and executing methods for IDPs and the
State Human Rights Commission (SHRC) in the semi-self-governing Jammu and Kashmir has
73
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
no strategy to oversee issues of interior dislodging9. India has precluded the right to gain
entrance from securing worldwide orgs in a few regions, accepting that 'humane help' is
turning into an exterior under which bigger states can meddle in its undertakings.
Furthermore, the administration has set confinements on staff from philanthropic
alleviation organizations in Assam, Nagaland and Manipur.
The absence of a government office to screen uprooting has created huge coordination
issues in reacting to IDP needs. State governments have been designated the part of
reacting to human rights issues relating to clash and IDPs in their domains, and reactions are
built at the state level. This has raised issues because of state laws, for example, the Armed
Forces Special Powers Act (AFSPA) in the Northeast, and the parallel Armed Forces (Jammu
and Kashmir) Special Powers Act10 , both of which allow the presentation of 'irritated
territories' whereby government security staff are permitted excessive and unjustified
utilization of over the top energy. As per the United States Government: Under the AFSPA
the administration can proclaim any state or union domain an "exasperates territory," an
affirmation that permits security strengths to flame on any individual to "keep up peace"
and to capture any individual "against whom sensible suspicion exists" without educating
the prisoner of the justification for capture11.
This demonstration has permitted much relocation to happen and proceed, especially in the
Northeast where it has been utilized to target ethnic gatherings, for example, timberland
occupants in Assam and has brought about military operations that constrained 1,500
villagers from their homes in Manipur in 2010 State association in the reason for removal
has brought about a circumstance where reaction to IDP needs has been negligible. The
absence of help systems for IDPs has prompted assurance being a long way from
satisfactory when measured against global standards and measures for IDP security and
human rights, with a concerning contrast between state government reactions in Jammu
and Kashmir and the Northeast.
Strategies
This study utilizes a blending of explanatory procedures and strategies to comprehend why
state governments react to IDP needs in diverse behavior. With the end goal of information
dissection, it uses grounded hypothesis to secure instruments of examination that could be
utilized to look at information and form hypotheses after information gathering 12. This
includes, in this study, looking for examples in both essential and optional sources by
evaluating security and wellbeing procurements and selecting four fundamental rights that
might be analyzed: lodging, nourishment, wellbeing and training. These classes will be
utilized as instruments of investigation and interrogated over the two careful investigations
to distinguish pointers and make the distinction between state government reactions in the
Jammu and Kashmir and the north-eastern areas. Moreover, the AFSPA is utilized as a
pointer to distinguish intermittent conduct by state governments and government-unified
local army to IDPs. Through investigative correlation, this study will recognize variables and
measure up them over the two cases to uncover the causal components influencing the
different results13 . It draws from Mill's system for distinction to look at qualities of the two
separate circumstances of clash and interior dislodging, concentrating on contrasts that
highlight potential purposes behind the solid differentiation in state government reactions.
74
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
To further differentiation the two connections of inward dislodging, this study applies
Weber's idea of perfect sorts to an examination of the two detailed analyses keeping in
mind the end goal to investigate how security measures contrast with worldwide standards
and guidelines. Through this, the diverse qualities of the two cases and the courses in which
connections impact government reactions get obvious. Thus, the utilization of the perfect
sort can exhibit how diverse circumstances can produce distinctive social courses of action
and conclusions. Furthermore, this study receives components of the negative case system
in analyzing the nonappearance in Indian government reactions of what is normal by
universal standards and measures. As a blend of the system for distinction and degenerate
case investigation, such a method concentrates on what is not express in information 14.
Thus, this strategy is utilized to figure out if Indian state governments preclude the presence
from claiming IDPs in their regions, or modify their definition so as to escape obligation to
execute security measures, with a specific end goal to sidestep worldwide standards and
gauges. Hence, explanations behind dissent in the two cases could be further researched.
Conclusion
The contrast between state government reactions to IDPs in Jammu and Kashmir and the
Northeast is emphatically obvious in the writing. Diverse reactions to the reasons and
determination of clash notwithstanding procurements throughout the time of dislodging
and execution of long haul procedures has brought about a greatly changed reaction to the
inside uprooting circumstance in the two states. The absence of a government organization
to screen and ensure IDPs has incredibly helped the propagation of insufficient and
unjustified state reactions to security needs, which, in the Northeast, have been led along
ethnic and religious lines. While this is intensely corresponded to the state government's
association in the clash, and the view of specific gatherings as radicals or terrorists in the
Northeast, the Jammu and Kashmir State Government's longing to battle Pakistani Muslim
activists has prompted an ideal medicine of Hindu Pandit IDPs. Despite the fact that the
AFSPA has had solid outcomes in both areas, security compels in the Northeast have all the
more emphatically misused this law so as to target specific ethnic gatherings, encouraging
and uplifting ethnic divisions, strains and dislodging. Thus, lesser procurements to IDPs have
come about because of government disavowal and there is negligible distinguishment of the
needs of IDPs.
Eventually, the political diversions and state of mind of the state governments have
dominated reactions to IDP needs, directing measures taken, the gatherings to whom help is
given, and how needs and rights are secured. In both circumstances, these have been
dictated by the way of the clash and security circumstance nearby the legislature's part in
clash. Where the administration is in critical part the culprits of the clash, IDP needs are less
inclined to be secured, as is clear in the Northeast. Where the casualties of the clash are
adjusted to government engages, as exhibited by the instance of the Kashmiri Pandits,
insurance and restoration of IDPs turns into a more noteworthy necessity for the state
government. With the unlucky deficiency of a national schema for the assurance of IDPs and
the nearby checking of human rights, state governments are liable to keep on reacting to
IDP needs in feeble, inadmissible and shifted conduct which is subject to political plans and
hobbies.
75
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
End-notes
Mooney, Erin. 2005. 'The Concept of Internal Displacement and the Case for Internally
Displaced Persons as a Category of Concern'. Exile Survey Quarterly 24(3): 9-26.
2
Cohen, Roberta and Francis M. Deng. 1998a. Masses in Flight: The Global Crisis of Internal
Displacement. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution Press.
3
Cohen, Roberta and Francis M. Deng. 1998a. Masses in Flight: The Global Crisis of Internal
Displacement. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution Press.
4
Asian Center for Human Rights (ACHR). 2010a. India Human Rights Report Quarterly, JulySeptember 2010, ed. S. Chakma. Got to 24 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www.achrweb.org/ihrrq/issue1/ihrrq-jul-sep-2010.pdf.
5
Asian Center for Human Rights (ACHR). 2010b. India Human Rights Report Quarterly,
September-December 2010, ed. S. Chakma. Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at
http://www.achrweb.org/ihrrq/issue2/ihrrq-oct-dec-2010.pdf
6
Bamzai, Prithivi Nath Kaul. 1962. A history of Kashmir: political, social, social, from the
soonest times to the present day. Delhi: Metropolitan Book Co.
7
Reprieve International. 2010. Reprieve International Report 2010: The State of the World's
Human Rights. Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at
http://thereport.amnesty.org/locales/default/documents/Air2010_az_en.pdf.
8
Bhaduri, Aditi. 2010. 'Dislodged Lives – Personal Narratives'. Calcutta Research Group
examination study. Got to 24 June 2014. Accessible at http://www.mcrg.ac.in/Pp_aditi.pdf.
9
Calcutta Research Group (MCRG). 2006a. Voices of the Internally Displaced in South Asia.
Kolkata: Mahanirban Calcutta Research Group
10 Calcutta Research Group (MCRG). 2006b. 'IDPs in India's Northeast'. MCRG Workshop
Report, 24-26 August 2006. Got to 21 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www.brookings.edu/fp/ventures/idp/2007_crg_kohimarpt.pdf.
11 Cloughley, Brian. 1999. 'Brutality in Kashmir'. Security Dialog 30(2): 225-238
12
Cohen, Roberta. 2004. 'A few Reflections on National and International Responsibility in
Situations of Internal Displacement'. Brookings-Bern Project on Internal Displacement. Got to
21 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www.brookings.edu/~/media/Files/rc/studys/2004/spring_humanrights_cohen/2004
0504.pdf
13
Cohen, Roberta and Francis M. Deng. 1998b. The Forsaken People: Case Studies of the
Internally Displaced. Washington, D.c.: Brookings Institution Press.
14
Conversi, Daniele. 2005. 'Genocide, Ethnic Cleansing, and Nationalism'. In The Sage
Handbook of Nations and Nationalism, eds. G. Delanty and K. Kumar. London:sage.
1
References
[1].
Reprieve International. 2010. Reprieve International Report 2010: The State of the
World's Human Rights. Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at
http://thereport.amnesty.org/locales/default/documents/Air2010_az_en.pdf.
[2].
Mooney, Erin. 2005. 'The Concept of Internal Displacement and the Case for
Internally Displaced Persons as a Category of Concern'. Exile Survey Quarterly 24(3):
26-29.
[3].
Mooney, Erin. 2005. 'The Concept of Internal Displacement and the Case for
Internally Displaced Persons as a Category of Concern'. Exile Survey Quarterly 24(3):
9-26.
76
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
[4].
[5].
[6].
[7].
[8].
[9].
[10].
[11].
[12].
[13].
[14].
[15].
[16].
[17].
[18].
[19].
[20].
[21].
[22].
Cohen, Roberta and Francis M. Deng. 1998a. Masses in Flight: The Global Crisis of
Internal Displacement. Washington, D.c.: Brookings Institution Press.
Asian Center for Human Rights (ACHR). 2010a. India Human Rights Report Quarterly,
July-September 2010, ed. S. Chakma. Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at
http://www.achrweb.org/ihrrq/issue1/ihrrq-jul-sep-2010.pdf.
Asian Center for Human Rights (ACHR). 2010b. India Human Rights Report Quarterly,
September-December 2010, ed. S. Chakma. Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at
http://www.achrweb.org/ihrrq/issue2/ihrrq-oct-dec-2010.pdf
Bamzai, et al. [1962]. Asian Center for Human Rights. pp.45-46.
Bhaduri, Aditi. 2010. 'Dislodged Lives – Personal Narratives'. Calcutta Research
Group examination study. Got to 24 April 2011. Accessible at
http://www.mcrg.ac.in/Pp_aditi.pdf.
Calcutta Research Group (MCRG). 2006a. Voices of the Internally Displaced in South
Asia. Kolkata: Mahanirban Calcutta Research Group.
Calcutta Research Group (MCRG). 2006b. 'IDPs in India's Northeast'. MCRG
Workshop Report, 24-26 August 2006. Got to 01 July 2014. Accessible at
http://www.brookings.edu/fp/ventures/idp/2007_crg_kohimarpt.pdf.
Cloughley, Brian. 1999. 'Brutality in Kashmir'. Security Dialog 30(2): 225-238
Cohen, Roberta. 2004. National & International. Accessible at
http://www.brookings.edu/~/media/Files/rc/studys/2004/spring_humanrights_cohe
n/20040504.pdf
Cohen, Roberta and Francis M. Deng. 1998b. The Forsaken People: Case Studies of
the Internally Displaced. Washington, D.c.: Brookings Institution Press.
Conversi, Daniele. 2005. 'Genocide, Ethnic Cleansing, and Nationalism Handbook.
Dey, Ishita and Sabyasachi Basu Ray Chaudhury. 2007.
Goswami, Uddipana. 2006. pp. 60-68.
Human Rights Watch (HRW). 2011. World Report 2011: India. Got to 24 June 2014.
Accessible at
http://www.hrw.org/destinations/default/documents/related_material/india_3.pdf.
Hussain, Monirul. 2004. 'Sustenance Security and the Northeast'. Monetary and
Political Weekly 39(41): 4515-4516.
Hussain, Monirul. 2000. 'State, Identity Movements and Internal Displacement in the
Northeast'. Monetary and Political Weekly 35(51): 4519-4523.
Inward Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2006. India: Tens of thousands
recently dislodged in Northeastern and focal states: A profile of the inside relocation
circumstance. Got to 24 June 2014. Accessible at http://www.internaldisplacement.org/8025708f004be3b1/%28httpinfofiles%29/7eac25979917d09dc125
710f005b0548/$file/India%20-February%202006.pdf.
Inward Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2007a. India: substantial amounts
of IDPs are unassisted and in need of insurance. Got to 21 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www2.ohchr.org/english/bodies/cescr/docs/data ngos/Idmc2india40.pdf.
Inward Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2007b. 'Inward Displacement in
India'. Tameness to the Universal Periodic Review instrument secured by the Human
Rights Council in Resolution 5/1 of 18 June 2007. Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at
http://www.uprinfo.org/IMG/pdf/Idmc_ind_upr_s1_2008_internaldiscplacementmonitoringcenter_
uprsubmission.pdf.
77
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
[23].
[24].
[25].
[26].
[27].
[28].
[29].
[30].
[31].
[32].
[33].
[34].
[35].
Inward Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2008. 'Monetary, Social and
Cultural Rights of IDPs in India'. Tameness from the IDMC of the Norwegian Refugee
Council (NRC) to the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights: 40th
session. Got to 1 July 2014. Accessible at
http://www2.ohchr.org/english/bodies/cescr/docs/insight ngos/Idmcindia40.pdf.
Inward Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2010a. India: National and State
Authorities Failing to Protect IDPs: A profile of the inward removal circumstance. Got
to 24 June 2014. Accessible at http://www.internaldisplacement.org/8025708f004be3b1/(httpinfofiles)/F4a1646ea4defb06c125779200
4be769/$file/India_overview_sept2010.pdf.
Inward Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2010b. Adapting in removal:
Briefing study on the right to training of inside dislodged individuals. Got to 24 June
2014. Accessible at http://www.internaldisplacement.org/8025708f004be3b1/%28httpinfofiles%29/2c822b57d65d8363c125
77de0057617f/$file/Learning-in-displacement.pdf.
Inner Displacement Monitoring Center (IDMC). 2011. Inside Displacement: Global
Overview of Trends and Developments in 2010, eds. N.m. Birkeland, and E. Jennings.
Got to 4 July 2014. Accessible at http://www.internaldisplacement.org/distributions/worldwide outline 2010.pdf.
Kalin, Walter. 2005. 'The Guiding Principles on Internal Displacement as International
Minimum Standard and Protection Tool'. Exile Survey Quarterly 24(3): 27-36.
Lama, Mahendra P. 2000. 'Inner Displacement in India: Causes, Protection and
Dilemmas'. Constrained Migration Review 8: 24-26.
Mandal, Monika. 2009. 'Inner Displacement in India: Status, Condition & Prospects of
Return'. Displaced person Watch 33: 33-47.
National Committee for Human Rights Treaty Monitoring in India (NCHRTM). 2008.
'The issues of non-execution of ESCR rights in India: The tribal measurement'.
Shadow report to the UN Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights. Got to
21 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www2.ohchr.org/english/bodies/cescr/docs/insight ngos/IndiaThetribaldimention-Nchrtm.doc.
National Human Rights Commission (NHRC). [1993] 2006. The Protection of Human
Rights Act, 1993. New Delhi: NHRC.
Neuman, W. Lawrence. 2006. Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative
Approaches, sixth ed. Boston: Pearson.
The Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (Unhcr).2006.
'Inside Displaced Persons'. In The State of the World's Refugees: Human
Displacement in the New Millennium. Got to 24 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www.unhcr.org/4444afce0.html.
Plantation, Phil. 2010. 'Security of inside dislodged persons: delicate law as a
standard creating component'. Survey of International Studies 36: 281-303.
Individuals' Initiative for Peace, Manipur (PIPM), United Ngos Mission-Manipur
(UNMM) and North East Dialog Forum (NEDF). 2008. 'Demand for thought under the
dire activity and early cautioning strategy regarding grave and persevering
infringement of indigenous people groups' rights in Northeast India'. Submission to
the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights: 40th session. Got to 21 June
78
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
[36].
[37].
[38].
2014. Accessible at http://www2.ohchr.org/english/bodies/cescr/docs/illumination
ngos/Pipmindia40.doc.
Saha, K.C. 2000. 'Reevaluating the Guiding Principles: the instance of the Kashmiri
Pandits'. Constrained Migration Review 8: 26-28.
Saha, K.C. 2002. 'Gaining from the Ethnic Conflict and the Internal Displacement in
Tripura in Northeast India'. Human Rights Review 3(3): 50-64.
South Asia Terrorism Portal (SATP). 2011. 'Fatalities in Terrorist Violence in India's
Northeast'. Got to 27 June 2014. Accessible at
http://www.satp.org/satporgtp/nations/india/database/fatalitiesnorteast2006.htm
79
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
80
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
AFSPA and Human Rights
Prateek Vijayavargia
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai
Abstract
In this paper, my major concern is with the arbitrary law-enforcement by the state in the
name of promoting security, but in the process sacrificing the basic human rights of the
people. The case study, which I will be using, is that of the Armed Forces Special Powers Act
, a la e fo ed i I dia to e su e pea e a d se u it i distu ed a eas . The ai of
this paper is to capture and explore the tension between guaranteeing fundamental
freedoms and ensuring the security of citizens, and how this balance is often compromised
by states leading to situations of crises. The paper will analyse the theoretical underpinnings
of the de ate, ai l fo usi g o the ole of the state a d li e t s se u it , th ough the
so ial o t a t theo a o gst othe s, ut lo ati g these ithi the f a e o k of hu a
ights a d justi e . This te sio ill e iti all a al sed th ough the le s of a ights- ased
critique of the case study and extending it to propose a solution to this issue.
Keywords: Political theory, Security dilemma, AFSPA, India
[Acknowledgement: I would like to acknowledge and thank Dr Sonika Gupta (Assistant Professor, IIT
Madras) for her valuable comments and suggestions.]
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
The world over, states have used their limitless power to repress populations inside their
territory using draconian laws. One such example is – The Armed Forces (Special Powers)
Act of 1958, applicable to the northeastern region of India and Jammu & Kashmir, which
violates a number of basic human rights such as the right to life, the right not to be tortured
or ill-treated, the right to liberty and security, fair-trial rights, the right to privacy, and the
right to freedom of assembly. (Chadha, 2012) The provisions of the act are in direct violation
of the democratic rights enshrined in the Indian Constitution. The Act has been at the heart
of controversy regarding human rights violations in the region, such as arbitrary killings,
torture, cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment and enforced disappearances. (Asian Legal
Resource Centre, 2011) There have been grave human rights abuses perpetrated by the
state through the armed forces and government forces in areas where the AFSPA is in force.
It is important to critically analyse and understand the arguments put forward by the social
contract theorists, in particular Hobbes and Locke, especially with respect to the role of the
state and security. The social contract theorists specifically considered the question of
liberty and security, as it is one of the primary duties of the state to protect and secure its
citizens, both from internal as well as external threats. Both liberty and security are not
81
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
necessarily in conflict with each other, but are interrelated to each other. For this paper, we
shall only look into the aspect of internal security since this paper is concerned with a
specific case study. I will try to examine the tension between rights and security through the
so ial o t a t theo . This te sio has to e u de stood a ou d the li e t s se u it
debate. (Noorani, 2007)
Today, we can witness modern states tackling the issue of provision of security and order
inside their territories. Let us attempt to understand this dilemma by analysing the
Hobbesian and Lockean states. One of the defining characteristics of the modern nationstate is its ability to use force legitimately. Hobbes advocated a strong government, which
he believed, was crucial for a safe society. In the Hobbesian state, there are some essential
tasks, which have to be performed by the government, one of them being to provide
se u it . I the Le iatha , Ho es sa s that the state is allo ed to do whatsoever he shall
think necessary to be done, both before-hand, for the preserving of Peace and Security, by
prevention of Discord at home and Hostilit f o a oad . (Hobbes) He is vouching for the
enforcement of preventive measures for the fulfilment of the goal of security rather than
take corrective measures afterwards. The coercive power of the state can be used to protect
its populations but also at the same time be a source of threat to the same population.
(Sorenson, 1996) How can we assume so easily that the same state, which people have
created by establishing their trust in it, will not act in the same way as people would in the
so-called state of atu e ? (Claudia, 2005) This is indeed very problematic and provides for
states to legitimately use violence against their own populations without any effective
mechanism to overthrow the government, as people have already reposed their trust in it.
As opposed to Hobbes, Locke has a libertarian view of the state and his main problem with
government is that the more tasks the government has, it is more prone to violate the rights
of the people. Thus, governments can use their power to protect and defend certain rights,
but at the same time use these unending powers to violate the rights of the people in a
serious manner. Locke is worried about the problem of creating a state, which governs in a
strong and effective manner, but not as strong as it would abolish the rights of the people.
Locke believed in minimal and limited powers for the government. (Appadorai, 2000) In the
Lockean state, the powers vested to the government are not arbitrary, and if the
government loses the trust of the people, it can be dissolved and replaced. The ideas of
trust and consent of the people are strongly established in a Lockean state.
Now, if we were to compare Hobbes and Locke, I would argue that AFSPA is in line with the
Hobbesian state and understanding of security. Hobbes would have defended such a law,
e e if it ea t ep essi g the ights of the people. I do t thi k the sa e a e said a out
Locke though, because Locke emphasised on the protection of natural rights and for him
this function preceded the goal of providing security. In my opinion, Locke would have not
vouched for such a law since it violates the basic rights of the people. The state has absolute
monopoly over the legitimate use of force, and this property can lead to abuses of power
and authority, which is worrisome for Locke. Balancing security and liberty is an ethical
dilemma, which contemporary states have to face today. This dilemma is evident in the
consequent discussion of the controversial act AFSPA. The Armed Forces Special Powers Act
of 1958 has been ridden with controversy and has witnessed strong arguments, both for its
retention as well as revocation from both sides since many years. It has been defended by
82
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
the state a d the a ed fo es o the g ou ds of ei g a esse tial a d effective enabling
e ha is to e su e pea e a d se u it . Whe eas, itize s as ell as hu a ights
organisations and NGOs have strongly condemned and criticized the act as they view this
law to be incompatible with human rights. Many argue that such a law has no place in our
vibrant democracy today. In 1997, the constitutional validity of AFSPA was challenged in the
Supreme Court but the court upheld its validity. The Court only cautioned the government
with regard to the implementation of the act.
What is the source of the validity and legality of AFSPA from a constitutional perspective?
E e though A ti le
of the I dia Co stitutio lea l states that It shall e the dut of
the Union to protect every State against external aggression and internal distu a e , it is
also ualified i the sa e se te e … a d to e su e that the go e
e t of e e “tate
is a ied o i a o da e ith the p o isio s of this Co stitutio . I the o te t of
internal security, interpreting this article becomes very important because it gives
constitutional validity to laws such as the AFSPA. I believe that it is important to read this
article in conjunction with Article 21 of our Constitution, which talks about the protection of
personal life and liberty. Even though AFSPA can be justified through a reading of Article
355, it clearly violates the rights guaranteed to the citizens under Article 21. Thus, there is a
contradiction of sorts, and even though the Supreme Court has upheld the constitutional
validity of the act, there has been a lot of criticism of the judgment on the grounds that
u de the ga of atio al se u it , the ou t has gi e i to the de a ds a d ishes of
the armed forces and the government. Even though the government of the day is powerless
and cannot alter the fundamental rights granted to the citizens of the country, it could draft
and pass laws that effectively end up curtailing their rights.
The fa t that the a t iolates I dia s i te atio al o ligatio s u de the I te atio al
Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, is also not a strong argument for its repeal, since even
though India is signatory to the treat, there is no practical mechanism to make sure that the
obligations are actually adhered to in practice. This is one of the weaknesses of the
international human rights regime – the lack of substantive international law enforcement
mechanisms. The idea of human rights was conceived to protect the individual against the
state. The state has traditionally been the protector of the rights of the people, and often
acts against non-state actors such as armed rebel militias to protect its citizens; but in this
process, there lies the possibility of the state turning violent against its own citizens.
(Howard-Hassmann, 2012) The possibility of arbitrary arrests, torture and other grave
abuses looms large. We can already witness and observe the grave human rights abuses in
the operationalization and implementation of the internal security function of the state, and
this material reality has led to a strong critique based on human rights. When applied in
practice, laws such as the AFSPA have come to undermine human rights in a substantive
manner, thus questioning the usefulness and relevance of such laws in democracies like
India where human rights should be the guiding principle for the government.
I am of the opinion that there is an urgent need to amend and review the AFSPA (if needed,
even repeal it). With the newly elected government in power, there are a lot of skepticism
as well as hope with respect to the internal security policy. The deployment of the army in
internal security duties in specific areas for prolonged periods needs to be assessed with a
people-centric approach. It is perhaps the misuse of the law, which has led to such
83
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
widespread protest and call for repeal of AFSPA. Even though these questions remain
unsolved, there is no doubt that the state and the armed forces need to come up with a
better mechanism than the already existing act to ensure peace and security within the
egio s desig ated as distu ed . “u h a e ha is should take i to o side atio the
basic freedoms as well as civil and political liberties of the residents of these areas. (Ahmed,
2011) A balanced, fair, just and proportionate mechanism must be worked out to achieve
both these dual objectives – maintaining internal security as well as protecting human
ights. I do t thi k these goals a e i o pati le a d utuall e lusi e – they can definitely
exist together, even though balancing them is a huge challenge. The challenge in front of
states is to reconcile the idea of human rights with internal security, and to make these two
conceptual categories, which are often assumed to be contradictory, stand mutually
together, and not in conflict with each other. (Grondona, 1978) The state must protect and
honour the human rights of its people, not only because it is a constitutional duty; but also
because, otherwise it might lead to an erosion of the legitimacy of the state and such a
scenario can have dangerous consequences and implications.
References
Chadha, V. (Ed.). (2012). Armed Forces Special Powers Act: The Debate (Vol. 7). IDSA
(Monograph Series).
Ahmed, A. (2011). Elevate Human Rights as the Core Organising Principle in Counter
Insurgency. Policy Brief . IDSA.
Howard-Hassmann, R. E. (2012). Human Security: Undermining Human Rights? Human
Rights Quarterly , 34 (1), 88-112.
Grondona, M. (1978). Reconciling Internal Security and Human Rights. International
Security, 3 (1), 3-16.
Noorani, A. (2007). Liberty VS Security: The Canadian Model. Economic and Political Weekly ,
42 (27-28), 2854-2855.
Sorenson, G. (1996). Development as a Hobbesian Dilemma. Third World Quarterly , 17 (5),
903-916.
Hobbes, T. Chapter XVIII Of the Rights of Sovereigns by Institution. In Leviathan.
Claudia, A. (2005, June). Retrieved June 15, 2014, from Challenge - Liberty and Security:
http://www.libertysecurity.org/article213.html
Appadorai, A. (2000). The Substance of Politics. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
REDRESS, UK; Asian Human Rights Commission, Hong Kong, & Human Rights Alert, Manipur,
India. (2011). 10 (3), 22-52.
84
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Refugee Problem and Human Rights:
An Unparalleled Indian Dichotomy
Utkarsh Pandey
National Law University & Judicial Academy, Guwahati
Abstract
The colossal exodus of various races in Europe during Second World War and their
systematic extermination has led to worldwide concerns for the human rights of such
Refugees. This has forced lawmakers to develop new principles in Jurisprudence. India is
one such country which has been greatly affected by both the types of migrations; Internal
and External. Former is widespread in the North-Eastern region of country mainly due to
tribal conflict whereas latter extends to India acting as host for large number of refugees
chiefly from Tibet (China), Bangladesh, Nepal, Pakistan Occupied Kashmir and so on. But,
ironically, Indian government has till date not ratified UN Convention on Status of Refugees
and yet applies its colonial era law; Foreigners Act, 1946. Also this government has not
accorded refugee status to the people from PoK. Recently, the Andhra Pradesh High Court
ruled that a certain group of Tibetans born in India to be given citizenship. Bangladeshi
refugees have also spread throughout and it has become difficult to keep tab of them, thus
affecting internal stability of country, particularly in Assam which has recently led to series
of violent clashes and movements there. Above mentioned are few instances alongwith
some other aspects which the paper shall attempt to analyze. The Positivist law shall be
analyzed based upon decided case laws and jurisprudential aspects and an attempt shall be
made to apply Hart-fulle de ate i High Cou t s de isio o Ti eta
atte a d possi le
consequences. Also it shall try to investigate reasons as to why Government refuses to
implement UN convention despite many calls for it and how do these all have affected
Human Rights of Refugees.
Keywords: Refugee, Jurisprudence, Positive Law
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
The 20th century saw an unprecedented level of human rights violation where the
perpetrator has not been any other element of society other than the State machinery itself.
The level of violation of such rights has been enormous which took a toll of millions. In
“tali s pu ges alo e it is esti ated that o e tha
illio people e e fo ed i to
1
labour camps where about half of them died, similarly, his contemporary Adolf Hitler
massacred six million Jews in entire Europe in a systematic executions carried out at various
concentration camps throughout Germany and in its neighbouring countries. These purges,
clu ed ith se e al othe te h i ues of the
a ial e te i atio , led to a
unprecedented level of human migration till then to escape victimization in modern State
85
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
system. This unprecedented level of degenerating human dignity led to major hue and cry in
the international level amongst intellectuals and lawmakers to plan and draft such laws
which protect interest of those set of individuals who not only are victim of persecution are
the population of their own country but the victim of Government persecution as well. In
1951 the convention relating to the Status of Refugees was drafted and signed by many
countries around the globe in an attempt to ensure protection and asylum to refugees from
different countries.2 Currently 145 countries are its members.
But India, being one amongst the major receivers of such refugee population has till date
not entered into the treaty charter. Many attempts have been made to force India into
signing this treaty but it has always refused. The fact that India has been receiving large flux
of such refugees into its territory on humanitarian grounds has though been appreciated
around the globe, but it has been criticized for arbitrarily dealing with Refugees and trying
to avoid the principles of International law, particularly in context of Human Rights. One
major factor which governs this attitude of Indian government might be that it also has an
uncontained problem of internally displaced people who are victims of ethnic disputes. The
Courts has therefore come to play a pivotal role in ensuring that refugees are protected
against from any persecution and be provided with every possible aid while at the same
ti e also aki g su e that it does t ha pe la a d o de .
History of Refugee in India
International Influx: The understanding of the complications and problem which have
arisen in dealing with refugee problem vis-a-vis administration and law enforcement
agencies is rooted in the way the wave of refugees have influxed. India has a history of
receiving refugees on the humanitarian ground since ancient times. The coming up of
various refugees in India can be broadly categorized into four major waves which have some
other group of refugees coming in parallel to it. The first wave and first recorded instance of
such an influx was when Zorastrians community sought for refuge in India to escape
persecution in their own land in Iran with the coming up of Sassanid empire, in around
sixteenth to seventeenth century.3 The second wave was during the partition of India in
1947, when the major exchange of population took place on both the sides of border with
the then East and West Pakistan. Once the lines were established, about 14.5 million people
crossed the borders to what they hoped was the relative safety of religious majority. Based
on 1951 Census of displaced persons, 7.226 million Muslims went to Pakistan from India
while 7.249 million Hindus and Sikhs (and very small amounts of Muslims) were forced to
move to India from Pakistan immediately after partition. About 11.2 million or 78% of the
population transfer was on the west, with Punjab accounting for most of it; 5.3 million
Muslims moved from India to West Punjab in Pakistan, 3.4 million Hindus and Sikhs were
moved from Pakistan to East Punjab in India; elsewhere in the west 1.2 million moved in
each direction to and from Sind. The initial population transfer on the east involved 3.5
million Hindus moving from East Bengal to India and only 0.7 million Muslims moving the
other way. This was followed with the third wave of Tibetan Refugees who sought asylum in
India after China annexed Tibet and abolished the government there in 1958, though this
exodus has been continuing till date.4 The major wave came in 1970s when large number of
Bangladeshis emigrated from their homeland to India in search of security and avoiding the
persecution and human rights violations.
86
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Internally Displaced People: India is a diverse country with people of different identities and
culture living together but homogenously concentrated at regions of their origin.5 The major
difficulty arising out of this diverse nature has led to conflicts particularly in North-Eastern
states of India, which inhabits large number of tribal community who are often in conflict
with each other. This has led to major disturbances in this part of country and has also
caused a displacement of people in neighbouring states. The intensity of such a ethnic
trouble has been responded by implemented of harsh laws like Armed Forces Special
Powers Act, 1958, which gives wide ranging powers to Armed forces to tackle any such
problem of internal disturbances. It must be remembered that the ethnic tensions has led to
direct clashes of such insurgent groups with government which has taken a shape of noninternational armed conflict which must have been governed by Geneva Convention
Additional Protocol II, but here again, Government of India did not sign it and adopt its own
methods of dealing with such complications.
Reasons for Indian Indifference towards Convention
Security considerations a k high o I dia s list of p io ities, gi e its geopoliti al i flue e
in the region and its vulnerability to cross-border infiltration due to the porous nature of its
borders. Taking this factor into account, anti-refugee law legislators argue that the proposed
law would encourage more refugees to enter India, with promises of increased legitimacy,
more rights and government services, which will increase the threat of social, economic and
politi al i se u it . Mahe d a P La a i his epo t Ma agi g ‘efugees in South Asia 6
provides a three-dimensional model to explain the risk to national security through refugee
movements that present different threats due to
Strategic-level security, when Refugees are armed and when the Government loses
control over the refugees.
Structural-level security is threatened by increasing demands on and conflict over
scarce resources.
Regime-level security is threatened when refugees enter the domestic political
process and create pressures on the government.
Legal provisions in India
India does not any specific law to deal with the refugee problem and has been applying the
provisions of the colonial era Foreigners Act of 1946 to the same people. But a careful
reading of this law shows that it primarily focuses on the dealings of foreigners in general
terms, as against the Refugees who have come here for the purpose of safeguarding their
rights against their own home country. As such it is mostly the executive orders and byelaws which are issued to deal with these matters. Refugees encounter the Indian legal
system on two counts. There are laws which regulate their entry into and stay in India along
with a host of related issues. Once they are within the Indian territory, they are then liable
to be subjected to the provisions of the Indian penal laws for various commissions and
omissions under a variety of circumstances, whether it be as a complainant or as an
accused. These are various constitutional and legal provisions with which refugees may be
concerned under varying circumstances.
Constitutional Provisions
There are a few Articles of the Indian Constitution which are equally applicable to refugees
on the Indian soil in the same way as they are applicable to the Indian Citizens.
87
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The Supreme Court of India has consistently held that the Fundamental Right enshrined
under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution regarding the Right to life and personal liberty,
applies to all irrespective of the fact whether they are citizens of India or aliens. The various
High Courts in India have liberally adopted the rules of natural justice to refugee issues,
along with recognition of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) as
pla i g a i po ta t ole i the p ote tio of efugees. The Ho le High Cou t of Gu ahati
has in various judgements, recognised the refugee issue and permitted refugees to
approach the UNHCR for determination of their refugee status, while staying the
deportation orders issued by the district court or the administration.
In the matter of Gurunathan and others vs. Government of India and others and in the
matter of A. C. Mohd. Siddique vs. Government of India and others, the High Court of
Madras expressed its unwillingness to let any Sri Lankan refugees to be forced to return to
Sri Lanka against their will. In the case of P. Nedumaran vs. Union Of India before the
Madras High Court, Sri Lankan refugees had prayed for a writ of mandamus directing the
Union of India and the State of Tamil Nadu to permit UNHCR officials to check the
voluntariness of the refugees in going back to Sri Lanka, and to permit those refugees who
did not want to return to continue to stay in the camps in India. The Ho le Cou t as
pleased to hold that si e the UNHC‘ as i ol ed i as e tai i g the olu ta i ess of the
refugees etu to “ i La ka, he e ei g a Wo ld Age , it is ot fo the Cou t to o side
hethe the o se t is olu ta o ot. Further, the Court acknowledged the competence
and impartiality of the representatives of UNHCR. The Bombay High Court in the matter of
Syed Ata Mohammadi vs. Union of India , was pleased to direct that there is no question of
deporting the Iranian refugee to Iran, since he has been recognised as a refugee by the
UNHC‘. The Ho le Cou t fu the pe itted the efugee to travel to whichever country he
desi ed. “u h a o de is i li e ith the i te atio all a epted p i iples of nonrefoulement of efugees to thei ou t of o igi .
The Supreme Court of India has in a number of cases stayed deportation of refugees such as
Mai a d s T ust of Afgha Hu a F eedo s. “tate of Pu ja ; and, N.D.Pancholi vs. State
of Punjab & Others . In the matter of Malavika Karlekar vs. Union of India , the Supreme
Court directed stay of deportation of the Andaman Island Burmese refugees, si e thei
claim for refugee status was pending determination and a prima facie case is made out for
g a t of efugee status. The “up e e Cou t judge e t i the Chak a efugee ase lea l
declared that no one shall be deprived of his or her life or liberty without the due process of
law. Earlier judgements of the Supreme Court in Luis De Raedt vs. Union of India and also
State of Arunachal Pradesh vs. Khudiram Chakma , had also stressed the same point.
Arrest, Detention and Release
There is yet another aspect of non-refoulment which merits mention here.7 The concept of
I te atio al )o es hi h a e t a sit a eas at ai po ts a d othe poi ts of e t i to I dia
territory, which are marked as being outside Indian territory and the normal jurisdiction of
I dia Cou ts, is a ajo isk fa to fo efugees si e it edu es a ess of efugees to legal
remedies. This legal fiction is violative of the internationally acknowledged principle of nonrefoulement. In the matter of a Palestinian refugee who was deported to New Delhi
International Airport from Kathmandu was sent back to Kathmandu from the transit lounge
of the Airport.8 He was once more returned to New Delhi International Airport on the
88
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
g ou d of ei g kept i a I te atio al )o e . “u h detention is a classic case on the above
point barring legal remedies to the detained refugee. The only relief in such a case is
through the administrative authorities.
Articles 22(1), 22(2) and 25(1) of the Indian Constitution reflect that the rules of natural
justice in common law systems are equally applicable in India, even to refugees. The
established principle of rule of law in India is that no person, whether a citizen or an alien
shall be deprived of his life, liberty or property without the authority of law. The
Constitution of India expressly incorporates the common law precept and the Courts have
gone further to raise it to the status of one of the basic features of the Constitution which
cannot be amended.
The Indian Constitution does not contain any specific provision which obliges the state to
enforce or implement treaties and conventions.9 A joint reading of all the provisions as well
as an analysis of the case law on the subject shows international treaties, covenants,
conventions and agreements can become part of the domestic law in India only if they are
specifically incorporated in the law of the land. The Supreme Court has held, through a
number of decisions on the subject that international conventional law must go through the
process of transformation into municipal law before the international treaty becomes
internal law.10 Courts may apply international law only when there is no conflict between
international law and domestic law, and also if the provisions of international law sought to
be applied are not in contravention of the spirit of the Constitution and national legislation,
thereby enabling a harmonious construction of laws. It has also been firmly laid that if there
is any such conflict, then domestic law shall prevail.
Addressing Refugee Problem
India has taken numerous steps and measures to fulfil its international obligations in respect
of refugees. Some of the more important ones merit detailed mention.
Entry into India: The Government of India have followed a fairly liberal policy of granting
refuge to various groups of refugees though some groups have been recognised and some
other groups have not been, often keeping in view the security concerns of the nation.
However, the emerging trend of past refugee experiences bear testimony to the fact that
entry into India for most refugee groups is in keeping with international principles of
protection and non- refoulement.11 Further, such entry is not determined by reasons of
religion or any other form of discrimination. It may be pointed out that India has granted
refuge to Buddhist Tibetans, Hindus and Christians of Sri Lanka, Hindus and Muslims from
the then East Pakistan, Hindus, Muslims, Christians and Buddhists from Bangladesh and
Sikhs and Muslims from Afghanistan etc.
Work Permits: There is no concept of work permits in India, although refugees who are
granted residence permits do find employment in the informal sector, without facing any
objection from the administration. In fact, Tibetan refugees have been granted loans and
other facilities for self- employment. Similarly, most Sri Lankan Tamils have been granted
freedom of movement within the camp areas, enabling work facilities for them as casual
labour. Similarly, Chakma and Afghan refugees have also been engaging in gainful, even if it
is in minor forms of employment.
89
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Freedoms: Generally, refugees are allowed freedom concerning their movement, practice of
religion and residence. In case of refugees whose entry into India is either legal or is
subsequently legalised, there is limited interference by the administration regarding these
basic freedoms. However, those refugees who enter India illegally or overstay beyond
permissible limits, have strict restrictions imposed upon them in accordance with the
statutes governing refugees in India i.e., The Foreigners Act, 1946, Foreigners Order,
Passport Act etc.
Handling Refugees Legally: From the moment of entry of a refugee into the Indian territory,
the laws of India would apply to him/her. Therefore, enforcement and security personnel
who have to deal with refugees cannot overlook the legal requirements which have to be
adhered to by them. In the following paragraphs an attempt has been made to identify
some common situations which may be faced by enforcement and security personnel in
dealing with refugees. An attempt has also been made to suggest possible courses of action
within the legal framework.
The main purpose of this attempt is twofold. Firstly, it will help to focus on the need for
showing due concern for human rights. Secondly, it is also important to create awareness
about the unavoidable compulsions, which forced the person concerned to take refuge in
the country and the inherent and unmistakable poignant human situation in the entire
episode. It is pertinent to remember that the circumstances and facts pertaining to each
refugee may be peculiar and different from the rest. In such cases, therefore, it is extremely
important to ascertain, understand and appreciate the background of the compelling
circumstances of each of the cases so that the law of the land may be applied in the most
appropriate manner. It is in this context that the legal provisions, directions and guidelines,
if any, issued by competent courts as also the practical experience gained in dealing with
such cases, would come in handy.
Keeping the above aspects in view, some of the more important situations relevant to
security personnel are enumerated below. An attempt has been made to highlight the more
feasible options which could be considered in dealing with refugees. It goes without saying
that these options have to be exercised within the legal frame-work of the country.
Conclusion
As per orders of Karnataka High Court to the Election Commission of India was directed to
enroll around 48000 Ti eta efugees i to ote s list to pa ti ipate i Ge e al Ele tio s.12
The court here read the provisions from the Indian Citizenship Act, 1955 and held that
children of Tibetan refugees born in India between the cut-off date of 1950 and 1987, as
mentioned in the Citizenship Act 1955, be considered Indian citizen and allowed to vote.
This is a huge step forward where we find that how Court has taken a positivist law a step
further and help refuges in provide a greatest right to vote. The India has its own contention
in signing the convention and this is justified as it has been facing a lot of internal
disturbances and has been a huge receiver of international refugees seeking asylum. Signing
a
o e tio of su h a atu e ould o l affe t I dia s u hindered attempt to provide
safeguard to its refugee. Despite this Indian administration has been blamed time and again
for being careless in dealing with refugees and also its red-tapism approach. All this can be
90
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
meted out by good governance and healthy law. Courts have major duty to make sure that
they protect the rights of refugees here.
End-notes
1
Of Russian origin: Stalin's Purges from http://russiapedia.rt.com/of-russian-origin/stalinspurges/ accessed on 01/07/2014.
2
From United Nations Audiovisiual Library of International Law retrieved from
http://legal.un.org/avl/ha/prsr/prsr.html accessed on 05/07/2014.
3
Retrieved from http://www.heritageinstitute.com/zoroastrianism/history/postArab2.htm
accessed on 10/07/2014.
4
Michael, F., Survival of a Culture: Tibetan Refugees in India, Published by: University of
California Press, pg. 737.
5
Prasad C., Students' Movements in Arunachal Pradesh and the Chakma-Hajong Refugee
Problem, Economic and Political Weekly pg. 1373
6
Sharma, N., Refugee Situation in South Asia: Need of A Regional Mechanism retrieved from
www.asianlii.org/np/journals/KathSLRS/2008/7.pdf accessed on 14/07/2014.
7
Chowdhary, O., Turning Back: An Assessment of Non-Refoulement under Indian Law,
Economic and Political Weekly.
8
Ibid.
9
Pandey, J. N., The Constitutional Law of India, 49th Ed., Central Law Pubiocation, New
Delhi.
10
Agarawal, H.O., International Law and Human Rights, 15th Ed., Central Law Publication,
Allahabad.
11
Ibid 6
12
http://indianexpress.com/article/india/india-others/children-of-tibetan-refugees-cannow-vote/ assessed on 05/07/2014.
91
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
92
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Does Culture Explain International Relations?
A Critical Perspective
Areeba Ahsanat Moazzam
Department of Political Science, University of Hyderabad, Hyderabad
Abstract
Culture it is argued influences values, world-view, and the structures of human
relationships. To quote Hudson (1997 , p. , ultu e tells us hat to a t, to p efe , to
desi e, a d thus to alue. Cultu e as a e pla ato
a ia le is gai i g ide appeal a o g
the International Relations scholars. It acquired plausibility especially in the post- Cold War
period. The post- positivist critiques or Alternative theories (as Robert Cox dubs them)
e phasize the ole of ultu e i o p ehe di g I te atio al ‘elatio s o e st e uousl
in the last fifteen years. Culture has also become the focus of foreign policy scholars who try
to grasp the cultural influences on the decisions of leaders of various states. With
glo alizatio s fle i g a s o p essi g the o ld i to a glo al illage as is ofte
presented by its proponents), scholars increasingly attribute rise of a global culture, which
e de s e ui
a d e pla atio
e ol i g a ou d
ultu e
e essa . “o ial
Constructivism has reached its pinnacle with cultural explanation of international relations
i ‘i ha d Ned Le o s ook, A Cultural Theory of International Relations. Interest in
studying culture has also increased after works like Clash of Civilizations and Soft Power
gained popularity. This makes us infer culture is a relevant field of inquiry in International
Relations. The unanswered question is whether culture can explain or predict
actions/decisions/policies of states in the international system. This paper will attempt to
critically reflect on culture and its role or otherwise in international relations.
Keywords: culture, international relations, social constructivism, soft power, clash of
civilizations
[Acknowledgements: The Author would like to dedicate this article to Danish Haidar.]
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
Culture as an explanatory variable escaped the scrutiny of International Relations (I.R.)
scholars till almost the last decade of 20th century. I.R. scholars were preoccupied with
power politics, peace, war, political Idealism, national interest, economic interdependence,
security, conflict and cooperation, hegemony etc. since its inception in 1919. Their major
concern was avoidance the re-occurrence of another catastrophic World War. Even the
mainstream paradigms like Idealism, Realism and Marxism paid hardly any interest to the
role of culture in understanding and explaining World Politics. A decade into the 21st
century and many scholars including Yu Xintian, James Ferguson, Monika Mokre, Iver B.
93
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Neumann, Alexander Wendt, Martha Finnamore, Thomas Hylland Eriksen, Iver B. Neumann
a d othe s e phasize the eed fo s uti izi g the ole a d i pa t of ultu e i
International Relations. Yu Xintian went as far as to point out that even though
ai st ea I te atio al ‘elatio s Theo I‘T has a a hie e e ts to its edit a d
fa ea hi g i flue e, ig o a e of ultu al esea h has e o e its fatal eak ess.
It was only after the collapse of the Soviet Union that culture was realized as a concept with
the potential to explain the events of world politics. Social Constructivism gained
prominence especially after it claimed that studying a state's political culture could help to a
large extent in understanding that state's behaviour at the international level. This claim to
a large extent was supported by the enquiry into collapse of the Soviet Union. Social
Constructivism for most part derives its major inspiration from sociological concepts of
structure and agency while strenuously emphasizi g ultu e s i flue e o fo eig poli of
states.. Feminist theorists (under the Postmodern and Postcolonialist approaches) and other
Fe i ist I te atio al ‘elatio s s hola s st ess the ole of ultu e a d
u tu e i
sustenance and preservation of a patriarchal system which is not pre-given or normalized by
atu e . F o this pa o a i ie , it e o es lea that ultu al fa to s a pla a
important role in International Relations Studies. Some scholars like Jongsuk Chay, Lapid and
Kratochwil, Julie Reeves, Gienow Hecht and Schumacher, go a step further and accord a
determining role to culture in International Relations Studies. Before delving into the study
of culture in I.R. it becomes pertinent that adequate attention is paid to what constitutes
culture.
Understanding Culture
Culture is a fuzzy term. It has been described as a notoriously ambiguous concept. Since it
came under scientific scrutiny in 1871, it has remained a slippery notion; many scholars find
difficulty in defining it or capturing its essence as it is very inclusive, making it very
challenging to decide what it excludes in its definition. Culture, due to its excessive currency
in commonplace as well as in academic circles has come to be regarded as a self-evident
o ept hi h eeds o e pli it dis ussio o la ifi atio . But it is p e isel due to its
self-evident nature that this concept needs extensive analytical understanding.
Edward Taylor first defined the concept of culture in his book, Primitive Culture in 1871 as,
that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief, art, mortals, laws, customs and any
othe apa ilities a d ha its a ui ed
a as a e e of so iet . Culture is the
learned behaviour of a society or a subgroup according to Margaret Mead. Clifford Geertz
des i es ultu e as si pl the e se le of sto ies e tell ou sel es a out ou sel es. I
the a th opologi al defi itio , Hall a gues, the o d ultu e is used to efe to hate e is
disti ti e a out the a of life of a people, o
u it , ation or social group. And when
the sa e o d, ultu e is used to des i e the sha ed alues of a g oup o of a so iet ,
it has a more sociological emphasis.
As more and more research work was carried out on culture in anthropology, culture came
to impli itl ep ese t diffe e t thi gs to diffe e t s hola s: f o
ultu e is a a st a tio
(Kroeber and Kluckhohn who compiled 162 definitions of culture) to culture is learned
behaviour; from material objects being seen as constitutive of culture to culture existing
only in the mind, and from culture consisting of observable things and events in the external
94
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
world to culture consisting of ideas alone. Some scholars have even defined it as a
‘o s ha h of a so iet .
Some scholars argue it is more important hat ultu e does tha
hat it is. Cultu e, the
explain is a source of identity and control mechanism and is also structure or framework
that gives meaning to particulars. Culture, other scholars maintain, builds on shared system
of beliefs, attitudes, values, expectations and norms of behaviour. Still others underline
culture as an overall way of life of people that includes language, religion, ideas, dress,
customs, codes, institutions, government, law, work of art, morality, rituals and ceremonies
and symbols.
From the various definitions of culture it can be inferred that culture comes into being only
in a society. People living together for generations create a pattern of behaviour, both
implicit and explicit, to survive the natural environment and preserve themselves from the
atta k f o the alie o the othe ultu es. This a ui ed eha iou is t a s itted th ough
symbols and through external manifestations like artefacts and traditions. The core of
values and ideas that are passed down for generations, are both products of various actions
and also become or have potential for conditioning elements of future action.
Culture in International Relations
Many schools opine that it is after the collapse of the Soviet Union that culture as an
independe t a ia le i I te atio al ‘elatio s gai ed u e
i the
s. A d it is ofte
a gued that it is a ou d this pe iod that C iti al theo also a ose i the
s. The e as
a i eased i te est i ultu e as a sou e of o fli t hi h a e to e interpreted as
part of the need to imagine the anarchical international system to be always in conflict.
Adherents of the Realist School view the world necessarily in terms of clash or conflict due
to lack of order. Huntington, following their tradition, in 1993 argued that any clashes in
future will be based on civilizational lines in the post- Cold War world. But there were some
visionary scholars who recommended the need to study culture in International Relations as
early as 1979. Geoffrey Barraclough, in Turning Points in World History, concludes his book
ith, …. [O ] ultu e a d i ilizatio ….pe haps o e tha is ofte ealized- the future
depe ds.
E phasizi g the fo us o ultu e i the
s, “he i Fah
o se es, The e o o i a d
political issues t a sfo ed i to e a ka l ultu al a d t aditio al o es. Theoretically,
culture has been gaining prominence also after Richard Ned Lebow published his work, A
Cultural Theory of International Relations in which he argued that to theorize and develop
meaningful insights in international relations it is necessary to understand the nature of
society in which nations interact. It can be argued that culture was easily employed as it is
u s stè e d e lusio , a o di g to Mi hel Fou ault i
E en Adam Kuper argues,
ultu e is al a s defi ed i oppositio to so ethi g else. All these de elop e ts d o e
culture, until then ignored in International Relations, into prominence as a significant area
of research in International Relations Studies.
Rising Dilemma
Despite the emphasis very few scholars take time and space in their strenuous arguments to
define what they mean by culture and its role in the international scenario. As Batora and
95
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Mok e ightl poi t out, …… the oles a d o eptualizations of culture in world politics are
a iguous a d ofte
ultiple i a gi e situatio . While the i po ta e of ultu e has
been on the rise in the realm of international relations, its role in this field remains
underspecified in the academic literature.
Studies on Culture in International Relations:
According to Sherin Fahmy, the different aspects of culture in the realm of International
‘elatio s “tudies a e atego ized u de fou diffe e t atego ies: “tudies o ki g o the
weight of culture in general, studies working on the role of religion as a fundamental basis
of cultural formation, studies working on the concept of soft power and studies working on
the o ept of ps hologi al a . Yu Xi tia ide tified th ee p o i e t theo ies that stud
culture in International Relations namely, Clash of Civilizations, Soft Power and
Constructivism.
Shift in Role of Culture
From being categorized only as the basis of moral thrust in the international system to being
recognized as a variable with the capacity to change, mould, move and influence national
behaviour and national interests, culture has come a long way which will be dealt with.
1. Culture as a Source of Conflict and Source of Cooperation: James Ferguson argues that it
was with Huntington that the otio of i ilizatio al as the highest le el of ultu al
organization) differences leading to conflict began. Civilizations are presented, by
Hu ti gto , as ultu al e tities hi h i lude ele e ts of la guage, histo , eligio ,
customs, institutions and self-identification. He argues that even if war does not occur,
cultural differences will tend to lead to more misunderstandings and intensify competition.
He presents all these arguments in the post – Cold Wa o ld, he e glo al politi s has
become multi-polar and multi- ultu al fo the fi st ti e i the histo , a o di g to Xi tia .
This take was criticised by numerous scholars who also saw culture as a source of
oope atio . The ost i po ta t iti is
as o si gle do i a t glo al ultu e has
completely filled the global system, and we do live in a multi-polar and multi-civilizational
o ld. A d i te -civilizational communication may also lead to dialogue, adaptation and
mutual learning. Hence, culture is studied both as a source of conflict and a source of
cooperation.
2. Culture in Foreign Policy: The relationship between culture and foreign policy is not only
old ut a stau h o e. Cultu e is e tai l a i po ta t ele e t hi h affe ts fo eig
poli , o se ed Fe guso . Th oughout history, national leaders have used culture to justify
their stands and acts. George Kennan was of the opinion that ideology (as part of culture) of
another nation when studied would help understand that nation better. Scholars like
Northrup also emphasized the need to study culture in foreign policy studies. Batora and
Mokre are of the opinion that assessing the role of culture in foreign policies is based on
varying and partly contradictory understandings of culture and its functions in society.
Culture has not only served as a means of overcoming local, ethnic, and socio-economic
borders and divides to create national communities but also exclusion of those not
belonging to these identities, due to creation of collective identities. Culture was used, by
many states, as a tool to attain or achieve their national interests a few times too often in
world history by using it as soft power, diplomatic tool, propaganda and ideology.
96
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Culture as Soft Power: The role of culture in International Relations Studies escalated with
Joseph N e s o u e tal o k Soft Power -The Means to Success in World Politics (2004)
notes Yu Xintian. Nye first coined the term in his 1990 book, Bound to Lead: The Changing
Nature of American Power. He defi ed soft po e as The a ilit to get what you want
th ough att a tio athe tha th ough oe io . He also oted that soft po e ould e
de eloped th ough elatio s ith allies, e o o i assista e, a d ultu al e ha ges. He
a gued that this ould esult i a o e fa ou a le pu li opi io a d edi ilit a oad.
There are throughout history instances when culture was used to promote a good image
abroad. By having a favourable image and identity, a nation could always maintain and
develop good foreign relations with any number of neighbouring, as well as, far away
nations. Major Powers like France and USA, have developed elaborate schemes for
promoting their culture abroad.
Cultu e s Use i P opaganda and Ideological Battles: Culture is extensively used as
propaganda. During the Cold Wa , the U ited “tates of A e i a aged a a of o ds a d
of ideas that attacked communism, promoted capitalism and democracy, defended U.S.
fo eig poli ies, a d ad e tised the A e i a a of life i o de to i the Cold Wa . This
is a classic example of use of its culture by a state for propaganda. And with rise of media
a d te h olog , the e d of the Cold Wa it has ee a gued has ought a out o e
p opaga da, ot less. It is also used in ideological battles in International Relations. Both
Soviet Union and USA tried to win over states on their side by promoting their culture in
their ideological confrontation.
Culture as a Diplomacy Tool: Culture has been an active part of diplomacy. Diplomatic
relations were strengthened by projecting the versatility and vibrancy of a state's culture.
Their attractiveness was further enhanced by promotion of their language, music and food.
For example, Alliance Française, an international organization with its headquarters at Paris
operates with the sole aim of spreading French language and culture throughout the globe.
R. James Ferguson, indicates since 1920s, governments have tried to use culture in foreign
affairs to promote their language, music, media and views overseas. He further calls
attention to cultural diplomacy, giving example of operation of British Council throughout
the world which is an example of promotion of language and culture as part of nation-tonation diplomacy through student exchange programmes through scholarships etc. is widely
used by many countries with the aim of showcasing their exclusive cultures. Hence, culture
is massively used in their diplomatic relations by the states.
3. Culture Molds Foreign Policy: There is a growing literature on the role of culture in
International Relations that deals with the ways and methods in which domestic culture of
nations influences their foreign policies and perceptions about the international system. A
substantial amount of literature on these lines is being produced by Social Constructivists,
Feminism and other alternative approaches to International Relations, though not
necessarily only by them. There are also studies being made to demonstrate that it is not
just domestic policy that influences the foreign policy but sometimes the international
order/system/ structure that influences and shapes the domestic policies of nations.
Domestic Culture Shapes Foreign Policy: Culture, it is argued influences the decisions of
leaders and restricts government actions through popular pressure. Most of the time,
97
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
domestic culture informs actors, i.e., states, about the kind of world system they should
strive for. Different cultures in different societies have varying views of how the world
should e o st u ted like the t i ute s ste
envisioned by the Chinese in the imperial
past.
Social Constructivism, tries to emphasize that the concepts like anarchy and sovereignty
acquire meaning through actual social interaction. They consider culture as a determining
factor. Constructivism argues that states do not know beforehand or a priory what their
interests are. The national identity and interest of any state is formed on the basis of its
historical – ultu al o te t a d o ditio s. Mi hael Ba ett e plai s ….. ultu e i fo s the
meanings that people gi e to thei a tio ….. Pete Katze stei a gues that states diffe
internally in their make-up and this, impacts upon their behaviour in the international
system.
Feminism is another approach in International Relations Studies that stresses the role of
culture in shaping actions of nations in the international scene, which is for most part
influenced by Patriarchy. Domestic culture which is heavily under the control of patriarchal
system prompts nations to mould their foreign policy along aggressive lines, characterized
by masculine traits that take no account of security of women or children in case they go to
a s o ha e ilita
o fli ts. Ma I‘ Fe i ists a gue that the dis ipli e is i he e tl
as uli e i atu e, hi h is oulded do estic cultures of various nations.
International Structure Shaping Domestic and Foreign Policy
When international order or system is envisaged, it is most often forgotten or ignored that
I te atio al elatio s i its oadest se se is itself the p odu t of the interaction of
diffe e t ultu es. A d this s ste ope ates o o
o l ag eed upo I te atio al La s
(in majority of instances or at least the nations strives for it based on normative values) that
are creations born out of interactions between different nations. The resultant culture is
powerful enough to mould and influence domestic policies. For example, China and India
(among many other nations) strenuously try to project themselves as adhering to Human
Rights, in order to maintain their global image because of pressures from the international
system which underlines Human Rights as fundamental goal that each nation should strive
for. From this it becomes clear that the international structure (as Constructivists define it)
influences the units, i.e., the states and other actors.
Apart from the pressures of the international system, many a times the international
o ga izatio s i flue e state eha iou , thus i f i gi g upo a d shapi g atio s ultu e.
Martha Finnemore tries to establish that the internationalist organizations are involved in
the process of social construction which determine national interests. She in her seminal
work, National Interests in International Society, a gues that the i te ests a e ot
p eo dai ed a d out the e ut are constructed through social and interstate interaction.
He ase studies e e UNE“CO, ‘ed C oss, Ge e a Co e tio a d the Wo ld Ba k s
influence on attitudes to poverty.
Perception Matters
From all the discussions and arguments what becomes apparent is that culture by itself may
not play a determining role. It may play some significant role if the actors on the
98
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
International scene perceive that in certain areas, culture has a significance of its own.
L d s take o it is st o ge , It is people, ot culture, that does things. Culture does not
o k,
o e, ha ge, ut is o ked, is o ed, is ha ged. It is people ho do thi gs. It
highlights the dimensions of the role culture can play in International Relations. Given the
conflicting interpretations the term culture is subjected to, it appears that culture with all
the ambiguities and complexities attached to it is in no position to direct or steer any leader
o state i to de idi g o a
atte that a e det i e tal to a state s atio al
interest. It is always the people i.e., the leaders and their advisers (themselves steeped in a
particular culture), foreign policy scholars, diplomats and foreign affairs ministers who if
they think culture is important will make culture work (when there is no other means or
a / he the e is a eed fo e plai i g e tai a tio s of states eha iou o all fo
change in foreign policy in name of culture. Ultimately, it is not always culture that does
things or moves things or changes things. It is employed, used, misused and abused by these
people fo thei e efit, thei state s e efits o fo di e ti g thei atio s atte tio o
newer things that they themselves personally hold sacred/ important/ essential. Hence,
whenever culture is used as an explanation or justification of actions of states, it should
never be taken for granted/accepted without a pinch of salt/without scepticism. As Sherin
Fah
poi ts out, the ultu al di e sio s of i te atio al elatio s a d the a eas the
often tend to cover [are]: tools of external interference, determinants of foreign policies,
topi s of o ldl issues, a d spa e fo ulti atio al i te a tio s.
One way of explaining the phenomena of International Relations and culture may be stated
as follows: Since the very beginning culture has been used/misused/abused by the national
leaders and other important actors in international relations. Culture is used with what can
e des i ed as sele ti e a esia : he a d he e atio s pe ei e thei atio al
interests are being enhanced or accentuated by employing culture as a means it is cited. But
once it is perceived as playing no role, it is conveniently dropped. For instance, regional
organizations even when they state their purpose as strengthening cultural bonds have
never been observed to extend support to another state plainly on the basis of culture,
espe iall if the a t is su e to ha pe its state s i te est. A“EAN a se e as a good
example in this regard. .While national interest and cultural interests can be related in some
ways, it may be argued that culture alone may not be decisive in determining national
interest, especially in the context of globalizing world, where monetary and profit making
considerations reign supreme. In other words, capitalist culture creates money making and
p ofit a i isi g ultu e. To uote Matthiese , Politi al leade s a d usi ess a age s
alike a the efo e e e pe ted to a oid e essi e e phasis o ultu al diffe e es , i the
global economic interactions where cultural barriers can limit trade. As Batora and Mokre in
their introduction state, “tates so eti es a o e e phasise ultu al aspe ts e ause of
lack of clarity in the perception and practices in foreign policy matters. They make use of the
i age of thei atio s culture and society to enhance their interest in international
s ste .
Even though Social Constructivism along with other post-positivist approaches clamour for
the increasing role of culture in International Relations Studies, evidence shows that states
are the major actors who decide the action and give appropriate reaction in international
relations, based on their perceived national interests. No state walks an extra mile to
benefit another only because it shares same or even similar culture with it. Under
99
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
globalization, the tendency is to promote economic trade and business interests. And as
Matthiese a gues, While ultu al o e s a pla a ole i i te atio al politi s, it is i
the basic, shared interest most countries to achieve and maintain economic
p ospe it . He e, ultu e o upies a a k seat ost of the ti e. Cultu e pla s a ole if it a
promote business interests. To put it in a broader context, the statement by James Ferguson
may be taken into account, ……Cultu e is a eal fo e i international relations, but is no
magic cure to conflict. Put another way, cultural factors may be much too dispersed an
influence to deal with major economic, environmental and social problems unless expressed
di e tl th ough po e ful i stitutio s.
There are many other scholars like Yu Xintian who emphasize the role of culture being used
to direct behaviours of states and their peoples to push forward the international
community in the direction of peace, democracy, justice, civilization and prosperity. In
a othe pla e, she e e a gues, Guidi g o di e ti g ultu al ha ge ill e o e of the
ai tasks of go e
e ts a d leade s of ou t ies i the o ld. This ta ta ou ts to
assign a prescriptive and normative role to culture. They belong in the category of
something that can be aspired or desired. There is little empirical evidence to show that
nations have indulged in such idealistic and normative goals yet. Many eminent scholars are
willing to assign a big role to cultural factors playing a significant role in International
Relations Studies. But our study shows that we are still far away from such a notion where
culture can be assigned a determining role.
Apart from the problem of lack of empirical evidences, another fact that cannot be ignored
is that ultu e is al a s i a flu . It keeps ha gi g as it s e d a i . No ultu e is
o sta t: the e is hea
o o i g a d le di g that leads to a ultu atio pe e iall i
international system due to many reasons including globalization and technology and
communication revolution. Hence, a concept that is not fixed/concrete/coherent/definitive
can scarcely be expected to guide any meaningful action and serve as a guide to any
decision in international relations.
References
Barraclough, Geoffrey. (1979) Turning Points in World History. Norfolk: Thames and
Hudson.
Barnett, Michael. (2008) Social Constructivism. in Baylis John, Steve Smith and Patricia
Owens (Eds.), The Globalization of World Politics – An Introduction to International
Relations. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Batora, Jozef and Monika Mokre, (ed.s)(2011) Culture and External Relations, Europe and
Beyond.Surrey:Ashgate.p.4.
Retrieved
from:
http://www.ashgate.com/pdf/SamplePages/Culture_and_External_Relations_Intro.p
df
During, S. (Ed.) (1993) The Cultural Studies Reader. London:Routledge.
Fah , “he i . Cultu e a d I te atio al ‘elatio s: T a sfo atio i Theo a d
P a ti e,
at
:
http://www.onislam.net/english/shariah/contemporaryissues/human-conditions-and-social-context/416943-culture-and-international-relations.html? Social_Context=
Fe guso , Ja es i
The Co t o e sial ole of ultu e i I te atio al ‘elatio s at
http://www.international-relations.com/wbadvir/wbadvir4.hhtm p.1.
100
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Hall, S. (Ed.), (1997) Representation: Cultural Representation and Signifying Practices. The
Open University: Milton Keynes.
Hobson John M. (2000). The State and International Relations. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. p.146.
Kjell Kuh e, Chi ese ‘elatio s ith Af i a- Does P opaga da Pla a ole? at:
http://www.slideshare.net/kjell79/chinese-relations-with-africa-does-propagandaplay-a-role p.3.
Sardar, Z. and van Loon, B. (Eds.), (1997). Cultural Studies for Beginners. Cambridge:Icon
Books.
Upadhyay, V.S and Gaya Pandey. (1993). History of Anthropological Thought. New Delhi:
Concept Publishing Company.
White, Leslie A. (1959). The Concept of Culture. American Anthropologist, 61(2), p.227.
Retrieved from onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1525/aa.11959.61.2.02a00040/pdf
Xintian, Yu. (2004). Combining Research on Cultural Theory and International Relations in
Cultural Factors in International Relations. CRVP, III (21), p.2.
101
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
102
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
China Factor i I dia-Pakistan Relationship: A Review
Tanwir Arshed
Department of Political Science, University of North Bengal, Darjeeling
Abstract
In the present geostrategic global scenario post 9/11, India & Pakistan has been playing a
dynamic role in molding and reshaping the power politics and geopolitics of the larger
neighborhood and has also impacted the international politics significantly. Their growing
military strength, potent nuclear arsenal and heated talks, has in some way or other not
only influenced the global geo politics but has compelled from time to time various super
powers to shift their onus toward the region. Foreign policies of these nations striving to
either protect their own sovereignty or to enhance their interest in the international foray
have brought larger players in the strategic prism. One such super power and crucial issue
that has affected and influenced the “outh Asia ‘egio politi s is Chi a fa to i the
relationship between these two neighbours. China has been the most formidable aspect in
accessing and influencing the internal as well as external strategic decision making policies
of India and Pakistan, one being the mightiest among the countries of the Islamic world and
the other being the most influential developing country in contemporary world politics. The
present paper is an attempt to study the intricacies of relationship and their effects in the
Indian-Pakistan relationship and focus on how and to what extent such relationship has
affected the conflict ridden South Asian subcontinent, in the days to come.
Keywords: India, China, Pakistan, United States, Geopolitics, Strategic Locations
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction:
In international politics bilateral and trilateral relations between strategically vital nations
has always been a very crucial factor for regional as well as international stability and peace.
The present paper is an attempt to study one such vital trilateral relationship between three
Asian neighbours - India- China and Pakistan. Being nuclear states, sharing the same colonial
history and international borders with each other, India, Pakistan and China has turned out
to be the three major strategic players in the geopolitics of South-Asia. China has been the
most formidable state actor in influencing the internal as well as external strategic decision
making policies of India and Pakistan, one being the mightiest among the countries of the
Islamic world and the other being the forthcoming powerful strategic player in molding and
remolding international strategic and economic policies in contemporary world politics.
Relations have grown between these three nations on the basis of necessity, prestige,
historical legacy and regional and international strategic moves. The conflict between India
and Pakistan continues to threaten international peace and security for the last seven
decades. The equation that China has been playing in respect to India and Pakistan
103
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
separately has fueled more fire to the animosity than pave any path of resolutions. The
impact which these three nations exert on the sub-continent is at present a matter of
critical concern for all the international scholars. However before one could make a final
assessment of the future of South Asia and China, India and Pakistan respectively, one need
to assess how these relations developed to have a better understanding of the conundrum.
Pakistan-China Relations:
The relations between China and Pakistan are based on three main pillars- trust, respect,
and mutual benefit. After independence, Pakistan was the first Muslim, and the third noncommunist, country to accord diplomatic relationship with China in 1951. Since then,
bilateral relations between both these nations have continued to grow, encompassing areas
of defense, security, trade, economic cooperation, energy, infrastructure, water
management, mining, agriculture, education, transport, communications, science and
technology. Pakistan and China share a rare unanimity of views on regional and
international issues and they enjoy a robust relationship in the defense, political and
diplomatic fields, which have led to a birth of a cordial all weathered friendship.
In past seven decades, the two countries have established their bilateral relations in multidimensional ways, which has evolved in a manner to serve the interests of both countries.
Although the diplomatic relationship of Pakistan with China was established in 1951 but the
bonding between the two ou t ies st e gthe ed f o the
s he Pakista suppo ted
Chi a s seati g in the UN in 19611. A year later Pakistan further showed its deep faith and
essence of friendship for China in the Sino-Indian War of 1962, when despite being the ally
of the West; did it did not considered China to be the aggressor country and blamed India
for the border conflict. This bold act of Pakistan where on one hand an open challenge for
India, on the other reflected the sheer commonality of interests that was emerging between
Pakistan and China.2 As an act of reciprocity during the visit of former Pakistani President
A u Kha s to Beiji g o Ma h
the Chi ese leade s p o ised hi that if I dia
commits aggression into Pakistan territory, China would definitively support Pakistan. 3 Thus
by the time the 1965 Indo- Pakistan War erupted, Pakistani-Chinese relations were well
esta lished e ause oth ou t ies atio al i te ests e ged togethe . It e a e lea l
evident when in the wake of the war the Chinese Government gave a three a th ee-day
ulti atu to dis a tle all I dia
ilita
orks on the disputed Sikkim-Chinese boundary
o else ea full espo si ilit fo all the g a e o se ue es a isi g the e f o . 4 It was in
the ake of that a that Chi a e a e Pakista s ai supplie of a s a d a
u itio s.
China became an important and alternative source of military and diplomatic support for
Pakistan. It was mainly their peripheral geo strategic and geo political benefits in the subcontinent and mutual antagonism against India that basically facilitated this rapprochement.
Moreover it was the Chinese desire to strengthen and expand their sphere of influence with
Asian and Muslim nations that this relationship started taking a strong base.
Both these Asian neighbours with this shared sense of an evolving geostrategic environment
gradually came much closer to each other in various ways. Not only in strengthening the
regional strategic bonds but Pakistan even played a very significant role in developing
pathways of communication between the US and China that resulted in Henry Kissinge s
isit to Chi a follo ed
the histo i P eside t ‘i ha d Ni o s isit and consolidation of
104
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Sino-US relations and the Shanghai Communiqué, which prompted India to sign a Treaty of
Pea e, F ie dship a d Coope atio ith the “o iet U io i the
s.5
The Indian nuclear explosion of 1974 introduced a new dimension to the strategic balance in
the region and gave fresh impetus of expanding avenues in Pakistan-China defense
oope atio . This had ee
ell do u e ted i Weste
edia a d i tellige e epo ts
and according to these reports, China was the first country to supply Pakistan with weapons
g ade u a iu to ake at least t o u lea o s, u h to I dia s o ste atio . Bet ee
1971 and 1978, China assisted Pakistan in multiple ways from building defense-related mega
projects, T–59 tanks, the F–6 Aircraft Rebuild Factory, sixty MiG-19 fighter jets, 150 tanks
and other weapons as part of a $300 million economic and military aid agreement 7. Even
during the time of the Iranian Islamic Revolution in February 1979, which had threatened
peace and stability in the region, China stood firmly by Pakistan. It also condemned the
i asio of Afgha ista as a hege o i a tio that posed a th eat to pea e a d sta ilit
not only for the region but for the entire world8.
Similarly, on the same tune Pakistan always supported China on almost all issues important
to Chinese national interests like that of Taiwan and Tibet. During the post cold war decade
of
s he Pakista
as u de sa tio s of U ited “tates because of its various defence
a e d e ts ought a out i p e ie of Pakista s u lea
eapo s de elop e t
programme, China assisted Pakistan in strengthening its nuclear and conventional defence
apa ilities
p o isi g full a d a solute suppo t to Pakistan against foreign aggression
and interference including nuclear blackmail. 9 This extensive nuclear cooperation reached
its peak in the 1980s and early 1990s, and included a secret blueprint for a nuclear bomb,
highly enriched uranium, tritium, scientists and key components for a nuclear weapons
program complex.10 Further the supply of military hardware including medium range
Shaheen-1 and intermediate range Shaheen-11 Missile, JF-17 aircraft, F-22P frigates with
helicopters, K-8 jet trainers, T-85 tanks, F-7 aircrafts, Hong Niao cruise missile which was
e h iste ed as Ba a s all a s a d a
u itio s has fu the ei fo ed the ilita a d
11
strategic ties between the two .
Since the late 1990s, two countries acknowledged the fact that in order to sustain a
comprehensive cooperative relationship, substantive economic cooperation, matching the
level of political and strategic cooperation was absolutely necessary and they focused in
boosting their economic ties with each other. In the last few years, through frequent
interaction between the leadership of the two countries, the two sides have been able to
determine a vision for the direction of their bilateral economic relations.
However, relationship between China and Pakistan has recently faced some snags raison
detre Pakista i go e
e t s i a ilit to o t ol a d u te o is a d i su ge
i its
own territory. Such terrorist groups are openly supporting and participating to promote
te o is a d iole e i Chi a s Uighu p o i e i the Xinjiang region which remains to be
a major security threat and concern for the Chinese administration. China is also
app ehe si e a out Pakista s u lea a d o e tio al defe e e uip e ts falli g i to a
wrong hand which has been clearly elaborated by some western analyst.12 Moreover the
rising power profile and relationship between India and China and Western Economic giants
105
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
remains a concern to Pakistan. Economically India remains to be a much better partner than
Pakistan and the rising India China trade remains proof of that.
But despite such bitter trails these two nations has always maintained the geo-strategic and
regional policy on much higher sides and had moved ahead in retaining a relationship of
trust, respect, with each other. The speech of former Pakistani P.M Mr. Aziz on September
,
at a i te atio al o fe e e lea l i di ates the fa t, he e he said Pakistan
a d Chi a e jo s all eathe f ie dship ased o o plete t ust a d o fide e.…. F o
Khunjrub to Gawadar, the symbols of Pakistan-China friendship dot the landscape. 13
Currently, Pakistan and China are cooperating closely in the development of the Gwadar
deep sea port, which post-operation will enhance economic activity in Pakistan and provide
important access to the Gulf a d the oil sea t ade outes fo Chi a s apidl de elopi g
western regions. At present, a number of important projects such as the upgrading of
Karakorum Highway (which links Pakistan with China), Thar Coal Mining, upgrading of
Pakistan Railways, and Power Generation Projects—both nuclear and nonnuclear—are
some examples of this expanding economic cooperation. Besides this, the two sides have
signed a large number of agreements on economic cooperation. China has opened up its
western region adjacent to Pakistan for trade and investment in order to reduce the
economic disparity between its developed coastal regions and other underdeveloped areas.
Once developed, this region would be a hub for economic activity between China, Central
Asia, and South Asia. Moreo e Pakista s e t i to the “ha ghai Coope atio O ga izatio
as a o se e a d Chi a s e t i to the “outh Asia Asso iatio fo ‘egio al Coope atio
(SAARC) as an observer would allow Pakistan-China bilateral economic relations to grow
from a regional perspective.14
Sino-India Relations
After attaining independence India sought to play a greater role in world politics being the
beacon to resolve issue of the developing and third world countries. On that principle India
became the first non-commu ist state to fo all e og ize the People s ‘epu li of Chi a
(PRC) and gave stress to initiate a period of bonhomie between the two. India accepted the
Chinese suzerainty over Tibet, and recognized it as an autonomous region of China and to
lesse the tensions that exist in the world today and help i
eati g a li ate of pea e .
On April 24th 1954 the signing of the Panchsheel Agreement15 in Beijing between Chinese
Premier Zhou Enlai and an Indian government delegation gave a solid start to this
relationship of mutual trust. This agreement along with some fruitful 1950s border
negotiation, marked the high point of India-China relations, celebrated by the slogan HindiChini-bhai-bhai (India and China are brothers).
But despite of such cordial and friendly beginning the course of relationship between the
two Asian neighbours took a complete different turn in the subsequent days to come. With
the advent of Cold War, China began to see India as threatening its perceived leadership of
the Third World. Controversies soon emerged regarding the Indo-Tibetan border and the
Sino-Indian border in general. Two areas were of particular concern: the eastern sector
(145,000km2), which the Indians called the North East Frontier Agency (NEFA) and which the
Chinese viewed as South Tibet; and the western sector (34,000km2), which included most
prominently the Aksai Chin plateau, bordering Kashmir, Xinjiang and Tibet. Some analyst
106
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
have stated that, during the late
s the U“ Ce t al I tellige e Age
a d Chia g Kaishek s age ts fi a ed a d t ai ed Ti eta e els ithi the I dia Te ito 16. In March of
1959, following an uprising against Chinese rule in Tibet, Dalai Lama fleeing to India created
significant tensions between the two nations.
Things turned out to be worse when again in the year 1956, the Communist Party of China
promulgated its first official map of China and the surrounding area, rejecting the McMahon
line (first demarcated by the British colonial authorities in 1914) showing large swathes of
Indian Territory within the borders of China. The Indian government reacted angrily,
a usi g the CCP of a it a il e te di g Chi a s borders. This became personified by
ongoing border disputes between the two sides, beginning in 1959 with Chinese incursions
into Ladakh and the North East Frontier Agency (NEFA).17 In due course, these tensions
between the two led to Sino-Indo war on October 1962, which ultimately resulted in Indian
defeat and large stretches of its territory being occupied by Chinese forces till date. The
1962 war almost brought an end to the much expected diplomatic and economic relations
between Beijing and New Delhi; instead bolstering the positions and relations between
Pakistan and China in the region. India-China relations remain bitter during this entire
period due to frequent border skirmishes - such as at Nathula on the Sikkim- Tibet border in
September 1967 and at Somdurong Chu in 1987.
However, the process of rapprochement between the two initiated because of international
pressu e a d the diplo ati elatio s e e ei stated i
. Du i g the
s Chi a
i ple e ted its e o o i efo s a d a ou ed a poli of pea eful e pa sio is s .
Notably after the visit of Rajiv Gandhi in 1988 bitter relations somewhat thawed, when both
sides agreed to deal with the issue of LAC (Line of Actual Control) peacefully and bilaterally.
This came in force in September 1993 after the visit by Indian Prime Minister Narasimha
‘ao, he e the la d a k ag ee e t as sig ed o
ai tai i g Pea e a d Tranquility on
the Line of Actual Control LoAC 18. This agreement significantly improved relations and
included force reductions. In 1996 President Jiang Zemin became the first Chinese head of
state to visit India since the 1962 war.
But the Sino-Indian relations were constantly tested and went through sever strains even
after the process of rapprochement. In 1998 when India went ahead with its nuclear tests
P.M Vajpayee wrote a letter to the President of United States clarifying that the test were
o du ted to p ote t atio al se u it as Chi a as a o e t u lea eapo state , a d
Pakista a o e t u lea
eapo state. 19 On the same tone on May 2, 1998, Indian
Defe e Mi iste Geo ge Fe a dez des i ed Chi a as the u e o e th eat fo India.20
Process of normalizing the relations was initiated by the NDA Government when in the year
2000 President K.R. Narayanan visited Beijing and became the first India head of State to
visit China. In 2003 both the head of Governments made significant attempts in coming
closer to each other, while opening new economic avenues, border trade in Nathula,
indirectly recognizing Sikkim to be an integral part of India, initiating dialogues at a level
which was never done before. Financial institutions of both nations were opened at each
mainland, air routes were opened up and trade between the nations crossed the billion
dollar mark. Thus gradually the process of normalization of relations between the two Asian
gia t s g e step step. “i e the the diplo atic and trade relationship between the two
nations have increased tremendously, with frequent high level mistrial meeting, friendly
107
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
visits, bilateral agreements, trade and commerce, strategic economic dialogues etc gradually
India and China came much closer to each other in ever field. Not only in the regional
bilateral relations but India and China have now come to cooperate each other in various
global multilateral frameworks too. Such as the BRICS, G20, WoT, Global Warming (Kyoto
Protocol), Asian countries development programme etc.
However, issues like continues incursion by the PLA inside disputed territories between
India and China, providing staple visas to people of Arunachal Pradesh has been major
irritant in the relations. The amount of economic growth and bilateral trade hat was
foreseen in 2003 has not been achieved in the last 10 years due to allegation of economic
dumping and lingering mutual suspicion and misconception between the two nations.
th
I the late
s a d ea l
century there were two important international events which
caused ramification in China, Pakistan and India relations as well as beyond the region.
First, there were the Indian and Pakistani nuclear tests in May 1998. However, China did
not abstain or veto United Nations Security Council Resolution 1172 (6 June 1998)
condemning the Pakistani and Indian nuclear tests 21. Secondly, it was the 9/11 attack which
o pletel ha ged the s e a io a d the Chi a fa to i the I dia-Pakistan relations. China
which was an open friend and supporter of Pakistan suddenly took a neutral stand in the
e ti e s e a io. Mo eo e U“ s led Ope atio E du i g F eedo a d the Glo al a agai st
fundamentalist Islamic terrorism and jihad brought Pakistan to the frontline showing the
fallacies of terrorism being used as state policy which ultimately boomerangs on the state
itself.
Conclusion
Today, without doubt the Pakistani policy makers continue to believe that their country
e ai s e t al to Chi a s isio of “outh Asia. I deed a of them extend the logic that
it s the e e t t e ds i i te atio al te o is a d the ha gi g e uatio s et ee I dia
and US which has provided added reasons for the closeness between China and Pakistan.22
Similarly both the Chinese and Indian leadership can perceive that long standing
detachment and animosity nurtured on long standing disputes would remain harmful for
both the economies. India has made attempts to adopt many Chinese models which cater to
urban planning economic growth as well as resource utilization. China similarly is making
attempts to imbibe Indian models of Local Self Government, conflict building mechanism
within center and states within their own nations.
Yet they continue to face the pressure of their new regional level interface which still
remains very fragile in the future, prone to major changes either due to decisions by short
sighted statements or rapid change of international scenario. The recent period has also
seen the three major players of Asia –China, India and Pakistan together - not only taking
steps in improving their bilateral relations but also becoming joint partners in regional
forums like the ASEAN, Shanghai Cooperation Organization, SAARC and much more,. In the
present decade leaders of both Pakistan and China have gradually began to accept the
reality of emerging India and has become increasingly willing to positively reciprocate to
I dia s e gage e t o e tu es. But gi e the fa t that thei past had ee te sed fo su h a
long time their future remains indefinite. Perhaps, given the virtual lowering of their interstate th eats the g eate halle ge toda s o es f o thei do esti o stitue ies a d
108
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
limitation. It is in this context that there is a strong need to revive debate in India on the
nature and significance of China-Pakistan relations in order to evolve a better understanding
and policy response on these issues. Moreover the recent high expected visit of Indian Vice
President Hamid Ansari to China in the commemoration of six decades of Panchsheel
definitely shows a hope of new beginning in the bilateral relationship between the two
Asia gia ts. As, “idhu a d Yua o side that it is i i te est of all pa ties- Beijing,
Islamabad and New Delhi to work towards establishing a strategic restraint regime. 23
Relations between India, China and Pakistan depends entirely on the farsightedness of the
leaderships of each of the three nations to initiate and establish an amicable environment
based on economic, social and cultural linkages which could be the base to decimate the
prolonged aura of mutual suspicion, hatred and mistrust which might open up avenues of
resolving important strategic disputes.
Notes and References
Pakistan Times (Lahore), 4 August 1971.
(http://ipripak.org/journal/summer2004/china.shtml#_ftn65) accessed on 07/07/2014 at
5.05pm
2
Mohammad Ayub Khan, Friends, Not Masters: A Political Autobiography (Islamabad: Mr.
Books, 2002), p. 139.
3
G. W. Choudhury, India, Pakistan, Bangladesh and the Major Powers: Politics of a Divided
Subcontinent, (New York: The Free Press, 1975), p.185.
4
K. S Hasan (ed.), China, India, Pakistan, Documents on the Foreign Relations of Pakistan
(Karachi, Pakistan Institute of International Affairs, 1966), pp. 353-6.
5
Burr, William, Chamberlain, Shron; Bein Gao and Han Zhao (eds); Negotiating U.S.-Chinese
Rapprochement; New American and Chinese Documentation Leading Up to Nixon's 1972
Trip; National Security Archive Electronic Briefing Book No. 70; Document 1-27; George
Washington University;
see also: The Beijing-Washi gto Ba k ha el a d He
Kissi ge s se et t ip to Chi a;
http://www2.gwu.edu/~nsarchiv/NSAEBB/NSAEBB70/#docs accessed on 10/07/2014 at
1.57 am
6
As cited in J. Yuan and W. Sidhu, China and India: Cooperation or Conflict (London: Lynne
Rienner Publishers, 2003), p. 54
7
S.M. Burke, Pakista s Fo eig Poli : A Histo i al A al sis, (London: Oxford University
Press, 1973), pp.405
8
Christopher Jaffrelot, ed., A History Of Pakistan and Its Origins. 2002. Anthem Press:
London pp-101-105
9
G. W. Choudhury, India, Pakistan, Bangladesh and the Major Powers: Politics of a Divided
Subcontinent, (New York: The Free Press, 1975), p.120
10
T. V. Paul, „Chi ese-Pakistani Nuclear/Missile Ties and the Balance of Power‟, The
Nonproliferation Review (Summer 2003), p. 4; Thomas C. Reed, ‟The Chinese Nuclear Tests,
1964-1996‟, Physics Today (September 2008), p. 47.
11
Tellis, Ashle J; I dia s E e gi g Nu lea Postu e: Bet ee ‘e essed Dete e t a d
Ready Arsenal; (New Delhi; OUP; 2001); pp: 46-47
12
Pakista u lea eapo s th eat u de esti ated ; NDTV online, Press Trust of India;
Nov, 20; 2013 http://www.ndtv.com/article/world/pakistan-nuclear-weapons-threat-underestimated-448407 accessed on 10/07/2014 at 05..00 pm ; G ego , “hau
, The
1
109
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Te o ist Th eat to Pakista s Nu lea eapo s , Combating Terrorism Center, July 15;
https://www.ctc.usma.edu/posts/the-terrorist-threat-to-pakistan%E2%80%99s-nuclearweapons; accessed on 10/07/2014 at 06.00 am.
13
Indo-US Relations Not a cause of concern: Aziz; (Dawn; Karachi; ) September 27, 2005
14
Embassy of Islamic Republic of Pakistan, Beijing, China; Important Documents;
http://www.pakbj.org.pk/Important_Documents accessed on 08/07/2014 at 7.06pm
15
Panchasheel embodied five core principles - espe t fo ea h othe s te ito ial i teg it
and sovereignty; non-aggression; non-i te fe e e i ea h othe s i te al affai s; e ualit
and mutual benefit; and peaceful co-e iste e hi h fo all e isio ed pea eful
coexiste e
16
John W. Garver, Protracted Contest: Sino-Indian Rivalry in the Twentieth Century (Seattle,
WA: University of Washington Press, 2001), p.60-61
17
Achary, Alka; 2008; China & India: Politics of Incremental Engagement; (Delhi; Har Anand
Publication Pvt Ltd.; India;) pp.31-34; and Lamb, Alastair, The McMahon line: a study in the
relations between India, China and Tibet, 1904 to 1914, (London, OUP; 1966); pp 42
18
Chadha, Vivek; Indo-US Relations Divergence to Convergence; (New Delhi; Macmillan
Press; 2008); pp187
19
Talbot, Strobe; Engaging Inda: Diplomacy, Democracy and the Bomb; (New Delhi; Viking;
2004); pp 53
20
Dixit, J.N; I dia s Fo eig poli : 19 -2003; (New Delhi; Picus Books; 2003); pp 408
21
J. Moha Malik, „“outh Asia i Chi a‟s Foreign Relations‟ Pacifica Review, vol. 13, no. 1
(February 2001), p. 86
22
Rahaman, Fazal-ur; Pakista s elatio s ith Chi a; Pea e i itiati e ; (New Delhi; Vo-4; No3-6; May- Dec: 1999;) pp 170-190
23
Sidhu, Waheguru Pal Singh & Yuan, Jing Dong; China and India cooperation and conflict?;
(New Delhi: India Research Press)
110
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Changing Dynamics of Global Governance of
Intellectual Property: An Analysis
Makhan Saikia
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai
Abstract
Global governance is referred to as an ongoing inquiry into managing the dynamics of a
more global world order of today. It is deliberately linked to globalization, but it transcends
the latter. This paper provides the linkage between global governance and intellectual
property (IP). The author highlights the Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights
(TRIPS) and emerging regime dynamics of IP. It re-examines the narratives of both the pro-IP
advocates (especially concerned with TRIPS) and opponents to provide a comprehensive
worldview of the current global IP regime. The paper finally brings forth valuable insights
into the changing global governance of IP enforcement with a strong emphasis on the new
challenge for developing countries.
Keywords: Intellectual Property (IP), Global Governance, Globalization, Enforcement, World
Trade Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO).
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction: Globalization and Global Governance
Governance and globalization consist of the core of international relations throughout the
histo of the dis ipli e. Ho e e the e d of the Cold Wa , the appa e t g o th of sup anational institutions in Europe, and raising concerns with environmental degradation and
other trans- o de e te alities a e o spa ki g a oade e ui i to glo al go e a e
(Lake 1999). The decline of the nation-state along with at least some of its governance
functions has given rise to three new forms of governance (Whitman 2003: 253-72). The
first is governance without government (Rosenau and Czempiel 1992), governance without
government management. Therefore today various matters are managed without the help
of the nation state. Second, governance through various public policy networks. At global
level this refers to the growing involvement of international NGOs (INGO) and private sector
organizations at different levels. Third, governance at the global level can be normatively
mediated and moderated. Here we may include the efforts made by the Commission on
Global Governance (CGG) and the Global Compact once created by former UN Secretary
General Kofi Annan.
Global Governance of Intellectual Property (IP)
Notwithstanding this more nuanced interpretation of globalization, global governance has
always been interpreted as biased towards the developed nations. Therefore, the
developing nations while implementing new bilateral or multilateral IP agreements have
111
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
found that their interpretative scope regarding rights or opportunities are largely defined or
athe li ited the a the U“ o the EU a ts it to e. IP i glo al go e a e i pli ates
both micro and macro-interplays of regime theory. The prevailing regime complex that
contextualizes international IP assists in the deployment of regime theory to explore the
tensions and overall counterhegemonic landscape that characterize oppositions to the TRIPS
Agreement. Consequently one of the operational features of the IP regime complex is the
politics and the process of regime shifting or forum shifting (Braithwaite and Drahos 2000)
by both developed and less developed countries through specific and multi-party treaty and
non-treaty forums that are now part of global governance framework for IP. The very
contesting nature of IP rights granted and made easily available demands that we need to
look at the f o all pe spe ti es-local, regional, global and also holistic. One consequence
of such a multifaceted approach is that we are bound to encounter clashes between
national, transnational, international, customary and socio-economic rules as they relate to
spe ifi o je ts, o ks a d ideas Dutfield a d “uthe sa e
: . This p o ides a ple
opportunities for the WIPO to inquire into the legalese of the existing global IP rights and its
implications so that the 21st century knowledge economy can grow with lesser interruptions
and there could be a balance between the developed and the developing nations.
The o ept of go e a e depi ts e du i g ultifa ious a s, p o esses a d d a i s
through which individuals, many institutions (private and public) and regimes manage
common, diverse and conflicting interests (CGG 1995a & b). The emerging global
governa e ould o e i a a that a o
odates a oad a ge of stakeholde s a d
pu li s “ell
:
-4). Thus, the evolution, interaction and unravelling of globalization
and international regime dynamics in the IP arena makes IP a subject matter of global
governance.
The emerging international IP governance shows the evidence of forum shifting or regime
shifting in the last more than a decade or so since the advent of the TRIPS in 1995. Thus
egi e shifti g is defi ed as a atte pt to alte the status quo ante by moving treaty
negotiations, law making initiatives or standard setting activities from one international
e ue to a othe Helfe
&
.
TRIPS Agreement and Emerging Regime Dynamics of IP
How the TRIPS Agreement negotiated during the Uruguay Round of talks (1986-94) of the
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) has a longstanding impact on shaping the
international IP governance would be discussed in this section. The coming of the TRIPS
ould e te ed as a i to fo those ultinational companies determined to raise
international intellectual property IP) standards and boost IP protection in developing
ou t ies Dee e
. The T‘IP“ Ag ee e t is ot a sui ge e is s ste fo the
i te atio al p ote tio of IP. I fa t, it traces its historical and juridical roots to several
earlier international agreements, two of which dates back to the nineteenth century. The
Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property of 1883 and the Berne Convention
for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works of 1886 were precursors of the TRIPS
Ag ee e t ‘i ha ds
: . The histo i Pa is Ag ee e t eeded e e s to p o ide
national treatment for foreign innovations in the areas of patents, trademarks, industrial
designs, appellations of origin, and utility models, whereas the Berne Convention had the
sa e p o isio fo op ights o l . Natio al t eat e t ho e e does ot e ui e atio s
112
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
to provide any particular standard of protection. It merely requires that whatever level is
provided to domestic works also be provided to foreign works.
Essentially, then Paris and Berne Conventions amount to non-discriminations agreements in
the a eas of IP‘s athe tha ag ee e ts that esta lish i i u sta da ds i id . But
these two historic agreements were hardly accepted internationally. This happened because
many of the countries felt that these agreements would be a disadvantage for harnessing
the benefits of technological transfer and development. It is noted that in 1893, the Paris
and Berne Conventions were merged into a single secretariat which later came to be under
the control of the WIPO. In 1974, WIPO became an integral part of the UN to help nations
develop multilateral norms governing IP, national legislation and finally provide a platform
fo egotiati g i te atio al t eaties. Ho e e , WIPO ope ated u de the sa e o st ai ts
as its predecessor agreements. That is while some members of WIPO attempted to press for
effective minimum standards for IP protection, there was within the organization
considerable resistance to these attempts as well. Neither was WIPO endowed with an
effective mechanism to enable it to enforce what minimum provisions its membership was
a le to ag ee to ‘ a
. I fa t, the i ade ua ies of the WIPO have finally led to the
birth of the TRIPS.
The o lusio of T‘IP“ ep ese ts a e olutio i the histo of IP p ote tio . B
establishing a universal, comprehensive, and legally binding set of substantive, minimum IP
standards, TRIPS both strengthens and supplements the earlier patchwork of international
IP agreements (Okediji 2003: 315-85). Thus the primary function of this agreement is to
establish and enforce the basic minimum standards and protection for IP across the world.
But it is very clear that the agreement was not aimed to bring harmonization of IPRs
because the signatory nations of the WTO have all the freedom to devise their own national
egi es fo p ote tio of IP‘s e e
hat has ee p o ided u de it. It does e ui e that
nations adhere to the main provisions of the Paris and Berne Conventions while calling for
othi g that de ogates atio s o ligatio s to o e a othe u de those ag ee e ts. Thus
for example the basic principles of national treatment and the most favoured nation are
st o gl e sh i ed i the T‘IP“ Ag ee e t ‘i ha ds
: .
Though the TRIPS Agreement has generated fresh controversies between the developed and
the developing nations, yet the controversies related to IPR are considered age old. Thus
the de ates between developed and the developing countries over TRIPS reflect tensions
that inhere in the provisions of IP rights and which have accompanied IP regulation since its
i eptio Dee e
: . I fa t, the o igi s of fo al IP p ote tio ould e t aced back
th
to 15 century Venice when the first patents were issued and to the late 17 th century
E gla d esta lished the fou datio fo fi st op ight la s. D ahos o e tl otes, T‘IP“
works the global phase in the evolution of intellectual property law aki g . The poli
makers across the world have to brainstorm how they will secure their national resources
and best utilize them on the face of an irreversible global IP regime. The TRIPS Agreement
represents a quintessential breaking point and a touchstone for locating the regime
dynamics in the new international intellectual property order (Oguamanam 2012: 64). As
K a se ad o ates that i te atio al IP egi es efle t sets of i pli it o e pli it p i iples,
norms, rules, and decision making procedures a ou d hi h a to s e pe tatio s o e ge
in a given area of international relations (1983: 2). It is the states which play a crucial role in
113
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
devising the international regimes and accordingly they change them in course of time to
suit their interests.
“i e Wo ld Wa II, the U“ has ee
aki g a d eaki g egi es as it suits its atio al a d
i te atio al i te ests, a d the ideatio al eliefs K a se
: . Toda as at the ti e of
fi st effo ts to ake p ope t out of k o ledge IP la
aki g is a politi al p o ess i
which particular conceptions of rights and duties are institutionalized; each settlement
p o pts e disputes, poli shifts, a d e disputes agai Ma a d “ell
. Thus, the
historic initiative taken by the WTO to globalize the IP rights so that innovation and
development can go hand in hand, has brought forward a long standing and much bitter
st uggle et ee the de eloped a d the de elopi g atio s. Ma otes that si e the late
1800s, developed countries worked to develop, strengthen, and harmonize international IP
la s a d to i te atio alize IP p ote tio
;
. G aduall , f o
ilate al
arrangements, the first multilateral IP arrangements emerged. To administer these treaties,
governments created an international secretariat which ultimately became the WIPO.
Overtime, a global IP system emerged, comprising a dynamic set of national, regional, and
multinational legal institutions. By the mid-1980s, there were some eighteen international
IP treaties (covering topics from patents, trademarks and geographic indications to
i dust ial desig s , ost of hi h e e ad i iste ed
WIPO Dee e
: . It has ee
observed that because of loose enforcement mechanisms or flexibilities inherent in TRIPS,
the WTO members have the opportunity to exercise discretion over the level and form of IP
protection largely within their respective borders.
It is worth mentioning that in the 20 th and in the beginning of the 21st centuries, we have
it essed A e i a s eo-liberal market economy model which is mainly driven by
i fo atio te h olog . A d IP‘ as the eed of the hou to e ou age, p ote t a d
enforce the new innovation in various fields made in the US and in Europe, particularly in
developing countries. Therefore, the inclusion of IP into a more encompassing WTO was
nothing but to promote and establish the market-oriented neoliberal economic rules in new
horizons. Though many developing countries (including India) initially opposed, but they had
to crumble down to the U“ p essu e a d ot o l e e the lu ed the a ot of a ess to
the largest markets in the world, they were also faced with the stick of coercive crippling
sa tio s u de the U“ e t ade egi e headed
the offi e of the U“ T ade
Representative (UST‘ D ahos a d B aith aite
; ‘ei h a
. E e the less
developed countries were promised some respite from US-led bilateral pressure if a uniform
o p ehe si e ultilate al egi e o IP ould e put i pla e ‘ei h a
.
In fact, the TRIPS system wanted to resolve the issue of rule diversity that badly damaged
the i stitutio al e ha is of WIPO. As Ogua a a
otes, It sets out a glo al IP s ste
that covers all regimes of IP with binding, albeit minimum, substance content and
incorporated
efe e e the ag ee e ts ad i iste ed
the WIPO. U de T‘IP“ state s
obligations to protect IP are no longer optional, neither is there any crippling ambivalence
ega di g the su sta ti e o te t of the i te atio al IP egi e o the e te t of state s
commitment to them. Accession to the TRIPS Agreement is automatic and compulsory for
all members of the WTO, thus a more streamlined membership register, in contrast to the
confusion with the WIPO-administered treaties (2012: 65). Also he argues that TRIPS draws
in the resolution of IP disputes among the WTO member states, into the hard-edged WTO
114
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
binding dispute settlement system which incorporates retaliatory trade sanctions for erring
states. This is a sharp contrast to the pre-existing WIPO mechanism in which the
International Court of Justice (ICJ) had jurisdiction over the IP disputes emanating from the
WIPO administered treaties-a jurisdiction that was never exercised. So with this, the TRIPS
introduced a system seemed to be more rigorous, complete and restricted in comparison to
the WIPO s ste . Its o e size fits all glo al egi e of IP Dutfield
has e te ded
patents and all IPRs widely to each area of technology and creativity with very little
discrimination.
Article 7 of the TRIPS Agreement hi h is headed o je ti es states that The p ote tio
and enforcement of IPRs should contribute to the promotion of technological innovation
and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers
and users of technical knowledge and in a manner conducive to the social and economic
elfa e… Blake
. But he
e e a i e the e a it of this p o ise, e a ha e
negative outpours coming in from across the developing nations particularly as a result of
the implementation of the TRIPS.
Developing countries were never involved in the making of international IP treaties during
the olo ial pe iod. O l i the post-colonial era did distinct developing country concerns
about international IP regulation emerge culminating in their fight for a New International
Economic Order (NIEO) and a North-South stand off on reform of the international IP system
in the 1970s and 1980s (Patel et al. 2001).
‘i ha ds
st o gl a gue that the T‘IP“ Ag ee e t is ot i the est social welfare
interest of the poor countries and that its effective imposition on them by the rich countries
has far more to do with the exercise of real political and economic power than it does with
the positi e e o o i e efits the Ag ee e t s suppo te s lai it a deli e . Agai
throughout the TRIPS negotiations, development economists and legal experts debated
evidence regarding the relationship between IP and development (Correa 2000; Watal
2001). But the IP proponents argue that stronger IP protection would encourage foreign
direct investment (FDI), innovation and technology transfer, and spur the development of
national cultural and creative industries. In the face of growing trade in counterfeit
medicines and other products, proponents presented stronger IP protection as a way to
help protect public health and safety (Deere 2011: 9). In reality, it seems developing nations
a difficult time to upgrade their nascent IP regimes to gear up to accept and adjust with one
of the most modern IPR regime b ought out
the T‘IP“. The efo e, i thei detailed
enunciation, these changes (by the TRIPS Agreement) represent a marked strengthening of
su sta ti e IP sta da ds i a di e tio adi all opposed to the so ial i te est se siti ities
of developing countries and their economic sovereignty guaranteed under the pre-TRIPS
framework. Consequently, the entrance of the TRIPS into the global IP equation has yielded
a culture of disaffection against the agreement by developing countries akin to one that
prevailed against the (pre-T‘IP“ WIPO f a e o k
de eloped ou t ies Ogua a a
2006).
But even before IPRs became trade related, the WIPO was very successful in helping
developing nations making their IP laws. The assumption of the relationship between IPRs
and economic development is generally accepted as an article of faith. For example an
115
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
entire division of WIPO is concerned with cooperation for development (Pugatch ed. 2006:
19). The United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) which became
representative of the views of developing countries has produced a number of studies
calling for the improvement of the ways in which patent and trademarks laws operate in the
transfer of technology (UNCTAD 1975 and 1981). A number these issues and other vital
omissions in the TRIPS, like non-accommodation of indigenous or traditional knowledge,
se iousl u de i es the Ag ee e t s so ial i te est defi it phe o e o . I the postTRIPS, less developed countries became quickly frustrated with the failure of the US and its
European allies to deliver on the promised carrot i.e. the opening of their markets to less
developed countries, especially in regard to access to agricultural produce, textile and other
export opportunities in foreign markets, including reductions in agricultural subsidies and
concessions on imports of tropical products (Abbott 1989; Correa and Musungu 2002: 2).
Another disturbing trend was the unilateral trade sanctions imposed by the US despite its
repeated assurances on developing nations, in fact helped in mobilizing them against the
hidden agenda of the TRIPS. It has been observed that for the poorest nations, the promised
potential return of higher IP protection remained a distant reality because of serious hurdles
they faced at ho e. Agai to ad i iste a d e fo e IP efo s u de take to i ple e t
TRIPS , developing countries faced the cost of financing and enhancing relevant government
agencies and the opportunity cost of employing scarce human capital to administer IP rules
in the face of more pressing social challenges (Finger and Schuler 2000). This was an extra
burden on already cash trapped nations and on the other hand, developed countries were
fast in implementing the TRIPS requirements which directly put the formers cart behind the
latte . The efo e the laggi g ehi d phe o e o of the de elopi g atio s altogethe has
been once again accelerated by the TRIPS with the full support of the global capitalist forces.
Fu the Fi ge a d “ hule poi ts out that to i ple e t TRIPS, most developing countries
needed to develop or import the relevant legal expertise and depended on external
assista e to su ou t the o side a le fi a ial, te h i al a d i stitutio al halle ges.
These issues have fully raised an anti-TRIPS banner on many provisions of the Agreement
and NGOs, Civil Society Organizations (CSO) policy think tanks have highlighted and expose
them around the world.
Many scholars identified the negative effects of implementing the patent system already
prevailed, o developing countries. These negative effects are:
a. The high direct and compliance costs of the system which acts as a deadweight to
the innovative process by distracting resources from more useful activities.
b. The occurrence of restrictive practices in patent licensing which has the effect of
dampening the already small domestic industrial R and D efforts.
c. Patent monopolies imply higher prices for consumers and industry as well as
distortions in the allocation of resources.
d. The mystique of patent system can distract attention from the more important
phases of the innovative process such as development and marketing (Manderville
et al. 1982).
In 2002, the World Bank estimated that TRIPS implementation would generate net losses for
Brazil of US $ 530 million, for China of US $ 5.1 billion, for India of US $ 903 million, and for
116
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
the Republic of Korea of US $ 15.3 billion. These all raised an alarm in the fairness displayed
by the TRIPS Agreement.
Finally critics warned that while stronger IP promotion might foster positive outcomes, but
this would surely require the right conditions, carefully tailored policies and laws, and a
range of complementary measures. Some of them emphasized that these same IP rules
could also slow down industrial development by constraining opportunities to copy and
adapt technologies (Fink and Maskus 2005).
Changing Global Governance of IP: Challenges for Developing Countries
There was striking diversity in the approach that developing nations took towards the
implementation of the TRIPS i thei as e t IP s ste . Most ota l de elopi g ou t ies
took varying advantage of the legal safeguards, options, and ambiguities in TRIPS, now
o
o l efe ed to as the T‘IP“ fle i ilities Dee e
. This suggests that ot all
developing nations were unhappy with the implementation of the TRIPS. In fact many of
them came up with much higher IP standards than what was prescribed in the TRIPS
provisions. And some of them could not implement the provisions in time and repeatedly
asked for more time to do so. Though they tried to adjust with the new international IP
standards, yet their approaches varied widely across the developing world. This has
significantly obstructed the goal of achieving the international harmonization of IP
standards as prescribed in the TRIPS Agreement. Developed countries prompted the
egotiatio of T‘IP“
ad a i g the idea that IP p ote tio
ould help de elopi g
countries attract FDI, promote technology transfer, stimulate domestic innovation, and
increase their global o petiti e ess ‘ a
.
However, practically speaking, developing countries have to counter unilateral pressures
and sanctions from US, massive overhauling of their IP administration, finance mobilization,
domestic political and industry pressures etc. to implement this agreement. One of most
significant issue concerning developing countries is the access to essential medicines at
affordable prices in the post-TRIPS era because of the introduction of the product patent
element in the agreement. This has gi e a f ee ha d to the MNC s i the health se to to
dictate terms in the manufacturing of essential medicines though national governments
have measures to control the same. Therefore, many scholars are of the opinion that TRIPS
is coercive by nature in contradiction to what its proponents claim the internally adopted
strong IP measures would benefit the member countries. These critics stipulate that TRIPS in
futu e a e o e o e of the ost effe ti e ehi les of este i pe ialis i histo
(Hamilton 1996). The updated IP rules and standards were supposed to enhance the price of
seeds, medicines, and educational materials, which many countries in the developing world
normally import. In this regard, critics like Tansey and Rajotte eds. (2008) a gues that IP
rules that circumscribe the ability of farmers to save and share seeds could pose threats to
glo al food se u it a d the li elihoods of the o ld s illio plus s all s ale fa e s . I
fact, it was highly realized that the developing and the LDC s a ot full a hie e the
benefits of international IP regime launched by the TRIPS. Because, it was found that
o lusio s to the o t a ig o e dist i utio al ealities: e e s diffe i te s of thei
levels of wealth, economic structures, technological capabilities, political systems and
cultural traditions. They have different needs and aspirations and require different
i telle tual p ope t s ste s Yu
. “o, a u ifo
IP pa kage de ised
the T‘IP“
117
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Agreement would create a kind of western hegemonic structure over the developing and
the LDCs across the world.
Again, it is strongly felt that the North-South technological gap has continued to grow since
the adoption of the Agreement. Fears that the enhanced protection given to IPRs will not
effectively promote the development process, but limit instead the access to technology,
ha e ee oi ed
a de elopi g ou t ies Co ea . The efo e a e pe ts like
Ha a d e o o ist “a hs a ed that poo ill e ipped off u less so e sense and equity
a e i t odu ed i to this u a p o ess.
The developing countries have been facing numerous problems when it comes to the
implementation of the TRIPS Agreement. The first of these is weak institutional, technical
and financial capacity. The second is the political process of IP decision making in developing
countries (Deere). Most of the IP offices in developing countries are armed with various
powers, but the officials often take an indifferent attitude towards IP experts. It has also
been observed that the strength of IP offices is often consolidated by limited coordination
on IP decision making and policy making across government ministries, either with respect
to internal IP issues or with respect to positions taken in international forums (ibid). It is
found that most of these IP offices are financed through fees paid by foreign applicants,
external donors, IP offices of developed countries and WIPO. Hence, they need to rely on
them heavily and hardly implement required IP reforms in time and in the interest of their
development.
Again, lack of political attention and coordination in national capitals of developing
countries is a major problem. Therefore, there is an urgent need to make IP policy making
processes that can easily map and oo di ate i ist ies, i il so iet o ga izatio s, NGO s,
research community and all international agencies and relevant offices efficiently.
Concluding Remarks
The author would argue that instead of automatically agreeing or adopting the US or EU
interpretations of some of the vital provisions of the TRIPS or any other global compact
ha i g di e t i pa t o the de elopi g atio s, it ould e ette fo ou t ies to aft
their rights, exceptions and limitations as they see fit, as long as their interpretations of
these a e o siste t ith thei i te atio al o ligatio s Dutfield a d “uthe sa e
: .
Thus, the legitimacy and effectiveness of the TRIPS is highly questionable in regard to its
implementation in developing nations. Even free trade advocates like Wolf (2005: 217)
clearly exposes the hypocrisy of TRIPS and outlines it as rent extraction device for many
developing countries, with potentially devastating effects on education, public health, and
economic development. It has been observed that even those nations who were supposed
to gain the most out of TRIPS implementation, has witnessed the benefits moving towards
only a particular section of their society.
Archibugi and Filippetti (2010: 144) argue that the eal i e s f o T‘IP“ a e not
ad a ed ou t ies, ut athe the la ge o po atio s that p essed fo its adoptio .
Therefore, TRIPS has failed to provide what it has outlined in its broad spectrum of goals
and objectives. Primarily its one size fits all agenda cannot be accepted as a solution to all
the ills of developed and developing countries in regard to IP protection and enforcement.
118
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
I
i
the lo g u the too u h e phasis o p i ate ights a e e se e to i hi it
o atio a d sp ead of k o ledge i de eloped ou t ies… Hesse 2002).
This work would strongly urge the developing nations to reconfigure their demands,
p io ities a d i te atio al o ligatio s o the fast g o i g s hola ship hi h lai s that i
a othe e a, a atio s ost alua le assets e e its atu al esources-coal, say, or amber
st
a es of g ai …….i the i fo atio e o o
of the
century, the most priceless
esou e is ofte a idea, alo g ith the ight to p ofit f o it Ka te
.
References
Archibugi, D. and Filippetti, A. 2010. The Globalization of Intellectual Property Rights: Four
Learned Lessons and Four Theses, Global Policy, 1, 2, 137-149.
Blakeney, M. (1996). Trade Related aspects of Intellectual Property Rights: A Concise Guide
to the TRIPS Agreement, Sweet and Maxwell, London.
Braithwaite, J. and Drahos, P. (2000). Global Business Regulation, Cambridge University
Press, New York.
CGG. 1995b. Our Global Neighbourhood: The Report of the Commission on Global
Governance, Oxford University Press, New York.
Commission on Global Governance (CGG). 1995a. Issues in Global Governance: Papers
written for the Commission on Global Governance, Kluwer Law International,
London.
Correa, C. (2000). IPRs, the WTO and Developing Countries: The TRIPS Agreement and Policy
Options, Third World Network, Penang, Malaysia.
Correa, C. Review of the TRIPS Agreement: Fostering the Transfer of Technology to
Developing Countries, http://www.twnside.org.sg/title/foster.htm.
Deere, Carolyn. (2011). The Implementation Game, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Deere, Carolyn. The Politics of IP Reform in Developing Countries,
http://ssrn.com/abstract=1325044.
Drahos, P. The Universality of Intellectual Property: Origins and Development, Geneva,
WIPO.
http.//www.wipo.int/tk/en/hr/paneldiscussion/papers/drahossummary.html.
Drahos, P. and Braithwaite, J. (2004). Hegemony Based on Knowledge: The Role of
Intellectual Property, Law in Context 21: 204.
Dutfield, Graham and Suthersanen, Uma. (2008). Global Intellectual Property Law, Edward
Elgar, UK and USA.
Fink, C. and Maskus, K. eds. (2005). IP and Development: Lessons From Recent Economic
Research, World Bank and Oxford University Press, Washington DC.
Ha ilto , Ma i A.
. The T‘IP“ Ag ee e t: I pe ialisti , Outdated a d
O e p ote ti e,
. Va d Jou al of T a s atio al Law. Also see: Ruth L. Gana.
. Has C eati it Died i the Thi d Wo ld? “o e I pli atio s of the
I te atio alizatio of IP , De e Jou al of I te atio al La a d Poli
.
Helfer, L. R. (2004). Regime Shifting: The TRIPS Agreement and New Dynamics of
International IP Law Making, Yale Journal International Law 29: 1.
Helfer, L. R. (2009). Regime Shifting in International IP System, Perspectives on Politics 7: 39.
Hesse, C. 2002. The Rise of Intellectual Property, 700 B. C.- A. D. 2000: An Idea in the
Balance, Daedalus, Spring 2002, 26-45.
119
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Kanter, J. (2005). A New Battlefield: Ownership of Ideas, International Herald Tribune,
October 3.
Kranser, S. D. (1983). International Regimes, Cornell University Press, Ithaca, New York.
Kranser, S. D. (2009). Power, The State and Sovereignty: Essays on International Relations,
Routledge, London and New York.
Lake, David A. (1999). Global Governance in Assem Prakash and Jeffrey A. Hart ed.
Globalization and Governance, Routledge, London and New York.
May, C. (2000). A Global Political Economy of IPRs: The New Enclosures? Routledge, London.
May, c. (2002). The Information Society: A Sceptical View, Polity Press, London.
May, C. and Sell, S. (2005). Intellectual Property Rights: A Critical History, Lynne Rienner
Publishers, Boulder.
Ogua a a , Chidi.
. ‘egi e Te sio i the IP A e a: Fa e s ‘ights a d Post-TRIPS
Counter Regime Trends, Dalhousie Law Journal 29: 413.
Oguamanam, Chidi. (2012). Intellectual Property in Global Governance, Routledge, London
and New York.
Okediji, R. (2003). The International Relations of Intellectual Property: Narratives of
Developing Country Participation in the Global Intellectual Property System,
Singapore Journal of International and Comparative Law, 7, 2: 315-85.
Patel, S., Roffe, P., and Yousuf, A. (2001). International Technology Transfer: The Origins and
Aftermath of the UN Negotiations on a Draft Code of Conduct, Kluwer Law Journal,
The Hague and London.
Reichman, J. H. (2000). The TRIPS Agreement Comes of Age: Conflict or Cooperation with
Developing Countries? Case Western Reserve Journal of International Law 32: 441.
Richards, Donald G. (2004). Intellectual Property Rights and Global Capitalism, M. E. Sharpe,
New York and London.
Ryan, Michael P. (1998). Knowledge Diplomacy: Global Capitalism and the Politics of
Intellectual Property Rights, Brookings Institute, Washington DC.
Sell, S. K. (2004). The Question for Global Governance in Intellectual Property and Public
Health: Structural Discursive and Institutional, Temple Law Review 77: 363.
Tansey G. and Rajotte, T. eds. 2008. The Future Control of Food. London: Earthscan.
Watal, Jayashree. (2009). Intellectual Property Rights, Oxford University, New Delhi.
Wolf, Martin. 2005. Why Globalization Works. Yale University Press. London
World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Proposal by Argentina and Brazil for the
Establishment of a Development Agenda for WIPO in Document, WIPO Doc.
WO/GA/31/11, August 24, 2004; also see WIPO, Report on the Thirty first (15 th
Extraordinary) Session in Document, WIPO Doc. WO/GA/31/15, 33-7, October 5,
2004. This proposal was joined by 12 other member states of WIPO: Bolivia, Cuba,
Dominican Republic, Ecuador, Egypt, Iran, Kenya, Peru, Sierra Leone, South Africa,
Tanzania and Venezuela.
Yu, Pete K.
. Fou Co
o Mis o eptio s a out Cop ight Pi a . . Lo ola
International and Comparative Law Journal 127
120
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Implication of TISA on Trade of Services
Harish K Raman
Symbiosis Law School, Pune
Abstract
The pluri-lateral negotiations on a Trade in Services Agreement (TISA) have attracted much
attention in trade policy circles. Policy and economic implications are intensely debated
given the number and economic importance of participants. This paper aims to provide
insights into the market access issues arising in such negotiations. TISA market access
commitments would go well beyond GATS commitments and services offers tabled in the
Doha Round. Further, and more importantly, exchanging 'best PTA' commitments would not
meet the participants' most important export interests. An introduction has been given to
explain what TISA is basically. The importance of services has been discussed. The basic
reason of emergence has also been brought to light. Membership of TISA, its dynamics and
implications has been dealt with. The objectives of this agreement have also been outlined.
Further main elements of the agreement have also been brought to light. Moreover the
architecture has also been looked into. Multi-lateralisation and its effect have been
discussed. Lastly, entry of China and its implications on the world have been seen. Some
recommendations and conclusion on the state of this agreement has also been mentioned.
Keywords: Trade in Services Agreement (TISA), International Trade Agreements and
Negotiations, Preferential Trade Agreements (PTAs)
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
The Trade in Services Agreement (TISA) is the most promising opportunity in two decades to
improve and expand trade in services. Initiated by the United States and Australia, the TISA
is currently being negotiated in Geneva, Switzerland with 50 participants that represent 70
percent of the world's trade in services. The last major services agreement, the General
Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS) was established by the World Trade Organization
(WTO) in 1995. Since then, the world has evolved dramatically from the result of
technological advances, changing business practices, and deeper global integration. The
TISA can establish new market access commitments and universal rules that reflect 21st
century trade.
Australia has a strong interest in progressing services trade reform, both in terms of
improved services market access commitments and as a way to generate momentum in
multilateral negotiations more broadly. The services sector accounts for around 70 per cent
of Aust alia s e o o i a ti it , e plo s fou out of fi e Australians and plays an important
ole i i te atio al t ade, a ou ti g fo a ou d pe e t of Aust alia s total e po ts.
121
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The Importance of Services
The services sector is the world's largest employer, and produces 70 percent of global gross
domestic product (GDP). In the United States, services generate more than 75 percent of
the national economic output and provide 80 percent of private sector jobs. According to
the U.S. Office of the Trade Representative, if U.S. business services achieved the same
export potential as U.S. manufactured goods, then U.S. exports as a whole could increase by
$800 billion.
The TISA has the opportunity to address major and fundamental barriers to trade in services
affecting the United States and the globe. Some barriers to services trade include limited
movement of data across borders, unfair competition from state-owned enterprises, lack of
transparency and need for due process of law, and forced local ownership and
discrimination in obtaining business licenses and permits.
Basic Reason of Emergence
In order to overcome the stalemate of the Doha negotiations, at the 8th Ministerial
Conference of the WTO in December 2011, Ministers acknowledged the impasse and issued
"elements for political guidance" providing for a o
it e t " … to ad a e egotiatio s,
where progress can be achieved, including focusing on the elements of the Doha
Declaration that allow Members to reach provisional or definitive agreements based on
consensus earlier than the full conclusion of the si gle u de taki g. … Mi iste s e og ise
that Members need to fully explore different negotiation approaches while respecting the
principles of transparency and inclusiveness." In that spirit, WTO members advanced
negotiations in the area of trade facilitation and certain other areas. Also, certain WTO
members led by the USA and Australia started floating the idea of a stand-alone agreement
on trade in services to advance the DDA negotiations amongst the willing WTO members.
The group of countries potentially participating in the negotiations on the Trade in Services
Agreement for which data are available represent a very substantial share of EU exports and
imports of commercial services: 58% of EU exports and 59% of EU imports. The overall
average figures are however mostly determined by a sub-set of countries as the USA,
Switzerland, Japan, Norway, Australia and Canada alone represent almost 50% of both EU
exports and EU imports. With the majority of these countries the EU has already signed, is
negotiating or is starting to negotiate ambitious bilateral agreements that include both
goods and services liberalisation.
However, there is also a group of countries with which either the EU has agreements where
services commitments could be deepened (e.g. Mexico and Chile) or has no FTA including a
services chapter (Australia, New Zealand, Pakistan, Switzerland, Paraguay, Taiwan and
Turkey). These countries together represent at least 22% of EU exports and more than 20%
of EU imports of commercial services, which amount to 123 and 90 billion Euros
respectively. It is noted that the EU is also an important trading partner for these countries.
This is not only the case for smaller countries, but the EU27 represents e.g. for the US 32%
of its export and 34% of its imports of commercial services.
122
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Membership
Since discussions began, participation in the TISA has expanded from 16 to 23 parties, with
the European Union representing its 28 Member States, for a total of 50 WTO Members. As
of September 2013, participants in the TISA include Australia, Canada, Chile, Chinese Taipei
(Taiwan), Colombia, Costa Rica, European Union1, Hong Kong, Iceland, Israel, Japan,
Liechtenstein, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway, Pakistan, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Republic of
Korea, Switzerland, Turkey, and the United States. It has been reported that China and
Uruguay have formally asked to join the negotiating group.
TISA parties collectively account for around 70 per cent of global trade in services. The
group represents a range of developed and developing economies and will expand to
include other WTO Members as the negotiations progress. China and Uruguay recently
indicated interest in joining the negotiations.
Objectives
TISA parties have agreed on a framework for the negotiation of the high-quality and
comprehensive services-only trade agreement. The objective is to negotiate an agreement
which is compatible with the WTO General Agreement on Trade in Services, will attract
broad participation, and will support and feed back into multilateral trade negotiations. The
TISA will set a new standard in services trade commitments, capturing the progress that has
been made through unilateral liberalisation and in free trade agreements outside the
multilateral system. Many of the current parties already have relatively open services
markets. Locking in existing market access would provide certainty for Australian services
suppliers. As participation continues to expand, the TISA could offer significant additional
benefits, particularly for Australian business if countries from our region join and liberalise
to meet level of ambition.
The TISA negotiations will cover all services sectors. In addition to improved market access
commitments, the negotiations also provide an opportunity to develop new disciplines (or
trade rules) in areas where there has been significant developments since the WTO Uruguay
Round negotiations. There negotiations will cover financial services; ICT services (including
telecommunications and e-commerce); professional services; maritime transport services;
air transport services, competitive delivery services; energy services; temporary entry of
business persons; government procurement; and new rules on domestic regulation to
ensure regulatory settings do not operate as a barrier to trade in services. These
negotiations are still in the early stages but will likely reflect developments in other free
trade agreements.
These have often remained unaddressed in many of the previous bilateral negotiations or
involve countries not currently participating in TISA. Addressing better these export
interests would require going beyond an exchange of 'best PTA' commitments among TISA
pa ti ipa ts − ith the o e diffi ult poli a d egotiati g de isio s that this i plies −
and/or seeking to expand the group of participants. We also discuss the different forms that
such a pluri-lateral agreement may take vis-à-vis the WTO framework.
The dynamism and importance of trade in services contrast sharply with the sluggishness of
WTO negotiations in this area, where the latest serious attempt to move things forward
123
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
dates back to mid-2008, on the occasion of the so-called services 'signalling conference'.
Faced with that state of affairs, and against the background of a proliferation of preferential
trade agreements (PTAs) covering services, a group of WTO Members, the so-called 'Really
Good Friends of Services' (RGFs) agreed on 5 July 2012, to start preparing negotiations on an
International Services Agreement to reinforce and strengthen the global services market.
Discussions on the TISA have been intensive over the last months. They have focused on a
framework of rules (e.g. on data flows, state-owned enterprises) and on the agreement's
liberalization modalities (i.e., negative vs. positive list approach to scheduling commitments,
or a combination of both). Market access negotiations have not yet started in earnest,
though the participants' initial market access offers are scheduled to be submitted in
November. These initial offers are to take the form of a hybrid approach that builds on the
GATS, but that provides for commitments on national treatment to be undertaken for all
service sectors on the basis of a negative list. It has been estimated that the agreement
would offer the European Union a potential EUR 15.6 billion and the United States EUR 10.4
billion (De Micro, 2013).
Main Elements of the Agreement
Although the negotiation of the agreement would be outside of the auspices of the WTO,
the current potential members of the agreement share the understanding that the
agreement should be brought back to the WTO and GATS, when the agreement attracted a
critical mass of WTO-members. The agreement should be ambitious, comprehensive in
scope and commitments taken should reflect in principle as closely as possible the
autonomous level of liberalisation (i.e. binding the existing practice). Also, the negotiation is
aimed at providing for new or improved market access. Moreover, new and enhanced
disciplines should be elaborated on the basis of proposals brought forward by the
participants. Such proposals are expected to be made in the area of domestic regulation
(e.g. authorisation and licensing procedures), international maritime transport services,
Information- a d Co
u i atio Te h olog ICT se i es i ludi g oss-border data
transfers), e-commerce, computer related services, postal and courier services, financial
services, temporary movement of natural persons, government procurement of services,
export subsidies and state-owned enterprises. This list is neither an exhaustive list, nor does
it mean that it was agreed that in all those sectors there will be new and enhanced
disciplines.
Architecture
In terms of architecture of the future agreement, convergence could be found that the
agreement would be based on the GATS, whereby some GATS core articles (inter alia on
definitions, scope, market access and national treatment, general and security exemptions)
would be incorporated. This would ensure a future possible integration of the agreement
into the GATS. There would be additional provisions to govern how each member could take
commitments. There was a general understanding that market access commitments should
be taken as in GATS. In terms of national treatment, the agreement could contain the
possibility to be applied on a horizontal basis to all services sectors and modes of supply.
Exemptions to this horizontal application would the ha e to e listed i the ou t ies
national schedule of commitments. There was also convergence that commitments should
i p i iple efle t the a tual p a ti e sta dstill lause a d that futu e eli i atio of
124
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
discriminatory measures should be automatically locked (so- alled
an exemption is listed.
at het lause
u less
Multi-lateralisation
Unlike in the DDA negotiations, the possible future agreement would for the time being fall
short of the participation of some of the leading emerging economies, notably Brazil, China,
India and the ASEAN countries. It is not desirable that all those countries would reap the
benefits of the possible future agreement without in turn having to contribute to it and to
be bound by its rules. Therefore, the automatic multi-lateralisation of the agreement based
on the MFN principle should be temporarily pushed back as long as there is no critical mass
of WTO members joining the agreement. Such a temporary push back can be achieved by
ensuring that the future agreement fulfils the conditions of an economic integration
agreement as set out in GATS Article V, i.e. the agreement should have substantial sectoral
coverage, provide for the absence or elimination of existing discriminatory measures and/or
the prohibition of new or more discriminatory measures. At the same time, there was a
common understanding to include an accession clause for interested WTO members and to
elaborate a pathway to the multi-lateralisation of the agreement, i.e. the agreement should
define the mechanisms and conditions for subsequent multi-lateralisation.
China at the Door
On the occasion of the visit of the President of the People's Republic of China, Xi Jinping, to
Brussels, the EU announced its strong support for China joining ongoing negotiations to
liberalise trade in services. The EU's position is reflected in the EU-China joint statement
issued at the Summit.
TISA is an initiative open to all WTO members interested in further liberalising trade in
services. Launched in March 2013, the talks currently involve 23 WTO members, although
the negotiations themselves are not being held within the WTO itself due to a lack of
unanimous support among the organisation's membership.
As oted, the e is so e o e that Chi a s a tio s du i g the Information Technology
Agreement (ITA) earlier this year – when Beijing scuppered the talks by asking for too many
products to be exempt from the agreement – might serve as a warning for the TISA and TPP
talks. In other words, letting China join may be an equivalent of opening up the city gates to
a giant wooden horse, left as a gift by the Greeks.
Such fears may have been at least partially allayed this week when China agreed to
compromise on its ITA exclusion list, paving the way for the talks to resume sometime in the
next few weeks, possibly by the end of October. Of course, we still cannot be sure whether
the Chinese compromise is sufficient enough to allow the talks to get earnestly underway,
but presumably Beijing is aware of what would be considered reasonable by the other
negotiating partners.
In what could be further good news, depe di g o Beiji g s ulti ate i te tio s, alongside
its announcement on the ITA compromise, Beijing also formally requested to join the Trade
in Services Agreement (TISA) negotiations.
125
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Obama may not have made it to Bali, but China took the opportunity to assure other
negotiating partners, as well as the U.S. officials present in Indonesia, that it would not be
atte pti g the T oja Ho se Optio po de ed
Pacific Money in September. As of the
ti e of iti g, the U ited “tates has still ot p ese ted Chi a s e uest to joi the TI“A
talks to the other members. Whether or not the existing members decided to take China at
its word remains to be seen, so some of the optimism that has met the announcement
should probably tempered for the time being.
China has stated its interest in joining the Trade in Services Agreement (TISA) negotiations,
according to a BNA report. If it formally joins the negotiations, Chi a s pa ti ipatio
ould
add e di e sio a d o ple it to the talks, a d ould o espo d ith Chi a s stated
i te tio to pu sue proactive strategies to st e gthe its se i es sector. The TISA
negotiations, launched in 2013, seek to remove barriers and increase market openings
originally covered in the 1995 General Trade in Services (GATS) agreement. The TISA
negotiations currently include 50 participants, representing 70 percent of global GDP.
Further, if China does join the TISA other ASEAN countries would also consider joining the
TI“A i
hi h ase % of o ld s “e i es t ade ould e egulated u de TI“A. If this
happens and India remains a non-member it will be the loser in the end. Chi a s
participation in TISA could mean further openings of its services sector for US companies,
particularly given renewed negotiations of a US-China bilateral investment treaty, which
China has agreed to negotiate on the basis of pre-establishment national treatment. China
has already acknowledged that this approach will mean the elimination of its Catalogue
Guiding Foreign Investment in Industry, which details restrictions on foreign investors in
both the services and manufacturing sectors.
Conclusion
As far as services are concerned, the TISA is the single most significant development to have
emerged in the trade negotiating arena over the last couple of years. As such, it may have
wide – and unpredictable at this stage – implications for the multilateral trading system. In
its current format, TISA negotiations cover almost 70% of world services trade, and include
major trading partners, such as Canada, the EU, Japan, the Republic of Korea and the United
States. For some – if not all – of these trading partners, TISA represents major export
opportunities. For example, almost 80% of US exports and 90% of US imports through
commercial presence would be covered by this agreement. Still, this seemingly bright
picture gets more nuanced when we look in detail at the composition of TISA. First, many of
the trading partners involved in TISA negotiations have already extensive links with each
other through bilateral or plurilateral PTAs. The second striking feature of TISA – as it
currently stands – is the absence of some of the most dynamic emerging market economies,
including Brazil, China, India, South Africa and ASEAN countries.
The recent expression of interest by China to join the negotiations – which may also incite
others – can change this nuanced picture and instil a different dynamic to this project. TISA
participants, as well as their constituencies, are certainly allowed to have high expectations
on the outcome of these negotiations. An analysis of past PTA negotiations shows that
extending each country's 'best PTA' commitments to all other TISA participants, coupled
with a similar level of commitment by newcomers to preferential negotiations, would
126
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
already be a significant outcome when compared to the levels of bindings achieved in the
GATS.
If TISA is to better address participants' key areas of export interest, a first scenario is that
participants go beyond what they have so far agreed to do in their pre-existing PTAs. In
various cases, this would involve difficult political and trade policy choices. Whether a
'services-only' agreement would provide sufficient trade-off options to facilitate such
decisions remains to be seen. A second scenario involves expanding the number of
participants to the negotiations. While this increases the likelihood that key export interests
be addressed, this may also have an impact on the negotiating dynamic, as new entrants
(e.g., developing economies that were not part of the 'Really Good Friends') bring their own
different negotiating interests. And should the number of participants expand significantly,
this may further raise questions regarding the link to, and impact on, the WTO services
negotiations.
End-notes
European Union includes: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Croatia, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,
Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom
1
References
1. Adlung, Rudolf and Hamid Mamdouh (2013), "How to Design Trade Agreements in
Services? Top Down or Bottom Up?", WTO Staff Working Paper, ERSD-13-08.
2. De Micco, Pasquale (2013), "The Plurilateral Agreement on Services: at the starting
gate", Policy Briefing, EU Directorate-General for External Policies, Policy Department,
DG EXPO/B/PolDep/Note/2013_57 February 2013. Available at:
http://libraryeuroparl.wordpress.com/2013/03/01/international-services-agreementtowards-anew-plurilateral-trade-agreemeent/
3. Escaith, Hubert (2013), "Measuring Trade in Goods and Services", International Trade
Forum, Issue 1.
4. Eichengreen, Barry and Poonam Gupta (2011), "The two waves of service-sector
growth", Oxford Economic Papers.
5. Hoekman, Bernard. (1996), "Assessing the General Agreement on Trade in Services", in
Martin and Winters (eds.), The Uruguay Round and Developing Countries, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
6. Hufbauer, Gary Clyde, J. Bradford Jensen and Sherry Stephenson (2012), "Framework for
the International Services Agreement", Peterson Institute for International Economics,
Policy Brief, no. PB-12-10.
7. Marchetti, Juan and Martin Roy (2008), "Services Liberalization in the WTO and in PTAs",
in J. Marchetti M. Roy (eds) , Opening Markets for Trade in Services; Countries and
Sectors in Bilateral and WTO Negotiations, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press and
WTO.
8. Marchetti, Juan, Martin Roy and Laura Zoratto (2012), "Is There Reciprocity in
Preferential Trade Agreements on Services?", WTO Staff Working Paper, ERSD-2012-16,
October.
127
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
9. National Board of Trade (2013), "Global Value Chains and Services: An Introduction",
Stockholm, Sweden.
10. The Trade in Services Agreement ('TiSA'), European Union, Retrieved From
http://trade.ec.europa.eu/doclib/docs/2013/june/tradoc_151374.pdf
11. Trade in Services Agreement (TiSA), Australian Government, Department of Foreign
Affairs and Trade, Retreived From
https://www.dfat.gov.au/trade/negotiations/services/trade-in-services-agreement.html
12. Sauve, Pierre. A Plurilateral Agenda for Services? Assessing the case for a Trade in
Services Agreement (TISA). Working Paper No 2013/29| May 2013, nccr trade
regulation. retrieved from http://www.wti.org/fileadmin/user_upload/nccrtrade.ch/wp2/publications/TISA_P_Sauve.pdf
13. Marchetti,Juan A. & Roy, Martin. THE TISA INITIATIVE: AN OVERVIEW OF MARKET
ACCESS ISSUES. (2013, November 27). World Trade Organization, Economic Research
and Statistics Division, Staff Working Paper ERSD-2013-11. Retrieved From
http://www.wto.org/english/res_e/reser_e/ersd201311_e.pdf
14. TISA: Trade in Services Agreement, Public Information Session and Discussion. (2014,
April 30). International Centre For Trade and Sustainable Development. Retrieved From
http://www.ictsd.org/downloads/2014/04/tisa_background1.pdf
15. TISA Members Hold First Review of Market Access Offers. (2014, February 27).
International Centre For Trade and Sustainable Development, SERVICES BRIDGES,
VOLUME18-NUMBER7.
16. Readout of Trade in Services Agreement (TISA) negotiations. Office of the United States
Trade Representative. Retrieved From http://www.ustr.gov/about-us/pressoffice/press-releases/2013/November/readout-Trade-In-Services-AgreementNegotiations
17. Trade in Services Agreement (TISA). Foreign Affairs, Trade and Development Canada.
Retrieved From http://www.international.gc.ca/trade-agreements-accordscommerciaux/topics-domaines/services/tisa-acs.aspx?lang=eng
18. Public Services International brief on the Trade in Services Agreement (TISA). Retrieved
From http://www.worldpsi.org/sites/default/files/documents/research/en_psi_tisa_policy_brief_july_2013_fina
l_web.pdf
128
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Politics and Economics of Mining in Goa
Sebastiao Anthony Rodrigues
Department of Humanities and Social Sciences, Birla Institute of Technology and Sciences
(BITS), Pilani – Goa Campus, Vasco-da-Gama
Abstract
Goa is a minerals rich state with iron ore, manganese and bauxite deposits in various parts
of Goa. Mining has been major sources of revenue generation as well as employment
generation. Since colonial days of Portuguese rule it has been the source of revenue to the
state and corporate as well as employment and unemployment to various sectors of society.
Mining industry largely resisted Indian rule in Goa and even succeeded in keeping
Portuguese colonial rule intact till 19th December 1961 when Indian government ordered
Army intervention and got Goa under Indian rule. The paper is based on critical
engagement of the author with mining industry since 2001 soon after China boom led to
steep ise i e po ts of Goa s o e that a ied f o
% to % of I dia s e po t sha e e e
though Goa s Geog aph is just . % of I dia s la d ass. The pape seeks to ide tif so e
key trends of the politics and its response to the increasing resistance to mining industry in
Goa that led to the Shutdown of mining industry after Shah Commission report was
submitted in the Indian Parliament in late 2012.
Key words: Mining, Goa, Water
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
Goa has been the focused Geography of mineral extraction since 1929 when erstwhile
Portuguese colonial state granted first of the 791 mining leases covering over 67,000
hectares of land. Mineral survey was carried on by German geologists in the second decade
of the twentieth century commissioned by the Colonial government. Very soon however the
potential of the mineral extraction noticed and process of granting of mining leases set off
in motion. Portuguese colonial government granted separate mining leases in different
pa ts of Goa s la ds ape as o essio s i pe petuit . These i i g leases o ti ued to e
the key identifier of the leases till 21st April 2014 when Supreme Court declared these leases
as illegal and new policy and process of mineral extraction to be decided by Goa
Government. Between 1929 and 2014 politics and governance took on varied forms and
t e ds ith ou ti g pu li oppositio to i i g i dust . I this pape o d politi s is
denoted as power struggle between various contesting groups. The o d go e a e is
used to refer state attempts to manage these groups either by co-options of groups
opposing mining or by repression by deploying police force and judicial and parliamentary
intervention. Although mining affected local farmers in local mining areas, it never turned
into an issue of any significant opposition at a scale as it has been the case over the past 15
years.
129
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Inception and governance of mining in Goa
Po tuguese olo ial “tate tested Goa s geolog du i g the se o d de ade of the twentieth
century with the expertise from German professionals. The process of survey was
completed with the assessment of mineral deposits in Goa and first time opened out for
private prospecting of underground minerals in 1929. The nature of the mining industry
during colonial times was essentially manual. In fact the industry continued in this manner
till
s he the i dust
e t th ough the p o ess of e ha izatio . The t o t pes of
mining led to spectacular difference in terms of production and its consequences on exports
as well as environmental costs. They all shot up.
The mining prospecting was governed through the colonial regime of type of permissions
known as concessions. They were granted in perpetuity to Concessionaires. This means
legally the posession of the mine would be legally restricted within the family of the one
who was granted these concessions – in perpetuity – automatically transferred to next
generation of the Concessionaire. This is a kind of legal system that came to clash with the
Indian legal system after Goa was made part of India in 1961 as the miners refused to pay
taxes to the Indian government. In couple of cases the miners even won the cases. Gosalia
and Salgaonkar are two examples on this. Supreme Court even observed on 1961 Goa
li e atio i Gosalia ase judg e t that Goa as a e ed th ough o uest . I “algao a
case Bombay High court restrained Indian government in 1985 from treating Portuguese
granted mining Concessions as mining leases as defined under Mines and Minerals Act,
1957; and thereby preventing collection revenue from mining companies.
The governance mechanism of mining industry placed Goa in confrontationist position with
India. Indian Parliament had to pass special law in the Parliament to resolve this imbroglio.
This law came to be known as Goa, Daman and Diu Mining Concessions (Abolition and
Declaration as Mining Leases) Act, 1987 (MMDR). This law received the assent of the
President of India on 23rd May 1987. Section 4 of this Abolition Act abolished mining
concessions and declared that with effect from the 20 th December, 1961, every mining
concession will be deemed to be a mining lease granted under the MMDR Act and
provisions of MMDR Act will apply to such mining lease. Section 5 of the Abolition Act
further provided that the concession holder shall become lease holder under the MMDR Act
in relation to the mines in which the concession relates and the period of such lease was
extended upto six months from the date when Abolition Act recei ed P eside t s asse t, i.e.
upto 22nd November 1987. On 14th October 1987, sub-rules (8) and (9) were inserted in Rule
24A of the Mineral Concessions Rules, 1960 (MC Rules) which deals with renewal of mining
leases in Goa, Daman and Diu. Daman and Diu retained their status as Union Territories
after Goa was granted Statehood on 30th May 1987.
Abolition Act was challenged by mining companies before the Bombay High Court in a writ
petition. The High Court passed interim order permitting the mining companies to carry on
mining operations and mining business in the concessions for which renewal applications
had been filed under Rule 24A of the MC Rules. Subsequently, the High Court held in its
judgment dated 20th June 1997 that the Abolition Act was valid but Section 22(i)(a) of the
Abolition Act would operate prospectively and not retrospectively. The mining companies
that held concessions filed Special leave petition against this judgment of 20 th June 1997. On
2nd March 1998, Supreme Court passed an interim order permitting the concessionaires to
130
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
carry on mining operations and mining business in the mining areas for which renewal
applications have been made on the condition that the lessee pays to the Government dead
rent from the date of commencement of the Abolition Act i.e. 23rd May 1987.
This saga of litigation leaves ample evidence that, mining companies was interested in
retaining their hold over mines in perpetuity and was not interested in accepting Indian laws
to go e Goa s i e al ealth. Co se uently they were compelled to accept Indian laws
fo go e i g Goa s i e al ealth. Mi i g o pa ies su eeded i getti g id of
retrospective application of Abolition Act to the State of Goa. This means that from
December 1961 to May 1987 – for over 25 years - mining companies in Goa did not pay any
rent to the State government or to the National government. This means mining companies
carried on the mining in the State of Goa without paying rent to the State for a quarter of a
century. This is a historical plu de of Goa s i e als that has es aped pu li s uti
hitherto. This act of mining companies is completely anti-national in nature. It is the order of
the Supreme Court in March 1998 that directed mining companies to pay dead rent from
1987 till 1998 for over 10 years and subsequently to accept Indian legal regime over the
go e a e of the Goa s i i g i dust . The politi s of p otest of the i i g o pa ies i
the form of litigation at Bombay High Court and at the Supreme Court of India allowed them
to carry on the mining trade without paying mandatory rents for 25 years from 1961 to
1987. The mining industry prospered. State coffers deprived of revenue under MMDR Act.
Growth and politics of mining industry
The mining industry delayed transition from Concessions to lease, and this transition period
legally came to an end in 1998 with Supreme Court verdict as has been observed in above
section. The transition was not just legal; it was also in terms of speed and technology as
much as transition between styles of governance and Politics of two countries – Portugal
and India in two different continents – Europe and Asia. The pace of growth of mining
industry was rather slow with relatively lesser damage to ecology chiefly due to nonmechanized nature of mining industry. The decade of 1970s saw gradual mechanization of
mining industry in Goa that changed very essence of mining industry. Non-mechanized
mining or hand mining as it was known was restrictive in its pressure to land surface.
Mechanized mining changed all this and pressure extended to below the surface on ground
water sources. This is more so as high powered water pumps were deployed to pump out
ground water in order to make way for extraction of minerals deep below the surface. This
led to depletion of water table and drying up of water bodies such as wells, ponds springs.
Gradually evergreen western ghats mountains turned into deep mining pits in several
villages in Goa. The villages such as Pissurlem, Advalpal, Sirgao are well known examples.
Transition of technology in mining belt of Goa also brought about sporadic protests at the
village level in the decade of 1970s. Village protests were chiefly composed of farmers
whose paddy fields were affected due to mining activities. The protests in the villages of
Mayem and Sirgao were met with deployment of police force and arrest of the protesting
farmers. Protest then died off due to absence of capable leadership that could resist
repression and co-option, and mining companies prospered ripping through water bodies,
paddy fields, dumping overburden topsoil leaving the landscape with deep open craters.
Number of villagers simply made to assent to the will of mining companies by providing
donations to the village temples where in a Brahmin performed religious rites as well as
131
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
held t e e dous i flue e o e the illage a d ide politi al affai s. I dia s age old, ti e
tested caste system helped mining companies to maintain divisive politics to keep unity of
the villagers a distant dream till 2007 when resistance took organized and sophisticated
form.
In this way mining established its sway in Goa. Gradually villages that were strong in
agriculture specially rice cultivation were disrupted and made dependent upon mining
industry for employment. Self-suffi ie
i te s of food a d ate of Goa s illages as
effectively destroyed and simultaneously mining industry prospered. In 1948 while Goa was
still Portuguese colony 100 tonnes of iron ore got exported to Japan. Even since Japan has
been largest desti atio of Goa s i o o e e po ts. Japa s e o o
as i ui s a ou d
that time after nuclear bombing by United States of America during World War II in August
. I po t of Goa s i o o e a d a ga ese fa ilitated eju e atio of Japa ese
economy as u h as it fa ilitated ui i g of Goa s e isti g a d pote tial food a d ate
se u it , polluted a d silted Goa s i e s su h as Kusha ati, Val a ti, Bi holi , a d othe
tributaries of Mandovi and Zuari rivers etc., claimed innumerable lives in terms of road
accidents involving trucks transporting iron ore. Japan however cannot be singled out in this
espe t as afte ea
Goa s e po t to Chi a d a ati all s u g up a ds. As pe
data pu lished
Goa Mi e al O e E po te s Asso iatio , e po t to China for that year
stood at 48,935,697 tonnes to distant second Japan at 3,472,251 tonnes with difference of
nearly 43,000,000 tonnes. Other importers for this year includes South Korea (1,091,828
tonnes), U.A.E (76,900 tonnes), Qatar (25,000 tonnes), Pakistan (83,333 tonnes), Thailand
(69,710 tonnes), Netherlands (484,600 tonnes), Rumania (159,430 tonnes), Italy (26,000
tonnes). Total exports for the year stood at 54,424,849 tonnes.
Stoppage of Mining
While the mining industry performed spectacularly well and crossed 54 million tones in
terms of exports in the year 2010-11 it had to catch up with the trail of corruption,
illegalities and environmental degradation charges besides those of negatively affecting
tribal communities in Goa. Mining industry was accused publicly by various protesting
groups, individuals, politicians, media etc. It was suspected that large scale mining, trade
and transportation was being carried on illegally, without lawful authority especially of iron
ore and manganese ore. It was also suspected large scale failure of the management,
regulatory, monitoring systems that were meant to deter, prevent, detect and punish
offences relating to mining, storage, transportation, trade, and export of such ore, done
illegally, without lawful authority. It was also suspected that official records, including
records relating to land and boundaries has been tempered with to facilitate illegal mining.
It was also suspected that there has been large scale destruction of forest wealth, damage
to the environment, prejudice to the livelihood and other rights of tribal people, ecological
and social damage to forest dwellers and other persons in mined areas has taken place
besides considerable financial losses caused to the Central and State Governments.
In order to investigate into these aspect and also to suggest remedial measures Central
government notified appointment of Justice M.B.Shah Commission under section 3 of the
Commissions of Inquiry Act,1952 on 22nd November 2010. Justice Shah visited Goa and
issued notices under his powers to the concerned authorities and submitted the interim
report to the Ministry of Mines, Union of India on 15 th March 2012. Justice Shah
132
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Commission report was tabled in Parliament along with the Action Taken Report of the
Ministry of Mines on 7th “epte e
. I a olu i ous o k Justi e “hah o se ed It
was apparent that concerned departments of the State and IBM (Indian Bureau of Mines)
ha e failed to o t ol illegal i i g fo the easo s est k o
to the . Fu ther, Report
e o
e ded All i i g a ti ities should e stopped ith i
ediate effe t i ludi g
transportation for all mining leases where there is no approval or clearance of the Standing
Committee of the NBWL and are falling within 10 kms of eco-sensiti e uffe zo e.
Pursuant to this State Government of Goa on 10 th September 2012 passed an order
suspending all mining operations in the State of Goa with effect from 11 th September 2012.
On 14th September 2012, the Ministry of Environment of Union of India directed that all
Environmental Clearances granted to mines in the State of Goa be kept in abeyance. Based
on Shah Commission recommendations Goa Foundation filed Write petition (C) 435 of 2012
as Public Interest Litigation praying for directions to the Union of India and the State of Goa
to take steps to termination of the mining leases of the lessees involved in violation of
Forest Conservation Act, 1980, The Mines and Minerals Act, 1957, the Mineral Concession
Rules, 1960, The Environment Protection Act, 1986, The Water (Prevention and control of
pollution) Act, 1974 and the Air (Prevention and control of pollution) Act, 1981 as well as
Wild life Protection Act, 1972.
On 5th October 2012 Supreme Court issued notice that all mining operations in the leases
identified in the report of Justice Shah Commission and transportation of iron ore and
manganese ore from those leases, whether lying at the mine-head or stockyard shall remain
suspended, as recommended in the report of the Justice Shah Commission. Supreme Court
in its verdict on 21st Ap il
de la ed e ti e i i g i Goa as illegal: the dee ed i i g
leases of the lessees in Goa expired on 22.11.1987 and the maximum of 20 years renewal
period of the deemed mining leases in Goa expired on 22.11.2007 and consequently mining
the lessees afte
. .
as illegal .
The “up e e Cou t fu the di e ted that u til the fi al epo t is su itted
the E pe t
Committee, the State government will, in the interest of sustainable development and
intergenerational equity, permit a maximum annual excavation of 20 million MT from the
i i g leases i the “tate of Goa othe tha f o du ps . It is ho e e ot defi ed as to
what the Supreme Court of India is meant by sustainable development in the context of
mining as every mine is creating the problem of depletion of water table and no sustainable
mining is possible at all.
Conclusion
The position that Supreme Court has arrived at capping at 20 million tones is based on
studies on road conditions for mining carried on by Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad,
Jharkand and it has no relevance to other parameters to refer to sustainability of ecology
and life except in case of road accidents – truly concocted way of looking at sustainability. In
fact Goa government had submitted in the Supreme Court during the course of this case
that capping should be at 45 million tones till the roads are widened and dedicated for
mining purpose. The process of arriving at capping at 20 million tones ignores impacts on
ground water depletion, destruction of forest, effect on public health, serious threats to
agriculture and food security and subsequent social consequences. Only when these
133
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
parameters are taken into consideration it can be termed as sustainable. Otherwise it is
mockery of the word used to cover up what is the opposite of sustainable used only to
create camouflage for mining industry. It must be noted that consequences of mining is
more serious and irreversible than consequences of ban on mining industry in Goa. The
reasons are well documented by Shah Commission Report. Loss of jobs and bank loans are
far less serious consequences than depletion of ground water and creation of ecological
refuge as witnessed in Sirgao and Pissurlem villages. There is need for subjecting the phrase
of sustai a le de elop e t to a deepe s uti as the a “up e e Cou t has deplo ed it
to provide escape route to mining is very dangerous precedent.
References
Goa Foundation Vs Union of India and others, 2014, Supreme Court of India, New Delhi
Justice Shah Commission Report on Goa, 2012, Ministry of Mines, Government of India,
New Delhi
134
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Urban Water Supply: Contestations and
Sustainability Issues in Greater Bangalore
Srihari Hulikal Muralidhar
Department of Humanities and Social Sciences,
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai
Abstract
The move towards privatization of public utilities such as water sector in India, particularly
in the metropolitan areas, has gone hand in hand with the growing gap between demand
and supply of water. With fiscal discipline being the key mantra of successive governments,
cost recovery as a policy goal is prioritized over access to water and sanitation. This paper is
a critical assessment of Greater Bangalore Water and Sanitation Project (GBWASP), which
aims to provide piped water to more than twenty lakh residents in Greater Bangalore. The
implementation of the Karnataka Groundwater Act, 2011, and the debates around it are
also examined in detail. The four main arguments are: huge gap between rhetoric and
ground realities when it comes to the implementation of GBWASP and the Groundwater
Act; the contestations between the elected representatives and bureaucrats have
implications for urban governance; the axes of dispute between the Bangalore Water Supply
and Sewerage Board and citizens have changed over time; the politics of negotiating access
to water also bring questions of sustainability to the fore.
Keywords: Borewell, Privatization, Water
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
The Greater Bangalore Water and Sanitation Project (GBWASP) was launched in 2003 in
Bangalore and is implemented by the Bangalore Water Supply and Sewerage Board
(BWSSB). The project has two components: a water supply one and an underground
drainage one. This paper shall focus on the first. This project represents a watershed in the
histo of Ba galo e s ate politi s i that fo the first time we see a novel structure in
terms of its financing, with the United States Agency for International Development (USAID)
playing a pivotal role in its design. Two distinguishing features of this project are:
a. Beneficiary Capital Contribution BCC, olle ted as GBWA“P ha ges : fo the fi st ti e,
capital contributions were sought from all citizens and business enterprises seeking water
connection to recover the costs of investment beforehand, which ostensibly made them
stakeholde s i the project.
b. Market borrowings: market borrowings are accessed by issuing municipal bonds on
behalf of the urban local bodies (ULBs) involved.
135
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
This shift in the policymaking from the welfarist approach where the state incurred a 100%
of the expe ditu e to a ds a eoli e al st le of go e a e i ol i g espo si ilizatio
whereby the state raises the funds required for the implementation of the project through
market borrowings and upfront financial contribution from the residents is illustrative of the
emphasis of decision makers on market principles of efficiency and cost recovery over
equity and greater accessibility. The underlying notion is the Thatcherian principle that
people ha e to take a e of the sel es; othe ise, the e ould e elfa e depe de
,
ith people ei g passi e e ipie ts . This odel suggested
the U“AID s Fi a ial
Institutions Reform and Expansion (FIRE-D) was preferred by the KUIDFC over Housing and
U a De elop e t Co po atio Li ited s HUDCO offe of a loa for the financing of the
project.
The second legislation that I would like to examine is the Karnataka Groundwater
(Regulation and Control of Development and Management) Act, which was passed by the
Karnataka Legislative Assembly in November 2011. Under this act, all commercial and
domestic borewell users have to register themselves with the BWSSB, the failure of which
shall entail borewell disconnection. Failure to compliance could also result in a penalty of up
to ten thousand rupees and/or imprisonment up to three years. The act came into force in
December 2012 in Bangalore Urban District after a severe water crisis in the summer of
2012. The BWSSB initiated a registration drive in 2013.
Once again, this legislation shows how the poor, the majority of whom depend on
groundwater sources for their domestic and commercial needs, get adversely affected as
they are required to pay an extra sum of fifty or five hundred rupees respectively in addition
to their monthly water bill. According to data collected from the BWSSB, one out of every
five households in Bangalore has a borewell connection along with BWSSB connection. This
means that the monthly water bill itself will come up to around two-three hundred rupees,
which is quite high relative to the income-level of the people who live at the periphery of
Bangalore. The trade-off between sustainability and access to basic needs shall be discussed
in a while.
Methodology
The paper is based on an ethnographic study on water politics in Greater Bangalore which
was conducted during May-June 2014. Data on the GWASP and the Groundwater Act were
gathered through more than sixty in-depth interviews with BWSSB officials, ward committee
members, journalists, and researchers. These interviews were supplemented with media
articles. Fieldwork was conducted in the 159th and 160th wards of BBMP i.e. in the areas of
Kengeri and Rajarajeshwari Nagar respectively. Formerly a near bankrupt town municipal
council (TMC), the two areas were among the eight ULBs officially incorporated into BBMP
in 2007. The nature of the interviews was semi-structured, which facilitated me in getting
information on perceptions of GBWASP and Groundwater Act, understanding different
rationalities of payment, and the politics of engagement with the state in this regard.
Water politics as a case of discrepancies between rhetoric and realities
At first, the project stated that residents had to make a lump sum payment, with the
amount varying with respect to the nature of the entity (residential or commercial), type of
entity (individual house or apartment), and area occupied (for instance, owners of
136
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
eside es of a ea less tha
s ua e feet e e e og ized as u a poo a d e e
exempted from it). After protests and several rounds of negotiation with the officials, an
alte ate ode of pa e t as ag eed upo : eside ts ould pa the GBWA“P ha ges
over a period of twenty four months, which would be added to their monthly water bill.
Even so, for residents of revenue layouts and informal settlements, who have to first
regularize their land tenure, get their khata patra, and then pay the requisite amount
spe ified
BW““B, it a e up to a o side a le figu e, so eti es of the a ge of o e s
monthly salary.
The above instance exemplifies the fa t that the pe iphe alized iddle lass of G eate
Bangalore used payment as a bargaining tool for gaining legitimacy and respectability in the
eyes of the State (Ranganathan 2014). It shows how rule is compromised over and
accomplished (Li 1999) and how market-oriented rationalities, rather than merely being
o tested, e e tuall do gai legiti a . Moo e s u de sta di g of hege o
pa ti ula l
suits this context: a process by which the subordinated are recruited into projects of their
own rule through ide tif i g thei pa ti ula i te ests ith a o e u i e salizi g o e
Moo e
: , uoted i ‘a ga atha
. Mali i ‘a ga atha o te ds, The politi al
agency of the peripheralized middle class does not show signs of resistance so much as it
de o st ates a a ge of ta ti s… ofte i
a s that ep odu e athe tha halle ge gi e
po e st u tu es i id . While the e as esista e to the pa e t of BCC till
, su h
protests are no longer visible, at least not to the same extent. This was corroborated in my
interviews with residents and BWSSB officials that residents, even those from low-income
neighbourhoods, pay GBWASP charges. Whether or not they get water on time is a different
matter altogether.
With respect to the Groundwater Act, while the stated purpose of tracking groundwater
exploitation seems noble enough, the mechanisms the BWSSB has adopted in its attempt to
materialize it have been shoddy. The water supply board launched a registration drive in
early 2013 announcing March 31 as the deadline. With only a thousand people registering
by then, coupled with other delays, the deadline had to be extended two more times, and
the BWSSB finally closed registrations on July 31 (New Indian Express 2013). Even so, out of
the 1.75 lakh odd connections which exist in the city according to a BWSSB executive
engineer, around 50,000 people had registered their borewell connections. This shows that
the BWSSB has not been successful in this process.
However, the problem does not end here. In fact, the complications begin here. With the
threat of imprisonment and fine looming large, residents most of whose borewells had dried
up were left in a dilemma as to whether or not to register. The following extract illustrates
the point: I have been trying to register my borewell although it has dried up and we don't
get any water from it. The bank would not simply accept my application because it has a
problem with the application number given by BWSSB for registration. Why should we
should deposit Rs 50 for a borewell which doesn't yield water? We had to dig a sump to
store water some months ago by spending around Rs 50,000. Also, the quality of water we
get f o BW““B is ot good," asked Ashok Ve kata a a , a eside t of Basa a agudi.
(Times of India 2013). The BWSSB officials were clueless when asked about this. The
engineer-in-chief told that they were yet to hold a meeting to decide on the matter.
137
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
While the water supply component of GBWASP was originally intended to be completed by
2008, it is still far from being so. Several localities such as Mahadevapura, HBR Layout, C V
Raman Nagar, and Kengeri are not serviced properly. Many respondents who had paid the
required GBWASP and related charges had not received water supply after almost a year.
Even in those areas which are getting water supply, the residents are not receiving water
every day. The whole point of launching GBWASP Cauvery Stage IV Phase II was to provide
24/7 access to all residents which are covered under this project. But, that has not
materialized as yet. Low-income neighbourhoods such as Janata Colony and Jagajyothi
Extension in the Kengeri ward receive water only twice a week, that too in inadequate
amounts as a result of which they have had to resort to sourcing water from private tankers.
Each load of water typically costs around six hundred rupees, and they had to get two-three
loads per month, which is quite high considering the income level of the residents.
Contestations between citizens and bureaucrats
While there were intitial disputes ega di g BCC, the e e esol ed ,
a of egotiati g
with the BWSSB through elected local representatives. With the bringing of eight ULBs
under the aegis of Bruhat Bangalore Mahanagara Palike (BBMP), the residents of these
former City and Town Municipal Councils (CMCs and TMCs) no longer enjoyed the political
space and leverage they once did. Elected representatives were no longer consulted about
the feasibility of the project and the mode of negotiation for the residents changed.
Parastatal agencies (in this case the KUIDFC) which report directly to the state government
did that.
In case of the Groundwater Act, the BWSSB (at least the top brass) was thinking of forming
squads to crack down on unregistered borewells and tubewells. What is important in this
regard is that the state or even the bureaucracy cannot be taken a single entity. That would
obscure the complexities that emerge in the politics of water reforms. In this context, the
response to water crisis differed between the higher echelon engineers and secretaries and
low-rung officials.
While the top bureaucrats, far removed from ground realities, thought crackdown was the
way to go, the inspectors at service stations and junior engineers differed from this. In our
interview, the BWSSB inspector, when asked to comment on the engineer-in- hief s lai of
dis o e ti g illegal o e tio s, said that the aused the ate suppl oa d a loss of
around four-six crores per month. Even so, he thought that the claim of disconnection was
practically impossible, because elected representatives would surely bring pressure on them
to prevent or stop such an endeavour, the obvious reason being that water is a basic need,
something without which one cannot survive, and therefore people would go to great
le gths to e su e that the a a ess ate , o e a o a othe . “olo o Be ja i s
:
o ept of o upa
u a is
ightl aptu es this phe o e o . O upa
u a is i plies politi s that is esse tiall e t ed o la d elations by which low-rung
officials are influenced to get access to services and regularise tenure.
In both cases, one can see a pattern of top-level bureaucrats and parastatal agencies
drafting watershed legislations while being totally distanced from realities. This gap
between rhetoric and reality adversely affects the urban poor who have to incur great costs
138
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
as the state withdraws itself from the water sector and constricts the sources of water
available for the poor to meet their daily needs.
To rub salt o o e s i ju , the the e is the issue of o uptio . To gai i sights i to ho
deep-rooted corruption is in water sector in Bangalore, I interviewed journalists and
independent researchers, apart from residents of Kengeri and Rajarajeshwari Nagar. One
unanimous response was that corruption existed when it came to applying for new
connections, although corruption was not reported with respect to service, in case of a
repair or billing. Notwithstanding, one of the respondents said that the officials had to be
given a bribe for pretty much everything, and the residents from the unplanned, low-income
neighbourhoods ended up paying a lot more as they had to start from scratch. Some
respondents, despite paying the requisite charges (bribe included) which amounted to
25000-30000 rupees had not received water, with the BWSSB officials giving them flimsy
excuses such as non-submission of proper documents etc.
Sustainability issues: A change in the incentive structure?
The irony with respect to GBWASP is that, while the residents who had paid for the new
ate o e tio s did t e ei e a d op of ate ith thei o e ells also d ied up, the
BWSSB had been flushing out millions of litres of water every day. When enquired as to why
this was happening, the sloppy excuse that was given was that the extra 150 mld (million
litres of water a day) was drawn to clean the pipes.
A key issue that emerged in the context of GBWASP and the Groundwater Act is that of the
incentives to opt for corporation or Cauvery water. As of now, residents pay more to get
corporation water than they pay for borewell. In other words, citizens have no incentive to
choose the former over the latter with the exception of long-term sustainability.
Notwithstanding the fact that over 16000 borewells have gone dry in the city, people tend
to do a short-term cost-benefit analysis, which leads them to opt for a borewell connection.
For instance, several residents of Gandhinagar whom I interviewed had approached the
BWSSB for a new borewell connection, and not a Cauvery connection. In fact, they had been
fighting about it with the officials, with the reasons being rather straightforward. If one opts
for a borewell connection, one has to pay fifty rupees for a one BHK house, and three
hundred rupees for an apartment. On the other hand, if one chooses Cauvery connection,
one will end up paying at least Rs. 500 per month, not including the amount they might have
to pay in case they source water from private tankers (depending on the frequency of water
supply from the board). Therefore, it makes sense economically for people to choose a
borewell connection over corporation connection. Nonetheless, this poses serious
challenges to the groundwater table of Bangalore, whose only other source of water lies a
hundred kilometres away.
The BWSSB has to not only change its incentive structure to make the choice of corporation
water more viable, but has to strive to minimize the gap between its rhetoric and reality. If
daily water supply is ensured (which is the stated goal of GBWASP), then people would have
a feasible alternative to groundwater sources, which are unreliable. This is because, in the
short-run, while it might make sense to opt for a borewell connection, the fear of it drying
up is always present among the residents. In other words, the BWSSB can tap this insecurity
and make it less attractive. However, before that, it has to first make sure that pipelines are
139
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
laid in all the areas which are covered under BBMP and that water is being supplied in
suffi ie t ua tities. A o di g to data olle ted
The Hi du
, a out
pe e t of
the
ld goes u a ou ted fo tha ks to illegal a d f ee o e tio s . But, the illegalit
of these connections is itself not straightforward. Rather, the access to and payment for
se i es a e le e aged fo e og izi g legalit of land tenure and citizenship.
Conclusion
In conclusion, the paper argues that the huge gap between rhetoric and ground realities
when it comes to the implementation of GBWASP and the Karnataka Groundwater Act have
adversely affected the urban poor in Greater Bangalore. The axes of dispute between the
BWSSB and citizens have changed over time: in 2007-08, it was more around GBWASP; in
2014-15, it is more around the Groundwater Act. While the issue of corruption is prevalent,
it is not ubiquitous: people bribe the officials when getting a new connection, but not for
subsequent services. The politics of negotiating access to services has changed for several
neighbourhoods over time, especially after the eight ULBs were incorporated into BBMP in
2007. Because parastatal agencies report directly to the state government and not local
representatives, who do not have a voice in the decisions taken with respect to these
policies and legislations, residents of revenue layouts and informal settlements find it even
more difficult to get basic utilities. The lack of appropriate incentives has resulted in people
preferring borewell connections over Cauvery water resulting in a loss of around four-six
crores to the state. This needs to be changed, not only from an economistic perspective, but
more importantly, because of the sustainability issues that surface thereof.
References
http://bwssb.org/water-connection/
http://www.kuidfc.com/website/webpage.nsf/lookupallcat/projects-gbwasp
https://www.ipaidabribe.com/how-to/borewell-registration-bangalore#gsc.tab=0
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tlSFI4h1gp4
Benjamin, Solomon (2008). Occupancy urbanism: radicalizing politics and economy beyond
policy and programs. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research. Vol. 32.3. Pp.
719-29.
Li, T. M. (1999). Compromising power: development, culture, and rule in Indonesia. Cultural
Anthropology. Vol. 14.3. Pp. 295-322.
Moo e, D
. The u i le of ultu al politi s: e o ki g de elop e t i )i
Eastern Highlands. American Ethnologist. Vol. 26.3. Pp. 654-89.
a
es
Ranganathan, Malini (2014). Paying for Pipes, Claiming Citizenship: Political Agency and
Water Reforms at the Urban Periphery. International Journal of Urban and Regional
Research. Vol. 38.2. pp. 590-608.
140
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The Hindu. Bangalore (2013) BWSSB nod must to drill borewells.
(http://www.thehindu.com/todays-paper/tp-national/tp-karnataka/bwssb-nod-must-todrill-borewells/article4208152.ece)
The New Indian Express. Bangalore (2013) Register borewells or face action, says BWSSB.
March 29 2013. (http://www.newindianexpress.com/cities/bangalore/article1521526.ece)
The New Indian Express. Bangalore (2013) Registration process of borewells goes dry.
August 28 2013. (http://www.newindianexpress.com/cities/bangalore/Registration-processof-borewells-goes-dry/2013/08/28/article1755201.ece)
The Times of India. Bangalore (2013) Cauvery water eludes 80k households. September 19
2013. (http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/city/bangalore/Cauvery-water-eludes-80khouseholds/articleshow/22735090.cms)
The Times of India. Bangalore (2013) Why register bone dry borewells? March 29 2013.
(http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/city/bangalore/Why-register-bone-dryborewells/articleshow/19230041.cms)
141
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
142
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
SEBI v/s Sahara Litigation: Protecting
Investors or Money Laundering
Subhash N Sonawane
A“M s I stitute of Professional Studies, Pune
Abstract
The “up e e Cou t has e e tl Ju e ,
pe itted “aha a g oup to sale it s
properties in order to raise money to partly comply with the orders of Supreme Court of
depositing Rs.20000 crores with SEBI .The SEBI is supposed to utilize this amount for refund
of debenture amount to debenture holders .However Rs.5120 crores is already deposited
with SEBI but it (SEBI) is not able to identify the investors for refund of debenture amount .It
is amply clear from the chronology and arguments raised in the paper that SEBI v/s Sahara
episode is not the case for protecting the interests of investors but it is the case of money
laundering. The paper discusses how the money raised from sale of properties is going to
deteriorate financial position of Sahara group whereas directors of Sahara are not being
punished for the actual crime (money laundering) committed by them. Thus, they are being
(or shall be) set free at the cost of the corporate they are heading.
Keywords: Money laundering, SEBI, Corporate Governance
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
March 4, 2014. Turning point in the life of Subrata Roy, Chief of Sahara conglomerate,
which has 4500 offices and one million workforce.( Subramanian, 2013). The group is in the
business of Real Estate, Infrastructure, Finance, Media, Hospitability, Cricket and Formula
one. Mr Subrata Roy has employed top lawyers of the country to defend him in every court
of law including Supreme Court (SC). He is very efficient in searching loopholes in the law.
He has friends in all the political parties, in particular Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) and
Socialist party (SP). He was very confident that he can do anything he wants to do and no
one can touch him. But nothing came to his rescue and SC sent him to Jail along with two
Directors of Sahara.
SEBI v/s Sahara Episode
In 2008, Sahara India Real Estate Corporation and in 2009, Sahara Housing India Corporation
launched Optionally Fully Convertible Debenture (OFCD) issues. In Jan. 2009 SEBI received
complaints about illegal nature of OFCD issues. In June 2011, SEBI held this sale of
debenture illegal and ordered refund. On 31/8/2012 Supreme Court upheld SEBI orders and
directed Sahara to refund Rs. 24,029 crores to investors. On 5 th Dec. 2012 Supreme Court
granted extension to Sahara for refund of amount to investors in two installments in
addition to immediate payment of Rs. 5120 crores to SEBI. Though the Sahara handed over
143
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
the draft of Rs 5120 crores to SEBI, has failed to pay the rest of the amount, attracting
second contempt proceeding against it on 24-07-2013.Thereafter, as an interim
arrangement, Supreme Court asked Sahara to deposit title deeds of its property worth Rs
20000 crores to SEBI. However, Sahara played mischief by submitting title deeds of highly
overvalued properties. Convinced that Sahara is not complying with its orders, Supreme
Court had issued orders in November 2013, restraining Sahara Chairman Subrata Roy and 3
other directors from leaving the country and also banning sale of any properties.
November 2013 order of Supreme Court was warning signal to Subrata Roy but he did not
take a heed of it and failed to appear before Supreme Court on 26 February. It was but
natural that Supreme Court ordered arrest of Subrata Roy in order to secure his presence
before it on 4 March 2014. Accordingly he was arrested on 28 February and produced
before Supreme Court on the stipulated date. On this date Supreme Court has ordered to
keep Mr. Subrata Roy in judicial custody till submission of concrete offer for refund.
Are the investors genuine?
One very important aspect overlooked by media and therefore by common man is that SEBI
is unable to locate the individual investors of Sahara, for safeguarding whose interests SEBI
has approached the Supreme Court. Sahara has already deposited Rs. 5120 crores with SEBI
in Dec. 2012 as a part compliance of Court order dt. 5/12/2012. This amount is supposed to
be refunded to investors. Out of Rs. 5120 crores, SEBI has disbursed during one full year a
palt su of ‘s.
lakhs o l , al ost a egligi le a ou t. “EBI s allegatio had been that
Out of thousa ds of “aha a i esto s, it “EBI fou d o l
ge ui e i esto s till th
February 2013. Total number of investors is 3 crores. Sahara in its full page advertisement
dated / /
has lai ed that “EBI k o s si e e ha e itten so many times that
millions of very small investors run their tea stalls, are small vendors etc. who are on
highways. Their address may be Mr. X, NH-21, Gorakhpur. Millionsof Rural people do not
have House No, Mohalla etc. There are large numbers of small investors who do not own
thei houses a d a o di gl ha e shifted thei add esses f o ti e to ti e .
Is it money laundering?
It may be possible that few hundred or few thousand investors may not have proper
addresses. But how is it possible that 3 crores investors are not traceable? Any prudent man
can conclude that Sahara has indulged in Money laundering activity, just on paper showing
that 3 crores investors have invested in OFCD issue.
From the very beginning of the case, Sahara is pleading that it has refunded the amount to
investors. It is a big question mark whether it has really refunded the amount. Since SEBI
could not trace investor for refund of Rs.5120 crore already deposited by Sahara to SEBI as
per Supreme Court directives, there are likely to have two possibilities:
1. Sahara has already refunded, as claimed by it, the amount to investors and therefore
no investor is left unpaid.
2. Sahara had not collected OFCD amount from genuine investors and only fake names
have been recorded.
144
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The second possibility seems to be more probable. However, in either case, Sahara is not
liable to pay back money to true investors. On this background Sahara was pleading every
now and then is that there are no dues to be paid.
Whether sahara needs to payback ?
There is half-t uth i “aha a s argument that Sahara is not liable to pay back to investors.
When there are no true investors whom to pay? Naturally, Sahara does not have any liability
to pa . A d a othe half pa t of the “aha a s a gu e t is plai lie that Sahara has already
paid Rs 22000 crores out of 24000 crores. When there are no true investors, to whom such a
big amount has been paid!
Assuming that (though it is hard to assume) the 3 crore investos are genuine and Sahara has
already refunded the amount to most of them. So in this case also Sahara is not liable for
payment of Rs 24000 crores. The unpaid investors, as claimed by Sahara, are liable to
receive Rs 2000 crores, for which Sahara has deposited Rs 5120 crores with SEBI on 5 th
December 2012. (How generous Sahara is, making additional payment of Rs 3120 crores to
SEBI!) So the liability of making payment is not with Sahara, but it is with SEBI.
The real strength of the Sahara group is that it has purchased large quantum of land all over
the country. Subrata Roy himself once claimed that Sahara has 36,631 acres of land (Suhas
Yadav, 2013), though he claimed on 10th April 2013 that his personal property is worth only
‘s to
o es B“ ‘epo te ,
. “aha a s poli so fa as to u the la d but not to
sale any piece of land. Subrata Roy once said (Suhas Yadav, 2013) that since his companies
are not listed on any exchange, he need not sale the land to improve EPS.
Black money and economy
It is well known that buying or selling of land involves lot of black money. Indian economy at
present is in stagnation (may be even stagflation as inflation is still not under control). The
one of the (and major one) reason of stagflation is black money. Black money is a cause as
well as effect of inflation. Real Estate and black money go hand in hand.
The Governments, past and present, talk of bringing back black money stashed in Swiss
Banks only to mislead and fool ill-informed public. First, there must not be any major
amount of black money in Foreign Banks as a percentage of total black money existing.
Second, it is very difficult to bring back the same due international laws ant treaties. The
crux of the problem is how not to allow further generation of black money. No Government
would like to proceed i that di e tio , ot e e so alled P og essi e , Clea a d
P ag ati Modi Go e
e t.
The black money is right here in India. The most important destination to stash black money
is real estate and not Swiss Bank. Even if some amount of black money is sent abroad it
o es a k Lau de ed th ough ‘ou d t ippi g The udget p ese ted
p ese t
Government on 10th July has not made any attempt to plug this hole.
The holders of black money are corporate, politicians and Government officers. If only two
reforms are brought, namely, election reforms and land transaction reforms, 90 % of the
145
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
black money generation will be arrested. It is necessary to plug demand side of black money
(Sonawane, 2013). Neither Congress nor BJP has intentions to do that.
Sahara and black money
How could Sahara Purchase so much of land? Subrata Roy is not known for carrying
ancestral property. But his nexus with politicians is well known. That could be the likely
source of black money to buy lands. The large amount of black money seems to have been
attempted to launder through OFCD issues of two of the Sahara group companies by
showing fake names of the investors as genuine names. Before this laundered money could
be invested in some business, SEBI held the said OFCD issues as illegal a d o de ed it s
refund. The SEBI order was upheld by Supreme Court. Sahara came in real trouble. It had
again to show on paper the refund of money to the same fake investors. Thus the money
laundered again converted to black money.
As the Supreme Court did not accept the plea that money has been refunded back to
investors and it insisted that Sahara must deposit Rs 24000 crores with interest to SEBI.
Since then Sahara is in more trouble. Sahara has to refund that money which it has not
received. Task had become more difficult for Sahara due to Orders of Supreme Court 21 st
November 2013 banning sale of any assets by Sahara.
There was a little solace to Subrata Roy when Supreme Court on 26 th March 2014
announced its willingness to grant interim bail to him and other 2 directors on the condition
that the group deposited Rs 5000 crores cash and further provide bank guarantee of Rs
5000 crores from public sector bank in favour of SEBI. Though this condition is much milder
than depositing entire 20000 crores in cash. Siphoning from the existing business would
mean killing the business.
Supreme Court itself finally showed the way out. It reverted its order of 21 st November
2013 on 4th Ju e
a d allo ed “aha a to sale it s p ope ties o l fo the purpose of
depositing the sale proceeds with SEBI. So far, Sahara either was (rightly) avoiding making
payment to SEBI or was unable to make payment to SEBI for want of liquidity. However,
now Sahara has to be non-insistent of the argument of double payment, due to
imprisonment of Subrata Roy for such a long time i.e. since 4 th May. On30th June 2014,
Sahara deposited Rs 3117 crores with SEBI as a part compliance of Supreme Court order
dated 26th Ma h
. “u ata ‘o u ged ehe
to “up e e Cou t o 3rd July and
requested for parole of 45 days to arrange for balance cash amount of Rs 1883 crores and
bank guarantee of Rs 5000 crores. The Court will decide on this request on 11 th July 2014.
Will the matter end here. Certainly not. The Court may grant parole or bail on 11th July and
Sahara chief may be able to arrange within 45 days balanced amount and bank guarantee.
But Sahara chief has to finally deposit Rs. 20000 crore (which has now become Rs 38000
crore, after adding interest, as stated by SEBI on 4th July before Apex Court) by whatever
means (sale of assets or otherwise). This is possible only if Sahara is closed down. Sahara is
already in arrears of staff salary payment since 3 months which amounts to Rs 12000 crores.
I No e e
“aha a s total assets were worth Rs 55096 crores and total liabilities
were Rs 54364 crores (N. Sundaresha Subramanian, 2013)
146
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The egulato s ust disti guish et ee o ga izatio a d it s head. Fo the si committed
by the head, the company must not suffer. The example of Satyam is before us. In case of
Sahara 10 lakh people are in employment, and thus 10 lakh families are getting their daily
bread. Subrata Roy, with fear of imprisonment, may not bother for the organization. Why
Sahara group should pay to SEBI Rs 20000 crores plus interest when it has not received any
amount from investors. Why should Subrata Roy be set free after depositing requisite
a ou t to “EBI f o “aha a s p ope ties he he has a tuall e ei ed a k ‘s
crores of black money which he had earlier laundered. These are some of the facts the
regulators must realize.
The recent incidence further strengthens the view of the author that in SEBI V/S Sahara
litigation, there are no genuine investors and it is the matter of money laundering. The
income tax department has filed an application before Supreme Court wanting to be
impleaded as a party in ongoing SEBI Sahara dispute on the plea that as per information of
the department the investors are not genuine and thus OFCD amount has come from some
other source and therefore that amount must be taxed.
Lately i.e. on 4th July, Supreme Court has also ordered SEBI to start process of refund to
investors the amount already deposited by Sahara. It raises curiosity why the Court did not
issue such orders much earlier.
Conclusion
SEBI v/s Sahara litigation appears to be for protecting the interests of the investors. But as
the SEBI as well as Income tax department are not able to locate the majority of the
investors, it is the money laundering affair by Sahara chief. Whenever (the day shall not be
far from today) Sahara chief will, under duress, actually be paying Rs.20000 crore plus
i te est to “EBI fo the “EBI s stated pu pose of efu d to i esto s , the a ou t is goi g
to lie with SEBI for the long time and shall not be used for any productive purpose (in any
case not for refund to investors as no investors are traceable), and it is going to have big
adverse impact on the working of the Sahara group. Whereas Sahara chief will remain
unaffected as he has already received back the black money he has earlier laundered. The
example of Satyam be followed as Ramalingam Raju is punished but Satyam is saved.
References
1. BS Reporter (2013): My Personal Assets worth Rs 5-6 Cr: Roy. Business Standard, 11
April.
2. Yadav, Suhas (2013): Dhava Dhav Annaprashansathi. Prabhat (Marathi), 31 March.
3. “o a a e, “u hash N.
: I e ita ilit of Bla k Mo e Journal of Politics and
Governance, 2, 1/2, 137-142.
4. Subramanian, N. Sundaresha (2013): Tough days ahead for Sahara Parivar. Business
Standard, 22 November.
147
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
148
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Decentralization in India: Reflections from Bihar
Pradip Kumar Jha
Center for Federal Studies, Jamia Hamdard, Hamdard University, New Delhi
Abstract
Democracy provides space for participation of people in political process. It allows people to
govern themselves. It is self-governance of the people. The institutional mechanism of selfgovernance at the primary level is Local Self Government (LSG). It brings government closer
to the people and promotes interactive governance. The objective of the democratic state is
welfare of the people. The institutional mechanism of development at primary level is
community. The community is aware of local resources and the taken decisions are
sustainable. Social audit is a major step to bring transparency and accountability in
governance. The 73rd constitutional amendment provides reservation to Scheduled Castes
(SCs), Scheduled Tribes (STs) and women. In some of the states there is provision of
reservation for other backward classes (OBCs) also. The provision of quotas to women and
marginalized groups is an attempt to bridge gender and caste inequality. The inclusion of
women and disadvantaged groups in the process of participation and decision-making is a
significant step towards social transformation. Decentralization is devolution of authority
and financial resources. Democratic polity adopts decentralization for development. In the
Indian context the primary unit of self-governance, development and inclusion of women
and disadvantaged g oup at u al le el is Pa ha at . Pa ha ati ‘aj I stitutio s P‘Is is
increasingly considered as an agency of good governance, sustainable development and
social change and empowerment. The sustenance and growth of PRIs in Bihar is dependent
on certain socio-economic and political variables, which are not necessarily independent of
one another. The paper attempts to analyse the role of regimes, social and political base of
the regimes, and their impact on the functioning of PRIs as an agency of empowerment. The
paper is based on qualitative research method and applies content analysis of secondary
sources to draw conclusion.
Keywords: Decentralization, Panchayati Raj Institutions, Development, Bihar, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Decentralization in India: A Historical Sketch
History tells that village panchayat or Local Self-government as a system existed in India
since long. The form may vary but its spirit has always remained the essence of the Indian
socio-cultural ethos. In the Rig Vedic (1200BC) period the self-governing bodies existed in
the fo of “a has and with the passage of time these bodies became Panchayats (council
of five persons). The village Panchayat or elected council had large executive and judicial
powers.1 Castesim and feudalistic system of governance under Mugal rule in medieval
period slowly eroded the self-government in villages.2The panchayats completely lost their
luste du i g the alie egi e as it as ased o e t alized s ste of go e a e. The
149
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
financial crisis due to the revolt of 1857 and point raised by the finance commission in 1880
paved the way for structural evolution of local self-government in India.3
Self-governance became the political goal of the leaders of nationalist movement. Village
was in the centrality of their thought as a unit of nation formation, democratization and
decentralization. It is the site fo i lusio , he e est u tu i g of its o s a d ethos.
There is no uniformity of approach in treating village as a homogenous, inclusive, and
undifferentiated category.
Gandhi had a reformist vision and was in favour of reconstruction of villages. Nehru had a
modernist outlook and wanted to develop villages through new technology. Ambedkar had
subaltern perspective and he did not find any virtue in the revival and development of
villages.4 Lohia had socialist perspective and considered that decentralization would break
down the barriers of class and caste.5
Article 40 of the Constitution which enshrines one of the Directive Principles of State Policy
lays down that the State shall take steps to organize village Panchayats and endow them
such powers and authority so that they can function as units of self-governance. The first
census of independent India stated that 82.7% population live in rural areas. 6 In order to
uplift the rural poor Community Development Programme (CDP) and National Extension
Service (NES) were launched in 1952. The CDP and NES did not produce desired results so
Balvantray G. Mehta committee (1957) was set up. The committee highlighted the lack of
popular participation in CDP and made a strong plea for devolution of power to lower levels
through PRIs. It recommended three-tier system of PRIs which would work at District level
(Zilla Parishad), the intermediate level (Block Samiti) and the lower level (village
panchayat).7
Inadequate community participation and dismal poverty reduction led to the appointment
Asoka Mehta o
ittee i
, hi h a e a ked as the Mag a Ca ta i the o ept
and practice of PRIs. It recommended two-tier PRIs. The Zilla Parishad at the district level
would be established as the first point of decentralization. The formation of Mandal
Panchayat and the Mandal was conceived as a group village, which would make the
necessary links with the system in developing focal points. It would develop link between
rural and urban areas. It ignored the importance of the Gram Sabha.8 The failure of the
earlier development strategy on poverty, unemployment and growing unrest of the masses
in the 1970s and 1980s paved the way for G.V.K. Rao Committee and L.M. Singhvi
Committee respectively in 1985 and 1986. The G. V. K. Rao Committee (1985)
recommended that Zilla Prishads (at district level) should be strengthened.
There should be sub-committees at the district level with proportional representation. Some
planning functions may be transferred to the district level. Elections of the local bodies
should be held regularly. The committee believed that the development was possible, only if
a large number of people participated in development activities. In order to achieve this,
adequate powers and financial resources at the local level were considered essential.9 The L.
M. Singhvi Committee (1986) gave importance to Gram Sabha. The Gram Sabha was viewed
as the seedbed of democracy. Local self-government should be constitutionally recognized.
Elections at the panchayat level should be held regularly and without delay.10
150
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
During the period of 1959 to the L. M. Singhvi Committee (1986), PRIs were considered as
the agency of democracy and development. The period mainly focused on improving the
efficacy and strengthening of PRIs so that it may deliver the expected results. The vision in
that period did not consider PRIs as an agency of social change and empowerment. Now it
is necessary to have a look at the political and economic situation of late 1980s and early
1990s.
During the late 1980s the Congress played the PRIs card, the BJP came up with Mandir issue
and the Janta Dal played Mandal card to counter one another and consolidate their
respective positions.11On the economic front India was deep into the economic crisis in
1990. The continued saving-investment gap in the domestic economy forced a heavy
reliance on imports. This created a large balance of payment deficit. The increasing savingi est e t gap a e att i uted to
a - ade a d poli -i du ed i espo si le fiscal
12
and other economic actions.
Constitutional Context of 73rd Amendment
Finally in April 1993 the 73rd constitutional amendment act was passed, which provided
constitutional status to PRIs. PRIs have been in existence for a long time, it has been
observed that it could not evolve as responsive institution due to absence of regular
elections, prolonged suppression, insufficient representation of weaker sections and
inadequate devolution of power and financial resources. Accordingly steps were taken to
enable panchayats to function as the units of self-government.13 The pre 73rd amendment
considered PRIs as the agency of democracy and development. The post 73 rd constitutional
amendment considers PRIs as the agency of good governance, sustainable development and
social change and empowerment. The provision of quotas for SCs, STs and women in PRIs
made it the agency of social change and empowerment.
The Case of Bihar
The sustenance and growth of PRIs in Bihar is dependent on certain socio-economic and
political variables, which are not necessarily independent of one another. In the paper a
odest atte pt is ade to ide tif the politi al a ia les f o Biha s politi al histo , e e
though the socio-economic realities of the state had to be kept in mind in order to
appreciate the political facts in this perspective. In doing so attempt is made to analyse the
role of regimes, social and political base of the ruling party, strategy of these parties in
mobilizing support and crisis of governability.
On the one hand, ruling parties in the state governments, particularly the Congress,
have allowed district and local institutions of self-government to decline or have
limited their powers or have even frequently superseded them altogether in order to
maintain tighter control over local systems of patronage and to establish stable bases
of local support. The counter-tendency has been the persistence, even the reassertion,
of structures of local power which exist independently of government and party
organizations and the revival of interest, especially among the non-Congress parties, in
the restoration of local institutions of self-government. 14
151
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
The rule of Karpoori Thakur from the 22nd December 1970 to 1st June 1971 and then in 1977
to 1979 provide a remarkable departure in so far as panchayat democracy is concerned. He
conducted panchayat elections twice. During his second tenure he conducted panchayat
elections, despite objections from all quarters, including his own party. In his first tenure he
initiated the process of implementing the 1961 Act in totality in all districts. It is because of
his actions that Bihar acquired a full-fledged three-tier panchayat system in all its districts by
the year 1980.15
In order to consolidate power base among the backward castes Karpoori Thakur promised
quotas in government jobs and education institutions but outburst of opposition from
forward castes forced him to resign and policy could not be implemented. 16 Pradhan H.
Prasad tended to describe a growing struggle between the e
apitalist kulaks of the
a k a d astes a d the old feudal o de , do i ated
the t i e-borns.17 Francine
F a kel o se ed the a k a d lass o e e t led
Ka poo i Thaku as the o ga izatio
of the poo i a dou le assault o the aste s stem and class structure.18 Frankel noted that
some of the twice-born castes, the Bhumihars and the Rajputs, tended to support not the
Congress but rather the Janata Party in the post-1977 period.19 Going into 1977 elections,
Ramashray Roy described the Biha Co g ess as ei g i o ga izatio al sha les , a d the
Ja ata Pa t as i apa le of o ki g as o e ohesi e u it .20
The return of Indira Gandhi to power in 1980 brought Jagannath Mishra to power. The three
years of Mishra rule and three years of Bindeswari Dube rule were the period of
governmental ineffectiveness and agrarian violence. The period also witnessed no policy
initiative.21There are three factors that led to conflict in Bihar. First is underdevelopment of
Bihar, second is the deleitimization of established pattern of domination in the rural areas
and the third is the slow and steady disintegration of the state.22
The Indian Institute of Public Administration reported on the basis of study visit of Bihar in
1989-90 that the loss of effecti e ess a d legiti a of P‘Is as a esult of i o di ate dela s
i holdi g ele tio s a d the supp essio of )illa Pa ishad . G a “a has desig ed to e a
instrument of accountability of the panchayat to the village community as a whole, where
reported to e la gel a defu t od .23
The ideology of panchayati raj received shabby treatment at the hands of Laloo Prasad
Yadav. It was during his term as Chief Minister that the 73 rd Amendment of the Constitution
was passed. This amendment made it mandatory for all state governments to bring state
legislation on panchayats at par with the constitutional requirement by 24 April 1994, and
to hold panchayat elections immediately thereafter. All that the Yadav regime did was to
amend the law within the stipulated date. But in doing so, it had ensured two things. First,
the Act provided precious little in terms devolution of administrative and financial powers
to the panchayats, but contained many provisions to strengthen state government control
over these bodies. In this respect, the Janta Dal led by Yadav seemed to be in complete
agreement with Jagannath Mishra of the Congress. Both were seen to be equally
disinterested in granting any real administrative or financial power to the panchayats.
Secondly, Yadav made elaborate provisions for reservation of seats for backward castes. In
this, he made no distinction between the upper and lower sections, obviously to allow the
upper crust of backward groups (mostly Yadavs) to reap the benefits of reservation. He
152
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
made a quick census for this and fixed the quotas for backward, SC and ST sections. As a
result, much more than 50 per cent of seats on an average went in favour of backward
sections. Even after all this, Yadav was reluctant to hold panchayat elections. But he needed
alibi to hide his real intension. He found one soon. For the purpose of fixing quotas of
backward castes, a census was necessary, as reliable data on OBC population are not
available. The government asked the District Magistrates to conduct the census in one
week. Everybody knew that such a casual approach to caste census would invite litigation.
This is what happened. Aggrieved persons went to the High Court.24
The survey data of 1996 for trust of Bihar in local government is 29.9 per cent which is much
less than the trust of Maharashtra (40.7 per cent), West Bengal (50.6 per cent) and all India
(39.9 per cent) respectively.25 The upward moving backward castes especially the Kurmis
e a e disillusio ed f o the Laloo led ‘JD e ause the Yada isatio phenomenon
whereby undue favour had been given to a particular caste, systematic deterioration of law
and order and utter neglect of development work. The most backward castes and Dalits
became disillusioned from the RJD as the government did little for their basic social and
economic problems.26
In the Assembly elections of 2005 Nitish Kumar led the Janta Dal United and the Bhartiya
Janta Party to power. An Act was passed in 2006 to replace the Bihar Panchayat Raj Act,
1993 as amended up to date. This Act is called the Bihar Panchayat Raj Act, 2006. The Bihar
Panchayat Raj Act, 2006 provides under 50 percent reservation in all categories. In all
categories upto 50 percent reservation would be provided for women. The SCs and STs
reservation would be in proportion to their population. In all maximum 20 per cent seats
would be reserved for backward class. It has unique feature of establishing Nyaya Panchayat
known as Gram Katchaharies, which are meant to secure accessible justice delivery at
affordable costs to the rural population.
A study of the Bihar Panchayat Raj Act 2006, suggests that of the 29 subjects listed in
Eleventh Schedule, 25 are shown for Gram Panchayats, 27 are shown for Panchayat Samiti,
and 26 are shown for Zilla Parishad. These together concern about 20 departments. In the
fresh round of activity mapping out of 20 concerned departments only 13 had responded;
among these 13 departments, 4 are said to have responded incorrectly. The State is one of
the seven (7) that has received support jointly from UNDP and Ministry of Panchayati Raj
(MoPR) in their Capacity Building for local governance. There are federations of Mukhiyas
and Pramukhs in each district, but none particularly for women representatives.
The Gram Sabha meets four times a year. It may meet more frequently in special
circumstances. The meeting of Gram Sabha is usually held on 26th January, 1st May, 15th
August and 2nd October. The Quorum for a meeting is one-twentieth of total members of
the Gram Sabha. There is no special provision regarding quorum in respect of women,
SC/ST, landless labourers. Under the Act there is no provision for Mahila Sabha meetings.
Reservation is rotated at the time of Panchayat elections, i.e., every five years. The two-child
norm is not applicable. No special safeguards are available against the removal of women
Presidents. It has provision of constitution of standing committees in all tiers of Panchayats.
A Gram Panchayat constitutes six (6) standing committees. The Social Justice Committee
performs the function related to promotion, protection and welfare of SCs, STs, other
153
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
weaker sections and women and children. It is further provided that every committee must
have at least one woman member and the Social Justice Committee must have a member
belonging to the SC or ST communities, subject to their presence in panchayat. There is no
provision of reservation of SC/ST/Women in the standing committees.27
Conclusion
History tells that village Panchayat or local self-government as a system existed in ancient,
medieval and British period. Leaders of the nationalist movement despite disagreement and
differences in their political agenda, the village remained a core category. There is no
uniformity of approach in treating village as a homogenous, inclusive, and undifferentiated
category. The pre 73rd amendment considered PRIs as the agency of democracy and
development. The post 73rd constitutional amendment considers PRIs as the agency of good
governance, sustainable development and social change and empowerment of weaker
sections. The provision of quotas for SCs, STs and women in PRIs made it the agency of
social change and empowerment. The Congress and the non-congress party treated
panchayats differently which is quite visible in the case of Bihar. The Congress suppressed
the PRIs while the Karpoori Thakur regime and the Janta Dal United and the Bhartiya Janta
Party attempted to revive the institution.
End-notes
1. See Nehru, J. (1964). The discovery of India. Calcutta: Signet Press.
2. See Khanna, B.S. (1999).Rural local government in India and South Asia. New Delhi: Deep
and Deep Publications.
3. See Pal, M. (2009).Gram sabha meeting in India: Process, outcomes and perspectives
JOAAG, Vol. 4 No. (2).
. “ee Jodhka, “.“.
Natio a d the Village : I ages of Rural India in Gandhi, Nehru
and Ambedkar.In G.Guru (Eds.), Atrophy in dalit politics.Mumbai, India: Vikas Adhyan
Kendra.
. “ee Pal, M.
. Lohia s thi ki g o lo al go e
e ts. Economic and Political Weekly,
Vol. XLVI, No.6, February 5.
6. See Census 1951.
7. See Balvantray G. Mehta (1957).Study of community projects and national extension
service. Department of Rural Development: New Delhi.
8. See Asoka Mehta (1978). Committee on panchayti raj.Government of India, Department
of Rural Development:New Delhi.
9. See G.V.K. Rao (1985). Report of the committee on administrative arrangements for rural
development and poverty alleviation programmes,Department of Rural Development: New
Delhi.
10. See L.M. Singhvi Committee Report. (1986).
11. See Kohli, A. (2001).The su ess of I dia s de o a . Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.
12. See. Arora,G.K.(2002). Globalisation, federalism and decentralisation-Implications for
India.New Delhi: Bookwell.
13. See www.panchayat.gov.in.
14. Brass,P.R.(1994). The politics of India since independence (P.116). New York, Cambridge
University Press.
154
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
15. See Ghosh, B.,& Kumar, G. (2003). State politics and panchayats in India.New Delhi:
Manohar Publishers and Distributors.
16. See Blair,H.(1980) Rising Kulaks and backward Classes in Bihar: Social change in the late
s , Economic and Political Weekly, January 12.
17. See Pradhan, H. P. (1979).Caste and class in Bihar.Economic and Political Weekly,
February, Annual Number.
18. See Frankel,F.(1988).Middle classes and castes in Indian politics: Prospects for political
accommodation. In A.Kohli (Eds.), I dia s de o a , Princeton: Princeton University Press.
19. Ibid.
20. See Roy,R.(1983). Battle before ballot. Delhi: Ritu Publishers.
21. See Kohli,A.(2009). Democracy and development in India, From socialism to pro business.
New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
22. Ibid.
23. See Mitra,S.K.(2001). op.cit., pp. 113-114.
24. Ghosh,B & Girish,K.(2003). op.cit., pp. 214-215.
25. See Mitra,S.K.(2001). op.cit., p. 111.
26. See Ghosh, B. & Girish, K. (2003). op.cit., p. 207.
27. See State of Panchayats Report (2008-09), Volume II, Ministry of Panchayati Raj,
Government of India: New Delhi.
155
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
156
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Political Communication and the Electoral Campaign:
A Case Study of the 2014 National Election
Radhika Kumar
Department of Political Science, Motilal Nehru College
University of Delhi, Delhi
Abstract
Elections in India can be characterised as a near copy book case of democratic functioning.
Conducted with regularity, characterised by national and sub-national multi-party
o petitio , itize s ight to ote o e p ess thei eje tio of a didate/pa t optio
th ough the e e tl i t odu ed o e of the a o e optio , the e ti e ele to al p o ess
claims to reflect the voter choices and preferences as accurately as possible. While the
process of conducting elections in India has gained maturity since independence, the nature
of electoral outcomes has also become predictable. The rise of regional parties and
burgeoning coalition governments at the national level, declining currency of identity
politics whether based on caste, ethnicity or religion and the rise of the politics of
development often cited to explain bucking of the anti-incumbency trend may all seen as
sig posts of a ode isi g de o ati s ste . Ho e e the e di t of the
Lok “a ha
election which returned a national party to power with an absolute majority of its own,
historically associated with a right wing majoritarian religious sensibility challenges all
available understanding of the Indian electoral process. The question that one is exploring in
this paper is why has a national party returned to power after two decades of coalition
governments. The hypothesis is that the nature of political communication and the electoral
campaign conducted by the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) was a deterministic variable
responsible for the 2014 Lok Sabha verdict
Keywords: Elections, Campaigning, Political Parties
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Contours of Coalitional Politics in India
Partisan politics in India as witnessed in the electoral arena following independence was
ha a te ised as the Co g ess s ste
‘aj i Kotha i
:
-163). The Congress
system was one that contained and co-opted the opposition by accommodating dissenting
views, thereby dominating electoral politics in the manner of a single party dominant
system till the 1970s. While opposition to the Congress strengthened itself at the subnational level in the 1967 assembly elections, it was only in 1977 that a non-Congress
coalition came to power as a result of nationwide rejection of I di a Ga dhi s i positio of
E e ge
i the late
s. While it took th ee de ades fo a edi le oppositio to
emerge if only short-lived (1977-1980), it took close to another two decades,
notwithstanding the brief interlude of the National Front government from 1989-91, for a
157
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
stable non- Congress opposition coalition government led by the National Democratic
Alliance (NDA) to come to power in 1999. The return to power of the NDA in 2014 following
a decade of rule by the UPA points to the decreasing intervals with which we see alternating
of party coalitions at the national level. Identifying some features typical to coalition politics
in India, E. Sridharan (2004: 5418-5425) argues that coalition politics in India is of the
opportunistic kind , also alled offi e seeki g i so fa as asso iatio
ith a pa ti ula
ideology or agenda is weak amongst parties and politicians. This feature is exacerbated on
a ou t of the si gle-member district, simple plurality (SMSP) electoral system wherein
parties atte pt to pool otes
fo gi g oalitio s o th ough seat a a ge e ts to
p e e t splitti g of otes .
This logic is carried forth even in government formation. The party with the majority of
votes which leads the coalition and government prefers to keep all its allies even though
the
a e a su plus as the a t as a he k o de a ds of othe allies ithi the
coalition and also alliances for the sake of votes at the national level or the sub-national
level is a continuing feature of electoral politics (ibid: 5418). Also the federal arrangement
makes national parties dependent on regional/state parties to be able to build together a
credible coalition at the national level. Hence there is a tendency to forge alliances with
smaller third or fourth parties which may have concentrated electoral support in certain
areas to be able to succeed at the sub-national level which in turn would add to its chances
of victory at the national level. For the coalition to be a plausible proposition it is essential
that the concerned party not be the principal or one of the two main parties in the state but
rather be at the third or fourth position and only then can it forge alliances. This has been
one of the reasons why the Congress resisted electoral alliances till the late 1990s and
seriously pursued pre-election alliances only in the 2004 Lok Sabha election. Also given the
opportunistic nature of party politics in India, the ideological constraints of being in
opposition at the state level are usually overseen at the national level (ibid: 5419).
The Bharatiya Janata Party emerged as a formidable force on the national scene following
the 1989 Lok Sabha election in which having won 80 seats it propped up the National Front
government of V.P.Singh which was the first minority coalition government to be formed
after independence.1 The first chance that the BJP had of forming a government on its own
came in 1996 when Atal Bihari Vajpayee was sworn in as prime minister for 13 days. The
government fell as a coalition of thirteen parties both regional and state-wide formed a
United Front to block the BJP from coming to power. 2 In elections held in 1998 the BJP once
again formed the government heading a 17 party coalition which included regional parties
too. However the coalition lasted only 13 months as the All India Anna Dravida Munnetra
Khazagham (AIADMK) withdrew support following disagreement on reservation policy. The
1
The Janata Party which was formed following the merger of the Congress (O), Jan Sangh, Bharatiya Lok Dal
(BLD) and the Socialist Party won 295 seats and 41% vote share in the 1977 Lok Sabha elections. It was
supported by the CPM, DMK and the Akali Dal while the Congress was supported by the AIADMK and the
CPI. In 1989 the National front government collapsed after 11 months following differences with the BJP over
the ‘Mandir’ and ‘Mandal’ issues and came to be replaced by another National Front government which was
headed by Chandrashekhar and supported by the Congress from outside. This government lasted 5 months
2
The four regional parties included the Asom Gana Parishad (AGP), the Dravida Munnetra Khazagam (DMK),
The Tamil Maanila Congress (TMC) and the Telugu Desam Party (TDP). The Government was headed by
H.D.Dewe Gowda but lasted only 7 months. This was because the Congress withdrew support as the front
refused to oust the DMK from the government which the Congress insisted on.
158
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
NDA returned to power in 1999 with an even bigger pre-election coalition3 and stayed in
power for a full five year term.
Changing Nature of Electoral Campaigning
The election campaign that the NDA launched prior to the 2004 Lok Sabha elections took on
the aptio of I dia “hi i g 4 creating the impression of a resurgent India riding high on the
urban outh a d iddle lasses. The issue of de elop e t that the pa t sought to
foreground was to be conveyed by extensive use of the media and information technology
including sms, e-mail and customised telephonic speeches of the prime minister which could
be heard by dialling a particular number. Also the Vision 2020 document that the party
unveiled prior to the election diluted the three issues that had led to the BJP being
ide tified as the
a di - ali pa t Deshpa de a d I e ,
a el a ogatio of
article 370, building of the Ram Mandir in Ayodhya and enforcing a Uniform Civil Code
UCC . The Vajpa ee fa to
as also see as iti al to the ele tio
a paig a d
Vajpa ee s fo eig o e tu es ith Pakista as ell as su esses i ludi g i Ja
u and
Kashmir and the North-east were also highlighted in the campaign. The euphoria of the
I dia “hi i g a paig spilled o e o the edia too a d al ost all poll p edi tio s e e
buoyant about the success of the NDA in the elections. However towards the closing of the
campaign, predictions of the NDA losing ground across constituencies also starting
circulating5. While poll-predictions by themselves can be very unreliable which became
evident in the 2004 election itself, they do indicate the link between the nature and
progress of the campaign and its reception by the electorate thereby highlighting the corelation between the nature of the campaign and electoral success.
Following the defeat of the party in the 2004 Lok Sabha election, the pledge to return to
ideolog a d idealis
the BJP a ked a lea hoi e i fa ou of Na e d a Modi a d a
eclipsing of the liberal voice of Atal Bihari Vajpayee within the party. While the BJP is known
to shun individualism the only exception was in terms of these two leaders. The Congress
campaign in 2004 also saw a shift in so far as instead of running a broad based campaign
there was greater attention to detail. Mapping of constituency character and articulating
appeals in accordance with local concerns became a marked feature of the campaign6. Also
i stead of a fo us o allies, the pa t p o oted ass o ta t a paig i g. “o ia Ga dhi s
oad sho i Utta P adesh as see as a popula
o e hi h i spi ed the BJP leade
Kalyan Singh to also embark on a similar road show. The Congress campaign included
3
The coalition of the NDA in 1999 included 24 parties.
The India Shining campaign was conceived by Nirvik Singh of Grey Worldwide. Pramod Mahajan who was
appointed the chairman of the BJP’s Central Election Committee in 2003 is said to have spent nearly 100 crores
on the election campaign. The 2004 election was the first in which electronic voting machines were used.
5
Over a period of three months the NDA’s electoral fortunes were predicted to have fallen from 320 seats to
winning a majority by a miniscule 10 seats according to an ORG-MARG poll. Chawla (2004) writes that while
the popularity of Vajpayee as a leader remained undiminished when compared with Sonia Gandhi, the NDA had
lost its ‘shine’ on account of what he calls a failure “...to market the ‘Shinning India’ slogan with a sense of
responsibility.”(Ibid.) Reasons for decreasing popularity of the Congress was on account of compromises with
regional parties which gained on account of the alliance but could not contribute towards expanding the
Congress base. On the other hand Chawla argues that the BJP adopted a policy similar to ‘corporate technique
of acquisitions and mergers’ when dealing with alliances. Abandoning the focus on ‘Hindutva’, the party laid
emphasis on development and “inclusiveness” (Ibid)
6
It is said that the Congress had underestimated the impact that Hema Malini’s campaigning had on influencing
the Jat vote in Rajasthan in the assembly election held prior to the Lok Sabha election. Learning from the
experience the Congress too started using celebrities as star campaigners.
4
159
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
forging of many pre-poll alliances which was also a marked departure from the earlier party
esolutio s that st essed o goi g alo e i the ele tio 7The importance of forging alliances
is evident from the fact that the difference between the seats won by the Congress and the
BJP was just 7 in the 2004 Lok Sabha election. However while Congress allies added 46 seats
propping up the UPA, the NDA lost 27 seats on account of loss of political allies (Sridharan,
2004:5419)
The 2009 electoral campaign saw many allies deserting both the UPA and the NDA 8 The
Co g ess a paig also alled the Jai Ho a paig 9 fo used o the aa ad i o
o
a . The BJP too etaliated ith its o so g Bha Ho . Ho e e the Co g ess performed
spectacularly with the seat gap between the Congress and the BJP increasing to 90 seats and
the difference in vote percentage approximating 10 percentage points. The Congress victory
was also unexpected with most opinion polls predicting a Congress defeat.
The 2014 Lok Sabha campaign saw a clear shift in leadership patterns with the older leaders
giving way to the elevation of Narendra Modi as the prime-ministerial candidate. The shift
was also evident in renewed emphasis on governance as opposed to development which
also highlights the difference between the 2004 and 2014 election campaign of the BJP.
Modi was able to showcase the Gujarat model of development as an instance of successful
governance initiatives while Vajpayee had no such narrative to make use of. The hint of
authoritarianism acted as the perfect foil to the continuing vacillation of the Congress
leadership in the UPA government. Role of the corporate sector in funding and backing the
BJP a d i pa ti ula Na e d a Modi s ele tio campaign cannot be under-estimated. The
organisational acumen is also undeniable given the RSS link of Narendra Modi and his
compatriots such as Amit Shah. In the 1980s too while L.K.Advani was trying to expand the
base of the party the RSS had forwarded Pracharaks (bachelor-activists) such as Narendra
Modi, K.N.Govindacharya and Sanjay Joshi to consolidate the grass-roots organisation. In
the 2014 campaign too RSS spokesperson Ram Madhav as well as Shiv Prakash who comes
from western Uttar Pradesh played a key role in the success of the campaign particularly in
Uttar Pradesh. (Ramakrishnan 2014)
However the use of social-media and real time responses were a first in campaign
strategies. The campaign included a multi-pronged approach including the social media,
mass media, robo-calls to voters and marking of potential volunteers who were co-opted
o e the dialled a u e to hea Na e d a Modi s e o ded spee hes. Apa t f o the
innumerable rallies and road shows that Modi conducted, there was also a provision for
holographic presence of the leader in constituencies which he could not personally visit. The
Congress party in turn was unable to project either a leader or a vision. There remained
7
The Congress approach of not forging alliances was based on the resolution adopted at the Pachmarhi session
of 1998 which was subsequently revised at the Shimla Conclave in 2003 following defeat of the party in the
three state assembly elections. The Congress allies numbered 18 in the 2004 Lok Sabha election. The Congress
allies that were dropped since 1999 included Rashtriya Lok Dal (RLD) and the AIADMK party. The allies of
the NDA were 12 in number, with many opting out of the coalition prior to the election and another 5 joining
the coalition. For details of changes in allies see Sridharan (2004)
8
In 2009, the Congress lost the RJD (Rashtriya Janata Dal) and the Ram Vilas Paswan led Lok Janshakti Party
(LJP) while the BJD (Biju Janata Dal) left the NDA alliance apart from other
9
Having secured the rights for this Oscar winning song, the Congress used it for purposes of campaign
advertising.
160
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
uncertainty on whether to mold the campaign around the government s a hie e e ts
spread over a decade or to target Modi over his secular or caste or occupational credentials.
Conclusion
Coalitions and campaigns represent the immediacy of the electoral exercise. Given the
atu e of oalitio s i I dia hi h a e oppo tu isti a d the efo e t a sie t, post-poll linkups are as common as pre-poll alliances. The fluidity of coalition politics may actually
account for the return to power of a one party majority government namely of the BJP
which has however retained the NDA, given the continuing need to forge alliances at the
sub-national level. This in turn validates the continuing importance of regional and state
parties which won 145 seats nationally in the 2014 election even when not in alliance with
either one of the two major national coalitions, namely the UPA and the NDA10, pointing to
an erosion of the two party system on account of the decimation of the Congress party.
While alliances definitely revived the fortunes of the Congress party in the 2004 Lok Sabha
election, the defeat in 2014 was also on account of a weak campaign strategy that was
unable to effectively communicate the development achievements of the party, in particular
spear-heading of various capability enhancing rights and welfare linked entitlements. Apart
f o a ti-i u e
the BJP led a paig effe ti el
a keted the Guja at odel of
go e a e . I doi g so the BJP also tapped i to the o stitue
that the Aa Aad i
Party (AAP) was hoping to gain but was unable to do so as organisationally it was in its
infancy. In a polity where ideological differences have blurred marked by overlapping
developmental visions, the content and effectiveness of political and electoral
communication as part of the election campaign became a salient variable.
References
Chawla, Prabhu 2004. Shift and Shine, India Today, April 26. Retrieved from
http://indiatoday.intoday.in/story/nda-losing-shine-due-to-overconfidence-and-arroganceof-its-leaders/1/196171.html Downloaded on 2/08/2014
Deshpande, Rajeev and Iyer, Lakshmi 2004. Inside the Fog of War, India Today, March 22,
Retrieved from: http://indiatoday.intoday.in/story/game-plan-of-congress-bjp-in-elections2004/1/196315.html Downloaded on 30/07/2014
Sridharan, E. 2004, Electoral Coalitions in 2004 General Elections: Theory and Evidence,
Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 39, No.51, December 18
‘a ak ish a , Ve kitesh
. “ahe s a , Frontline, August 8, Retrieved from:
http://www.frontline.in/politics/sahebs-man/article6233428.ece?homepage=true
Downloaded on 2/08/2014
10
For instance the Biju Janata Dal (BJD) won 20 out of 21 seats contested in Orissa, the AIADMK won 37 out
of the 40 seats that it contested in Tamil Nadu and the Trinamool Congress (TMC) won 34 seats.
161
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Table 1.1: Shifts in seats won by the BJP and Congress Party (1999-2014) Lok Sabha
Elections
Source: Statistical Reports of the Election Commission of India. Retrieved from:
http://eci.nic.in/eci_main1/ElectionStatistics.aspx Downloaded on 2/08/2014
Table 1.2: Shifts in vote percentage of the BJP and Congress Party (1999-2014) Lok Sabha
Elections
Source: Statistical Reports of the Election Commission of India. Retrieved from:
http://eci.nic.in/eci_main1/ElectionStatistics.aspx Downloaded on 2/08/2014
162
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
New Governance, Public Policy, and Social Movements
in India: Rethinking MKSS Movement and RTI Act
Ramesh Kumar
Department of Political Science, School of Social Sciences,
University of Hyderabad, Hyderabad
Abstract
Good governance was one of the slogans that were raised under the new governance
banner in the late 20th century. Has it lived its zenith? Is it fading away from governance
scholarship when India continues to chant the mantra of development, good governance,
and stability? New governance and related practices have been a matter of debate since
1970s. Nonetheless, when new governance was emerging in 1970s, a social movement was
also in the making in the state of Rajasthan -namely, MKKS movement, which would later
contribute for a major change in public policy making i I dia. MK““ o e e t s
contribution in the form of RTI Act, a milestone in local to national governing practices, is a
part of popular knowledge now; adding something more would be useful. This paper tries to
do the same by relocating MKSS movement in the governance scholarship. It addresses the
following two questions: How do we interpret and explain a social movement that has
added something new to governance and public policy making in India? How and where do
we locate such a movement in the new governance scholarship? The paper is based mainly
on archival sources.
Keywords: New Governance, Public Policy, Social Movements
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
I his fi st e e essage to I dia just afte taki g oath as the ou t s th Prime Minister,
Na e d a Modi de la ed people s a date to his pa t as a a date fo de elop e t, good
governance and stabilit , a d u ged the people to pa ti ipate a ti el i taki g I dia s
development journey to new heights. This was a message of the Prime Minister of the
largest democracy on this planet in the 21st century. What would be these new heights in
the field of development and good governance? Only time will tell. In this paper, however,
e a e i te ested o e i looki g at hat heights ha e people s o t i utio take i
I dia s de elop e t a d go e a e jou e so fa . Fo this pu pose, e fo us o the issue
of transparency and accountability in governance and public policy with specific reference
to participation of civil society actors. In this vein, an attempt has been made to interpret
and explain the contribution of MKSS Movement and Right to Information Act (hereafter,
RTI Act) to new governance scholarship.
The main concern of this paper is to understand changing patterns of governance and the
role of civil society movements in making and implementation of public policy in India. Civil
163
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
society movements are treated here as actors in governing practices along with
bureaucracy. The paper consists of three sections. It begins with a clarificatory discussion on
key concepts used in this paper. Next is a discussion on general features of MKSS movement
and RTI Act. The final section is an attempt to ground this movement and the act within the
new governance scholarship. The paper ends with a concluding remark on the relationship
between new governance, public policy, and civil society movements.
New Governance and Social Movements—Conceptual Aspects
New Governance: At abstract level, governance as a pattern of rule is not a new
phenomenon (Mark Bevir: 2007). However, as a signifier of change in the meaning of
government, that is, as a new process or method of governing society or changed conditions
of ordered rule (Finer:1970, cited by Rhodes: 2012), governance refers to changes in the
nature of the state that became evident after the public sector reforms of the 1980s and
1990s —which apparently led to a "shift from a hierarchic bureaucracy to a greater use of
market and networks"; as such, governance raises issues about public policy and democracy
(Mark Bevir: ibid). Clearly, in its new sense, governance refers to something broader than
government thereby transcending the boundaries of a monolithic state centric perspective
on patterns of rule.
One of the modes of governance that entered into India from American and European
democracies through the neo-liberal reforms of the 1990s in terms of liberalization,
globalization, and privatization was subsequently understood and explained as good
governance. This mode of governance is in many ways still popular in the literature on
development and governance in India; however, it is not a matter of investigation in this
paper. We shall focus here rather on the mode of governance that calls for decentralized
decision-making and bottom up approach to policy making involving civil society actors in
the form of mass movements. Given, we shall build upon the mode of governance that
involves governing through resistance offered by actors of bureaucracy as well as from civil
society actors. Governance through resistance involves contingent and contested nature of
go e i g a d the e poi ts to a to s eliefs that a e i he ited and modified in different
contexts in the form of different traditions (Mark Bevir: 2009). Viewed from this perspective
the nature of governance is closely related to the nature of social movements in a particular
context.
Social Movements: The context and the nature of social movements are the two major oftdiscussed trends in the studies on social movements in India. One can find the former in the
studies of scholars such as Ghanshyam Shah (1990) and M.S.A Rao (1979) and, the latter in
the studies of Rajani Kothari (1984) and D.L. Seth (2004). These and other scholars have also
highlighted social movements at grassroots level by treating them as actors of non-party
politi al p o ess. “hah a d ‘ao s studies sho e ide es of st o g elatio ship et ee
collective mobilization, leadership and organization and, an interdependent linkage
between ideology and leadership of a social movement. Rajani Kothari locates the rise and
growth of non-party political process in the context of declining party system, weakening
welfare power of the state, and growing corruption in the public sector. D.L. Seth situates
these grassroots movements or micro-movements in the process of globalization; the
autho
has dis ussed “eth s ie i this ega d. No etheless, he it comes to the
ways of interaction with the state and market, one finds non-violence as the more preferred
164
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
strategy of collective resistance employed by these movements. MKSS movement is also a
non- iole t peoples o e e t fo a ou ta le a d t a spa e t governance.
MKSS Movement and RTI Act
MK““ o e e t is a people s o e e t agai st elites lai to e lusi e ule a d
rationalize processes and practices of governance through resistance. The prime cause
responsible for the emergence of this movement was wo ke s poo peasa ts a d la o e s
demand for the money from elites who were acting as rulers, which they earned through
their labour. Doubtless, MKSS is deeply committed to the cause of poor peasants and
laborers. In the next few paragraphs, we shall discuss ideological underpinnings and
leadership of MKSS that contributed for mass mobilization thereby transforming masses
into policy makers, and RTI Act as a policy by the public—for the public. In so doing, we shall
adhere to bottom-up approach to understand the making of a public policy such as RTI Act.
MKSS Movement—Ideology, Leadership, and Mobilization: MKSS considers itself as a
peoples o ga izatio a d a pa t of o -party political process in India. While working in the
mainstream and not in a tribal area, it is interested in reforming electoral process in favor of
participatory democracy. Unlike a trade Union, it believes in working in all areas of peasants
a d o ke s life a gi g f o la d issues to go e a e. As a o ga izatio , MK““ does ot
follow any pre-defined set of ideology. Because it believes that, the people who are seeking
to bring about change should define an ideology through their own words. MKSS believes
that It has ee oth a st e gth a d a eak ess, ot to defi e a p e-set ideology. For the
people it has been easier to understand and adjust to a theory that has evolved through
their immediate needs, never seen in isolation and always related to larger political, social
a d othe alues i so iet “to of MK““: http://www.mkssindia.org).
Clearly, MKSS believes in the contingent and contested nature of ideology, which can be
identified here as a belief in the tradition of participatory governance. Adherence to such an
ideology is because of its belief in collective leadership and collective decision-making. It
does not recognize the state that stands external to citizens, hence does not draw a line
et ee politi al a d i il so iet . Its sloga s i di ate this positio : HAMA‘A PAI“AHAMA‘A HI“AB! Ou Mo e a d ou A ou ts ; `“A‘KA‘ HAMA‘E AAP KI… NAHIN KI“I KE
BAAP KI! The “tate is ou s ot the i he ita e of a feudal fe
i id .
MKSS leaders such as Aruna Roy and Nikhil Dey treat the contemporary state as a
mechanism used b
ested i te ests i
i i izi g the i pa t of people s o ilisatio
ignoring, promising but not delivering, delaying, and finally wearing out and deflating
people s de a ds fo ha ge
usi g all ea s. ‘o la els it as a pea eful et dia oli al
method of maintaining the status quo (Chasing a Right: http://www.mkssindia.org). Roy
elie es it esse tial fo the itize s to ask uestio s, de a d a s e s, suggest ha ges,
oppose where necessary, build where possible, and at the very least become informed
pa ti ipa ts i the de isio s that a e goi g to affe t thei li es
.
According to Roy, the state owes much to its citizens in making it an informed and
i depe de t e tit : The de a d fo de ate a d dis ussio of poli ies i the pu li do ai ,
the right to make informed choices, the demand for transparency and accountability are the
poo pe so s a d the o di a
itize s gift to aki g I dia eall i depe de t. The astute
165
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
commonsense of the ordinary citizen has raised the most scientific, intelligent arguments
ithout ja go o atio alizatio
. “u h a a gu e t of MK““ o e e t ega di g
public policy making in India has already culminated into what is now called as RTI Act.
RTI Act—A Public Policy by the Public, for the Public: Apparently, RTI Act, a milestone in
local to national governing practices, is not a result of welfare governance nor it is a
o se ue e of u eau ati state s appli atio of e tools of go e a e su h as Ne
Public Management etc. On the contrary, this act appears as an outcome of civil society
a to s su h as MK““ leade s a d suppo te s o siste t a d estless a paig s, agitatio s,
and negotiations with civil servants and politicians at various levels of public governance.
This is evident from the very provisions of the Act. For example, chapter two of the Act
includes those obligations of public authorities that the bureaucratic state has always
refused to acknowledge let alone the question of following such obligations. These
obligations are a demand fro the people fo a ou ta ilit . It is the people s de a d that
every public authority shall maintain its record and publish relevant information about their
official decisions that involve issues of public interest (See RTI Act 2005, Chapter II: 2-4). It is
the people s de a d that the state shall do this i a s ste ati
a e
a of
designating Public Information Officers at various levels of organization.
RTI Act is a public policy that has laid down new foundations of governance thereby opening
up new horizons of participatory governance in the 21 st century India. This newness in
go e i g i the fo of pa ti ipato pu li poli
aki g has ste
ed f o the people s
belief in responsible collective decision making through the ways of large-scale mass
mobilization aimed at raising public awareness on issues of public interest. Such an interplay
of mass-mobilization and public policymaking has raised fresh questions about our existing
understanding of governance and social movements, which are compelling to rethink
governance and social movements in the light of contribution made by civil society actors
towards public policymaking.
Rethinking Governance and Social Movements
The above discussion on MKSS movement and RTI Act suggests that the act is an outcome of
esista e offe ed
the MK““ leade ship to elites a s of uli g a d atio alizi g pu li
policy. Since governance is understood in this paper as contingent and contested practices
and processes of human beings concerning their aims and objectives of social organization,
we can think of governance in terms of a multidimensional affair where rulers and the ruled
adhere to one or other types of resistance. By terming resistance as a mode of governance,
we are moving away from the rational choice perspective that emphasizes coercion as a
mode of governance.
Resistance as a Mode of Governance: D a i g upo Be i a d ‘hodes
ie s a out
the ‘s of ules, atio alities, a d esista e, e a efe to esista e as o ti ge t a d
contested processes and practices surrounding traditions of beliefs about collective coexistence in various forms of social organization that are inherited and modified by human
beings in different historical contexts. Here, we can make a distinction between resistance
and coercion. Unlike resistance, coercion is biased in favour of the rulers and therefore it
te ds to ask o push a a the ule s o te tual o histo i all g ou ded eliefs a out
issues of collective co-existence from public observation thereby allowing them to escape
166
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
public scrutiny. Hence, resistance is relatively an appropriate term for locating the core of
governing processes and practices. It follows then that change is initiated and brought about
mainly through resistance and not through coercion driven consent, coercion and consent
become secondary instruments in the process of change. So far, we have argued that
resistance can be termed as a mode of governance. However, can we think of governance
without power? Certainly not. If so, then where do we locate power? How do we relate
power to resistance?
Decentred Power as the Core of Resistance: When we assume resistance as a mode of
governance, we are in fact reconfiguring power by decentering it and thereby displacing it
from its exclusive belongingness to rulers or the ruled. For the purpose of this paper, we
adhere to a decentred view of power. This view is inspired by the above-discussed
decentered theory of governance. Bevir argues postfoundationalism encourages social
scientists to rethi k po e as a fo e la ki g a
e te : If po e efe s to the a s i
which the actions of others define what any individual can and cannot do, then power
appears throughout governance. Power appears wherever people interpret and respond to
o e a othe . (2009: 259). Accordingly, power is unequally located in rulers and the ruled.
This inequality, however, is constantly in the process of change; hence, power remains a
dynamic element of human capability that continuously rises and falls in rulers and the ruled
without ever leaving either of them completely hollow. This substantiates the view that the
hollowing out of the state actors such as civil servants is a misinterpretation of location of
power in various forms of social organization including markets, civil society, and networks.
Taking the decentered view of power as a reference point, resistance may be further divided
into status quoist resistance and transformative resistance. Status quoist resistance refers
mainly to practices of the rulers that are realized in the form of resistance to participatory
governing processes and practices. As such, it involves resistance in favour of existing
traditions of governance against change, which is exercised by rulers through incremental
processes and practices of public policymaking and implementation at various levels of
social organization. Transformative resistance refers mainly to practices of the ruled that are
actualized in the form of mass movements involving chiefly agitations, protests, and
collective disobedience, which are nothing else but some elements of social movements. In
other words, we can think of a social movement as an expression of transformative
resistance. In the case of MKSS movement too, one can say that this movement is an
expression of transformative resistance.
Public Policy as an Outcome of Resistance: The RTI Act 2005 is a good example of the
constructive role played by resistance in the making of a public policy in a developing
country like India. If one navigates through the chronology of events that unfolded prior to
2005, one can find that status quoist resistance can be masked with incremental policy
rules. Often it is status quoist resistance that is given the ultimate voice in a public policy.
One can say that power is exercised by rulers over the ruled when status quoist resistance is
transformed into a non-threatening public policy practice of governing. The state actors do
this, to epeat A u a ‘o ,
i i izi g the i pa t of people s o ilisatio
ig o i g,
promising ut ot deli e i g, dela i g, a d fi all
ea i g out a d deflati g people s
demands for change by using all means. On the other hand, power is exercised by the
people when they launch the process of policy making in the form of public debate at
167
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
various platforms using mass mobilization as a way of arriving at broad agreements on core
features of that policy. Consistent mass mobilization with the objective to transform
people s de a d o e i g pu li i te est i to poli is a fo
of people s e e ise of
power in governing. All this substantiates the argument that public policymaking is not a
one-way process and that a public policy is an outcome of the interplay of status quoist
resistance and transformative resistance.
Conclusion
It becomes clear from our discussion on governance and social movements with reference
to public policy making through the example of MKSS Movement and RTI Act that
governance can also be viewed in terms of resistance (which include status quoist resistance
and transformative resistance), and that social movements can be interpreted as an
e p essio of esista e as a ode of go e a e. MK““ led itize s i itiati e to a ds
public policymaking is an example of decentred governance where power is unequally
located in the rulers and the ruled. The core of such a decentered power is constituted by
resistance and not by coercive consent.
Resistance becomes constructive when it is redirected towards collective interest with the
ai to u pa k a d u load the ule s hege o i t aditions of governance. However, the
presence of status quoist resistance in governing processes and practices points to the fact
that the state has not withdrawn from governing practices. Nonetheless, as clear from our
example of MKSS movement, the state has become more participatory, which again
suggests decentering of governance. Given the dynamic nature of power, participatory
governance remains always open to contestation and contingency.
References
Bevir, Mark. (2007). Public Governance, Vol.1, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd.
____________ (2009). A Theory of Governance, University of California Press
Bevir, Mark and R.A.W. Rhodes. (2010). The State as Cultural Practice, Oxford
University Press
Http://www.mkssindia.org
Http://Pmindia.Nic.In
Http://Rti.Gov.In
Kumar, Ramesh. (2013). Globalization and Social Movements in North India: A Comparative
A al sis of “ele t Agitatio s fo Justi e , Journal of Politics & Governance,
Vol. 2, No. 3/4,150.
Kotha i, ‘aja i.
. The No -Party Political Process , Economic and Political Weekly,
February, 4, 216-224
Rao, M.S.A. (1979). Social Movements in India, Vol. One, New Delhi: Manohar
Publications
Rhodes, R.A.W.
. Wa es of Go e a e , i Oxford Handbook of Governance, Oxford
University Press: New York
Right to Information Act, 2005
‘o , A u a.
. I fo atio , De o a a d Ethi s , T elfth “h i. B.V. Na a a
Reddy Memorial Lecture, at Indian institute of World Culture, Bangalore.
Retrieved from http://www.mkssindia.org
168
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
___________ (2007). The idea of I dia , Livemint & The Wallstreet Journal, May 11.
Retrieved from http://www.livemint.com
Seth, D.L. (2004). Globalization and New Politics of Micro-Movements, Economic and
Political Weekly, Vol. 39, No. 1 (Jan. 3-9, 2004), 45-58. Retrieved from
http://www.epw.in
Shah, Ghanshyam. (1990). Social Movements in India: A Review of Literature, New Delhi:
Sage Publications
169
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
170
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Debunking the Myths & Debilities: High Aspirations
from the Newly Elected Government in India
Parag Chandra
Krishnagar Government College, Krishnagar, Nadia
Abstract
The hopes and dreams of an aspiring new middle class have been affirmed for the first time
in Indian history after the formation of the newly elected government in our country.
Following the pre-election agenda – ha ge ou a elie e i , futu e of the outh is ope ,
not pre-dete i ed, a d a e alte ed thei o a tio s - we now need a new vision for
the Indian economy, and it is going to take all the political and economic skills of the new
Prime Minister and his economic team to formalize, articulate, and realize that vision. We
should be able to pave the way for robust growth in our economy, based on solid
foundations, not the ephemeral debt-based growth. For this, I intend to recount some of
the myths that have been so powerful in shaping, or misshaping, our economic policies that
it is worth summarizing in this essay.
Keywords: Invisible hand, Deficit reduction, Global capitalism
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
In terms of policy approach, the newly elected government repeatedly emphasizes on
de elop e t ith good go e a e . I te t ook e o o i s, de elop e t is a ode
o d fo oppo tu it i the o petiti e a ket pla e that Ada “ ith alled a natural
s ste of li e t . The government in this system helps create an enabling environment that
allows free individuals to pursue their interests peacefully in an open, transparent market.
Afte that, a i isi le ha d helps gradually to lift people into a dignified, middle class life,
raising living standards all around. The theoretical formalization of this idea is called the
fi st elfa e theo e of e o o i s - when markets work perfectly, no one can be made
better off without making someone else worse off. Modern economics with its faith in free
markets, had promised prosperity for all. The much-touted New Economy- the amazing
innovations and financial engineering, was supposed to enable better risk management and
enhance welfare. But reality is far from there- there are handsome instances in which
markets work imperfectly. The world wise great recession that has been started since 2008,
has shattered these illusions. In the aftermath of the recent financial crisis, no one today
would believe that the a ke s pu suit of thei self-interest has led to the wellbeing of the
globe. It forces theorists to rethink long-cherished views of the free market. In this
perspective, we need a politically expedient strategy from the newly elected government in
India. I take this opportunity to illustrate some of the myths in the following section, which
171
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
have been so powerful in shaping, or misshaping, our own economic policies that it is worth
summarizing them.
The myth of invisible hand
Unfettered markets lead, as if by an invisible hand, to efficient outcomes- that each
individual, in pursuing his own interest, advances the general interest of the economy.
Advocates of American-style capitalism are greatly influenced by this idea and this system,
according to them, is the best. Now the research question is: is it certain that if our
government attempts to reinforce this idea, it will have the resilience to meet the vision
that they propagated in their pre-election campaign?
The answer is: at most, it leads to the well-being of top one percent with the rest of the
society bearing the cost (Basu, 2011). While there may be underlying economic forces at
play, politics have shaped the market, and then shaped it in ways that advantage the top at
the expense of the rest. I try to explain here how our inequality gets reflected in every
important decision that we make as a nation- from our budget to monetary policy and even
to our system of justice, for the inability of our policy makers and intellectual thinkers to
identify this myth. In India, we have a political system so far that has been working day in
and day out to move money from the bottom and middle to the top- the system is so
inefficient that the gains to the top are far less than loses to the middle and bottom. We are,
in fact, continuously paying a high price for our growing and outsize inequality.
Markets work perfectly, when private rewards and social benefits are well aligned (as per
the Marginal-Product theory of economics). But the present world of lying and cheating
(created by imperfect information) continuously identify individuals (say, foreign
institutional investors, corporate executives in our country) with the opportunity to act in
ways that allow them to benefit at the expense of others (say, small and marginal farmers,
shareholders, consumers), whom they are supposed to serve (this is called P i ipal-Agent
p o le
in the theory of information economics). Perverse incentives may have
encouraged shortsighted and risky behaviour among corporate executives, bankers etc., so
that corporate incentives are not well aligned with social returns, and pursuit of their selfinterest had not led to the well-being of all (as it was originally portrayed in the doctrine of
i isi le ha d ).1
Herein lies the predominant role of the newly elected government in our country to design
policies (taxes and regulations) that bring private incentives and social return into proper
alignment. Broadly speaking, in our country, (i) markets were neither efficient nor stable, (ii)
the political system had no tendency to rectify market failures, and (iii) economic and
political systems are fundamentally unfair. So, our aspirations from the newly formed
government is to debunk the myth of invisible hand and unfettered market (where
everything was acceptable and no one was accountable so far in our country), so that
national citizens have the faith in democracy and young people who have studied hard and
done everything, get fair job as per their requisite qualifications.
The myth of deficit reduction
The myth suggests that, if, say, India is in a recession and has large fiscal deficits, cutting
those deficits will bring back prosperity. This myth reinforces the ideology of fiscal
172
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
conservatism- making economic downturn even worse. The fiscal deficit in India in 2013-14
stood at 4.5% of GDP, lower than 4.6% projected in the revised estimate, mainly on account
of curbs on government expenditure (Source: CSO). However, data revealed by the Central
Statistical Organization (CSO) showed that the economy expanded at the rate of 4.6% in the
fourth quarter of 2013-14 compared with a similar growth in the previous quarter. Indian
economy posting two consecutive years of below 5% growth is the worst performance of
Asia s thi d la gest e o o i o e t o de ades, despite o tai i g fis al defi it. It is ei g
hurt by the myth of deficit reduction. The reason is the following.
Macroeconomic theory tells us that the deficit reduction would lead to lower long term
interest rate, thereby increasing investment, and increased investment would reignite the
economy. Indian policy makers believe this theory to contain fiscal deficit. They hoped that
increased investment from lower long term interest rate would more than offset the direct
effect of higher taxes and lower government expenditure. But there are problems in this
theory, which our policymakers unfortunately failed to understand or simply ignored.
If the bond market believe that depicts would decline in the future, interest rates would
come down. Then bond price may go up and bond traders may sell their bonds in the hope
of profit. So, the success of the policy of deficit reduction (through generating investment)
would largely be determined by the judgments of the bond traders- to what extent bond
traders would be willing to invest in bonds in the face of higher bond price. Secondly,
Keynes had once explained the importance of monetary policy in a recession by comparing
it to pushing on a string. In India, when sales are plummeting, lowering the interest rate
from, say 4% to 3%, will not induce firms to build a new factory or buy new machines.
Excess capacity typically increases markedly as the recession gains momentum. Given these
uncertainties, even a zero interest rate might not be able to resuscitate the Indian economy.
If the investment does not respond much to interest rates, in spite of the repeatedly
lowering interest rate, then the policy of deficit reduction becomes backfiring and it is
exactly being happened in our economy.
So, national citizens of our country aspire that the newly elected government would realize
that the attempt at deficit reduction is quixotic. Instead it would recommend an
expansionary fiscal policy, fueled, if necessary, by larger deficits. In the short run, deficits are
absolutely essential to reignite the economy- since economic and social costs of prolonging
a recession are enormous, far greater than the costs associated with the increase in deficit.
The myth of global capitalism
With the International Monetary Fund at the centre of international economic policy, it was
no wonder that the free flow of capital became the centre piece. It provided the new
opportunities for profits for Wall Street of America, but it exposed the developing countries,
like India, to enormous risks without reward. Growth was slightly enhanced as capital
flowed in, yet the devastation that was brought about as capital flowed out, or as the
interest rates that they had to pay to keep in, far exceeded those temporary benefits. I
explain it with the following example.
Suppose a firm in India borrows short term US$ 100 million from an American bank. India
knows that the American bank may at any time demand to have its dollar back, refusing to
173
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
roll over its loans. American financial markets look at whether India has set aside enough
dollar reserves to meet the short term dollar obligations, not just of the government but of
the firms within the country. When there is shortfall of reserves, there is a good chance that
US financial markets will panic. Government, knowing this, has adopted prudential
standards of putting aside more reserves even when private firms borrow more in dollars.
This means that the government will have to set aside US$ 100 million at least in reserves.
Net, India as a whole receives nothing. But it pays the US, say, $ 18 million in interest, and
receives back, on its reserves, less than $ 2 million (from low-interest-paying US government
o ds . This a e good fo g o th i the U“ e o o , good fo A e i a s fis al positio ,
but it has to be bad for our own country.
In the name of global capitalism, United States pride itself of its ability to shift risks from
those more able to bear (developed countries), to those less able to bear it (poor developing
countries). Money should flow from rich countries to the poor by principles (which were the
agenda of global capitalism). Yet, year after year, exactly the opposite occurs. We hope that
the new government puts its true endeavour to debunk the myth by downsizing global
capitalism. Common tax payers of our country now aspire that the financial sector is
supposed to ensure that funds go to where the returns to society is the highest with the
onset of the newly elected government. It had clearly failed so far. So far, financial firms
have come to see their business as an end in itself and prided themselves on its size and
profitability. But an ideal financial system should be a means to an end, not an end in itself,
to reignite our economy.
Concluding thoughts
It is not so early to be clear whether the gambles the new Prime Minister and his economic
advisory team take, would pay off. Indian economy may have been off life support and
pulled back from the brink of disaster- this is the general expectation of common citizens
and tax payers in our country. The best that could be said for Indian economy is that it is
expected to be at the end of a f eefall - a decline without an end insight. But it should be
kept in mind that the end of f eefall is not the same as a return to normalcy.
The resumption of growth means that in a technical sense, the recession is over. Economists
define a recession as two or more quarters of negative growth. When growth turns positive,
no matter how anemic, policy makers declare the end of the recession. In that sense, Indian
economy is free of any recession though the growth rate is still too poor. But what is
important is that to workers, the economy is still in recession when unemployment is high,
and especially when it is growing since the global recession of 2009. To business, the
economy is in recession so long as they see excess capacity, which means the economy is
ope ati g elo its pote tial. As lo g as the e is e ess apa it , the o t i est hate e
lower be the interest rate.
The recovery of stock prices or sensex from their lows is often taken as a barometer of the
restoration of the economic health. Unfortunately, an increase in stock market prices may
not necessarily indicate that our economy is performing well. Stock market prices may rise
because the Central Bank is flooding the economy with liquidity, and rate of interest is low,
so stocks look much better than bond. The flood of liquidity coming from the Central Bank
or the short-sighted foreign institutional investors, will find some outlet, hopefully leading
174
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
to more lending to business, but it could also result in a mini-asset price or stock market
bubble. Or rising stock market prices may reflect the success of firms in cutting costs- firing
workers and lowering wages. It propagates the problem further.
A robust recovery for the other elements of aggregate demand also appears problematic to
the Indian economy. Certainly, in the face of global recession, the entire world cannot
export its way to growth. In the great depression, countries try to protect themselves at the
expense of their neighbours. These are called egga -thy- eigh ou policies- adoption of
protection (imposing tariffs and other trade barriers) and competitive devaluation (making
o es u e
heape , hi h akes o e s e po t heape a d i po ts less att a ti e .
These are likely to backfire in India.
Without a strong recovery of consumption or exports, it is hard for the new government to
see how investment can recover, at least until the excess capacity in our economy expires or
fades into obsolescence. Government needs to stimulate the economy and resurrect the
financial system and re-regulate it by debunking those mentioned myths. Otherwise, the
withdrawal of stimulus spending and cutbacks in state and local spending as a result of
shortfalls in tax revenues, following the A e i a -st le apitalis , are likely to exert
further downward pressure on the Indian economy and the newly elected Prime Minister
would fail to realize his pre-poll vision- de elop e t a d good go e a e .
End-notes
1
There is a long list of flaws in the incentive structures of agents, discussed and documented
in Stiglitz (2003, 2010).
References
1. Basu, Kaushik. (2011). Beyond the invisible hand: Groundwork for a new economics,
Princeton University Press.
2. Stiglitz, J.E. (2003). The roaring nineties, W.W.Norton & Co.
3. 3. Stiglitz, J.E. (2010). Freefall, W.W.Norton & Co.
175
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
176
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Imperatives for Reforms in Indian Political System
Rajiv Ranjan
Kalinga School of Law, KIIT University, Bhubaneswar
Abstract
After 63 years of independence, India has emerged as the most progressive democracy yet
the regressive one in subsiding the basic but intense problem of our political system i.e.
inequality. Through this paper we intend to go back in time of our native politics to observe
the reasons of its existence and also find out its solutions through the model of world
politi s. This pape also th o s so e light o
“o ial Justi e th ough a ie t a d
renaissance philosophy. This paper also talks about the experiment made by nation on
so ial ep ese tatio a d poli ies hi h has put “o ial Justi e o its dead-mark. Another
plagui g p o le that is dealt i the pape is ge de justi e . This esea h pape alo g
with data explain the low presence of woman in the politics and points out the reasons for
their pathetic existence. This paper also highlights the balms for their eradication. The
above mentioned problems will be dealt with in the paper not only from a social but also a
legal perspective. The paper also attempts to ameliorate the problems by suggesting
reasonable reforms in the system by conjoining the ideologies of all political parties and
including the concept of world politics.
Keywords: Political Parties, Reforms, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
India, the largest democracy of the world, has emerged as the one of the progressive
nations in terms of upgrading its infrastructure, stabilising its unstable economy and even in
making its presence felt in world political arena. The Indian political system after
independence has done many commendable jobs like controlling corruption, abolishing
nepotism to a very large extent, bringing communal harmony in the country and the most
important one is, working towards the empowerment of women who had always been living
under the oppression inflicted by men. But at the same time the flip side of our
U de eloped Politi al “ ste
has asto ished all
sho i g flippa t attitude to a ds
many serious issues which are in need of acute reforms.
India, after independence has displayed a great pace in all departments of the work but
failed to e adi ate the asi et the eg essi e p o le of ou ou t i.e. i e ualit .
Inequality in layman terms a e defi ed as the o ditio of ei g u e ual , hi h lea l
demonstrates the fact of treating some-one not equally. And in country like India which has
promised to give equality in all sectors of life through social justice but despite of that it has
undertaken many forms such as educational inequality, Political inequality, Economical
inequality and the intense one is the Gender inequality. The presence of all forms of
177
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
i e ualities i the ou t ha pe s its g o th i
development just by dividing the society into many.
e sel
a d affe ts the hu a
Social Inequality
Social equality is a state of civilisation where people are recognised under one and unique
a e of BEING HUMAN BEING“. It s a state he e the e is o t o e e fo i h a d poo ;
where male and female share the same platform of equality; where people are not abused
on being white and black. There is no division of society on the basis of cast, creed and
colour. Social inequality is what which creates the need of social justice and it starts when
people or a social group from the society is put at disadvantageous position as compared to
other group of society and this basically happens when in opportunities, policies, politics
and education people are treated unequally. In ancient India this kind of discrimination had
categorised people on the basis of their caste, gender, region and religion. One brutest type
of consequence was the feudal zamindari system which divided India into three broad
classes i.e. landlords, tenants and the landless labour.
The landlords were the head, who used to take decision for the society whereas tenants and
landless labours were excluded along with women and tribal people from decision making
process and this was the start of social inequality in India and u fo tu atel it has t ee
eradicated even after 66 years of freedom. The caste system in India has also given birth to
the evil of social inequality. At the time of independence, the condition of lower caste
people as patheti . The
e e said e U tou ha les . These people e e su je ted to
many limitations as they were not allowed to go to temples, cremation ground and wells.
They were also treated as pollutants and were allowed to come out of their houses except
night. Women of lower caste were not allowed to wear ornaments and men were
prohibited from wearing coats. The social inequality in the country gives birth to poverty,
social dysfunction, as well as illiteracy. To take them out of this quagmire the government
has also taken several steps like constitutional provisions and safeguards for them,
representation in legislation and panchayats, reservation in service, giving education
facilities, making advisory council for them, making welfare departments in the state, giving
them scholarships and by also providing economic opportunities but still all the facilities are
not reaching the right people properly and the their adverse situation remains miserable.
Political Inequality
Politi s is said to e a patie t a s ga e. Yea s a k it as elie ed to e e s a e a ut
slowly and slowly women participation has taken this miles ahead. The Indian political
system is said to be the backbone of Indian democracy. Political parties play a very vital role
in encouraging and enabling democratic participation as it allows people from all the sectors
of the society to contribute in the governance of the country. But the root of inequality in
the politics has made the governance of the country quite biased. Political inequality
signifies that citizens in the cou t do t ha e a sa i the de isio
aki g p o ess of the
country which is clearly a dead mark for the democracy. One of the basic principles of
democracy is the equal consideration of the preferences and interest of all citizens.
Government guarantees this by providing their citizens the right of exercising the franchise
i.e. one person/one vote. It signifies that equal consideration of the preferences and needs
of the de o a should e foste ed
all politi al a ti ities. As it s ee
e tio ed i the
paper that democracy allows people from all the sectors to take part in the governance
178
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
process of the country irrespective of caste, creed and sex. But the unfortunate part of it is
that women are not allowed in majority for their active participation and this also signifies
political inequality in the country.
Women who have now become unabashed voter, are coming out of their boundaries to
write the future of the country wearing saris, burkha and even jeans as well. But when it
comes to their active participation in parliament, their presence gets negligible. According
to the pa lia e t of I dia, fe ales ote tu out has i eased f o
. %i
to
65.5% in 2014 while the increase in the male turnout for the same period is 6.5%. The above
data shows the seriousness of women about the governance and development of the
country bus still their presence in the parliament of our country is deplorable. In terms of
their voice in lower house of the country (loksabha) it is just 11% of the total strength
whereas in countries like Rwanda and Cuba, the women population in their lower houses
are 56.3% and 49% respectively. Even the countries like USA and UK they have maintained
women strength more than 20%. The bill introduced by H D Dev Gowda in 1996 for
o e s ese atio i pa lia e t of the ou t has ot ee e a ted till toda . If this
could have been passed then like panchayats women would have enjoyed their political
participation by increasing their strength to 33.3%.Margaret Thatcher had once said- if i
politics if you want something said contact a man but if you want something done contact a
o a . Ma thi k ta ks a e e e of elief that the ou t
hi h ill ha e a i u
women participation in politics will be the one which will be tomorro s leade .
Economic Inequality
History stands as testimony, money in this civilisation has stood as synonym for boon, bait,
bless, doom and what not. All wars fought, crimes undone, and numerous relations ruined
have had economic intimacy somewhere and in some way. People with less of it desire for
some. Few with some want some more and who have more of it want even more but
ealth has shelte ed itself i e fe po kets a d thus di ided u ited I dia i to ha es
a d ha es ot . HAVE“ ha e too u h of it whereas HAVE- NOT have to struggle to make
their both ends meet. The accumulation of wealth at one hand makes the other one
inferior. People with wealth get high degree of convenience, send their children to elite
schools, provide them better health facilities whereas people without it live miserably and
this gives birth to many social dis-orders like poverty, illiteracy and bad health quality
a o g people hi h o se ue tl ha pe s the p og ess of the atio . This p o le
a t
be solved by taking the wealth from haves and distributing to haves not. To improve this
disparity has not must become capable of doing something. To reduce this widened gap
between the rich and the poor, the Indian government has taken many steps like national
minimum wage system, direct and indirect taxes but still the gap has not been reduced. This
paper further has given some reforms to overcome this problem.
Gender Inequality (Gender Justice)
Gender inequality, treating people unequally on the basis of gender is wider form of
discrimination. In India the concept of gender inequality has come up with many
discriminatory practices which have pulled down the identity of women in the country.
Women in India have a lower identity as compared to men. They are cursed as a burden at
the ti e of thei i th. The ha e e e ee su je ted to p i ileges
hi h e ha e
enjoyed since time immemorial. Gender inequality is a broad concept which mainly says
179
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
three things. First, men enjoy and experience better opportunities. Second, men have
predominant power over social positions in the country like politics, economy and law.
Third, men generally hold sway in marriages or in direct social relationship in contrast to
women who also possess the same characteristics. Girls are kept out of the school as their
orthodox parents think that girls should learn household things as it would help them after
their marriages. Many girls remain illiterate which reduces their power to fight with the
world against discrimination they face.
The government after independence is working a lot against gender inequality by providing
girls with free education, books and even food .It has been now realised by all governing
institutions that education and only education can solve many of their problems. As it has
been noticed that girls who are educated understand the importance of education and go
for small family and also exhibit better health outcomes in relation to their maternal life.
Apart from that, education also helps them in realising their self-respect. They know about
their rights which they can use as a weapon in adverse situation. Reservation given by
central as well as state government in government jobs has overcome the gap of gender
inequalities from the country. But still, a large part of rural India still thinks girls as the
eake se tio of the so iet . Gi ls a e still o side ed as pa a a dha a d pa e ts sta t
accumulating wealth for their marriage right after their birth. As per the information given
by UNDP and Government of India, our country stands at 136th out of 186 countries in
Gender Inequality Index. Apart from that India also stands at 98 th position out of 128
ou t ies i
o ld s e o o i oppo tu it i de . It lea l sho s that the go e
e t is
unable to circulate all its facilities to all the corners of the country or the orthodox parents
of Indian girls are not utilising this facilities properly. There are still some parts in the
country where the custom of child marriage, sati are still prevalent but the legal system still
shows its incompetence in solving the cases. Lower number of women in top positions of
our country does not show their incapability of doing the work but it shows there are
structural impediments preventing women from reaching the top.
Existence of all types of inequality has hampered the overall growth of the country and it
grows up when limited people have taken all the things like money, power and prestige and
they start thinking themselves as the upper one and see other with disdain. One form of
inequality in the country reinforces other inequality as they are interlinked as they bring
poverty and social dysfunction in the country. This paper would like to give some reforms to
eradicate all forms of inequality from the nation to bring development back on the track. As
it s ee
e tio ed that the p ese e of i e ualities i the so iet goes agai st te a ts of
social justice, which promises that the opportunities and privileges will be distributed
among all with parity.
This paper recommends some reforms to whittle down the intensity of inequality which
covers Social, economic, political and gender inequality. As education at primary, secondary
and tertiary level is the most significant mean to improve the disadvantageous condition of
unfortunate population. It is a cornerstone for improving social justice and economical
productivity. The outcomes of being educated are also linked with health and economic
status of an individual and the society. But the fact which needs attention is, providing
education is not only responsibility of the government but community, society and family as
ell Pa e ts should take i itiati e to p o ide at least ele e ta edu atio to all. Gi l s
180
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
education should be made compulsory by the government so that parents will send their
girls to school for studies. With this, the social disparity in the society can be reduced.
Reservation in government jobs and government institutions should not only be given on
the asis of ei g a k a d
aste ut o the asis of e o o i status. People who do
not have economical capacity should be encouraged by incentives in form reservation. With
this the gap present in the social, political and economic institutions can be
reduced.Redistribution of static resources accomplishes nothing and makes no one richer
but will ensure equal economic level to all and through this economic inequality in India can
be whittle down too. Quality education in the country needs upgradation at higher level. In
the global scenario, universities play a very vital role in molding the nation in the right
manner. Through education the economic productivity and social quality can be improved
as universities provide intense level of knowledge which helps students to make
i te atio al elatio s a d pa t e ships . “o, eli inating the educational gap from the
country will help the economy to go up. Corruption in government organization is common
thing which takes place in our day to-days life which if observed properly will show that it
hampers the progress of the country and also gives bad message to the world. Government
needs to make some deterrent laws regarding corruption so that officials would do their
work properly and the development can be ensured in the country. There should be some
minimum level of education qualification for contesting the election for state and national
legislatures so that educated people from the all the sectors can be shifted to the
go e a e p o ess of the ou t a d people ho do t k o the ABCD of politi s a d
good governance can be avoided. Social justice which has now reached at its dead mark by
unscrupulous approach of government can also be revived by apprehending the reforms in
the proper manner.
Considerable growth has been seen in the country in the recent years towards reducing the
gap of inequalities. I hope this paper will guide all to eliminate all the disparity present in the
country and promote and bring development, economic and political stability in the country
th ough e tio ed efo s. The u de eloped I dia Politi s should also learn to provide
ette go e a e ith this the d ea of seei g a ette I dia a also e a o plished
and like before India can also emerge as a golden bird of the world.
181
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
182
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Judicial Appointments in India: Imperatives for Reforms
Shubham Rathi
Institute of law, Nirma University, Ahmedabad
Abstract
Indian Democracy setup consists of three structures i.e. Legislature, Executive and Judiciary
and each structure has its set of powers, the doctrine of Basic structure gave separation of
po e i “up e e Cou t s judgment i.e. Kesavananda Bharti vs. State of Kerala, where the
court held that no amendment can change the basic structure of Indian constitution, here
the court also describe the basic structure. Here the central theme of the paper is Judiciary
appointment and how it is related to one of the basic structure of Indian constitution, i.e.
separation of power and independence of judiciary. Presently judges in supreme court are
appointed by the way of collegiums system in which the collegiums, which developed by
three judges decision which would be discussed in paper, consist of Chief justice and four
othe judges of sup e e ou t, he e the o t o e s fi st a ose du i g I di a Ga dhi s eig
where Justice H.R Khanna was superseded by his junior for the post of Chief Justice, lack of
transparency and say of executive in the appointment procedure is the major issue. The
paper also deals with the J.A.C bill pending in parliament, which provides an alternative to
this process and how this would lead to democratic reforms.
Keywords: Judicial Appointments, Reforms, India
[This paper was presented at the 2nd National Conference on Politics & Governance, NCPG
2014 held at India International Centre Annexe, New Delhi on 3 August 2014]
Introduction
The implementation of judicial appointment can be traced in the basic structure of Indian
constitution; the term basic structure is nowhere present in the constitution and was first
used by M.K. Nambiar and other counsels while arguing for the petitioners in the Golaknath
case1. But it came to limelight only in 1973, while deciding the landmark judgement of
Kesavananda Bharati vs. State of Kerala2 . Where the supreme court held that that Article
3683 did not enable Parliament to alter the basic structure or framework of the Constitution
and parliament could not use its amending powers under Article 368 to 'damage',
'emasculate ', 'destroy', 'abrogate', 'change' or 'alter' the 'basic structure' or framework of
the constitution. This decision is not just a landmark in the evolution of constitutional law,
but a turning point in constitutional history 4, another landmark judgement was Minerva
Mills ase5. Where the court held that clause (4) and (5) of Article 368 of constitution are
unlawful, these clauses e e i du ted
I di a Ga dhi s go e
e t as espo se to
Keshwananda Bharti case.
However the court remained silent on what constitute the basic structure, but different
Judges on various occasions described what constitutes the basic structure.
Sikri, CJ. Me tio ed the follo i g as the
asi fou datio a d st u tu e of the
Constitution:
1. Supremacy of the Constitution
183
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
2. Separation of Powers between the legislature, the executive and the judiciary
3. Republican and the democratic form of Government;
4. Secular character of the Constitution
5. Federal character of the constitution
The other Judges mentioned in addition to this 3 more basic features:
6. The dignity of the individual secured by the various Fundamental Rights and the Mandate
to build a welfare state contained in the directive principles
7. The unity and integrity of the nation
8. Parliamentary system.
9. Independence of Judiciary.6
The two basic structures i.e. Independence of judiciary and separation of power is the
central theme of this paper and would be discussed in detail in further chapters. The
o t o e s fi st a ose du i g I di a Ga dhi s egi e he M s. Ga dhi supe seded i
four Supreme Court judges - Jayanti Manilal Shelat, Kawdoor Sadananda Hegde, Amar Nath
Grover and H.R Khanna - to appoint a junior judge, Justice Ajit Nath Ray as the Chief Justice
of India, she punished them because of their independent outlook, not tagged to what she
considered "progressive"7. I di a Ga dhi s go e
e t had suspe ded a Co stitutional
p o isio that gua a teed the ight to life a d pe so al li e t
hi h is o
o l k o
8
as A.D.M Jabalpur case .
With this provision abrogated, the four judges found themselves helpless. Justice Hans Raj
Khanna alone disagreed. He believed that the suspended provision was not the only
eposito of the gua a tee agai st u la ful i p iso e t. Kha a s ou ageous de isio
and its aftermath are widely known. Next in line to become the Chief Justice, he was
superseded, and resigned.9 The government appointed a Chief Justice who had passed
judgments in favour of the government in the guise of appointing "forward looking" judges.
The judges were often compliant to the wishes of the executive. During the emergency, 16
High Court judges were transferred by the executive without following the due procedure
which ranks as the most prominent attack on the judicial independence in India's history.10 It
came to limelight because appointment of the Chief Justice of India, unlike the appointment
of judges to the Supreme Court of India, is a very transparent process. The senior-most
judge on the Bench is, by convention, appointed the Chief Justice of India.11 Now the
question arises is Judiciary Independent in their decision making and is their demarcation of
power between the three organs or legislation and executive interfering in judicial decision
making.
Independence of Judiciary and separation of power
The independence of judiciary is not a new concept but its meaning is still imprecise. The
starting and the central point of this concept is apparently the doctrine of separation of
powers. The underlying purpose of independence of judiciary is that judges must be able to
decide disputes before them, according to the law, uninfluenced by any other factor.
Shetreet takes into account all these considerations. Explaining the tern-is 'independence'
and 'judiciary' separately, he says that the judiciary is the organ of the government not
forming a part of the executive or the legislative, which is not subject to personal,
substantive or collective control and which perform the primary function of adjudication.12
184
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
Indian constitution is a very well built document. It assigns different roles to all the three
wings of government the Legislature, Executive and the Judiciary. There is no ambiguity
about each wings power, privilege and duties. Parliament has to enact law, Executive has to
e fo e the a d the judi ia has to i te p et the . Justi e Mukhe jee o se ed, it does
not admit of any serious dispute that the doctrine of separation of powers has, strictly
speaki g o pla e i the s ste of Go e
e t that I dia has at the p ese t da . The
theory of checks and balance has been observed in the Indian constitutions. There is no
rigorous separation of powers. For instance, parliament has the judicial power of
impeachment and also appointment of judges is made under executive wing.13
Appointment of Judges is directly linked with independence of judiciary which can be traced
in Article 12414 of Indian constitution; here the role of executive is direct and active in
judicial appointment, which possess a direct or indirect threat to Independence of Judiciary,
this also lead to overlapping of power as involvement of executive in judiciary leads to
violation of separation of power. Also Article 5015 of Indian constitution states separation of
judiciary from executive which is also a question whether the separation is whole or partial.
We would further see how judicial appointment procedure evolved from independence to
what it is today.
Evolution of judicial appointment procedure
The judicial appointment in Indian constitution can be traced in article 124(2)16. Clause (2)
e tio s o sultatio
hi h is fu the dis ussed i the paper, after independence the
practice had developed over the last several decades according to which the Chief Justice of
India initiated the proposal, very often in consultation with his senior colleagues and his
recommendation was considered by the President and, if agreed to, the appointment was
made. In 1974 in Shamsher Singh vs. State of Punjab the Supreme Court stated that in
appointment of High court and Supreme Court judges the approval of chief Justice of India is
must.17 By and large, this was the position till 1981.18
Then came the landmark judgment of S. P. Gupta vs. President of India and others, 198119
hi h as also k o
as Fi st judge ase , the ase a e to “up e e Cou t u de a ti le
139, under various writ petitions filled in different High ou t s the o e issue as ega di g
the scope and ambit of the power of the Central Government in regard to appointment or
non-appointment of additional Judges and transfer of judges from one High court to
another under clause (1) of article 222 and constitutional validity of the order of transfer.
This case brought a tremendous shift in appointment procedure, here executive got an
uppe edge o e judi ia i the appoi t e t p o edu e a d p i a
of the CJI s
recommendation to the President can be refused fo
oge t easo s, here the court
o se ed that o sultatio does ot ea
o u e e a d uled further that the
concept of primacy of the Chief Justice of India is not really to be found in the
Constitution.20
For the next twelve years the appointment was made with executive having an upper edge,
but the position again changes in 1993 in Supreme Court Advocates-on-Record Association
vs. Union of India21. The nine-Judge Bench (with majority of seven) not only overruled S.P.
Gupta s ase ut also devised a specific procedure for appointment of Judges of the
“up e e Cou t i the i te est of p ote ti g the i teg it a d gua di g the i depe de e of
185
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
the judi ia . Fo the sa e easo , the p i a of the Chief Justi e of I dia as held to e
essential. It held that the recommendation in that behalf should be made by the Chief
Justice of India in consultation with his two senior-most colleagues and that such
recommendation should normally be given effect to by the executive. In short, the power of
appointment passed into the hands of judiciary and the role of the executive became merely
formal.22 Here the word consultation shrinks in mini form. This laid to the foundation of
present collegiums system of appointment. For the next five years, there was confusion on
the roles of the CJI and the two judges in judicial appointments and transfers. In many cases,
CJIs took unilateral decisions without consulting two colleagues. Besides, the President
became only an approver.23 This decision was upheld in 1998 in third Judges Case, in 1998
President K. R Narayanan issued presidential reference regarding clarity on second judges
ase a d the o d o sultatio i a ti le
, 217 and 222 to which a nine bench Judges
headed by Justice S.P Bharucha issued nine guidelines24 regarding the appointment which
today known as collegiums system.
It is said by the critics of the 1993 decision that in a democracy, accountability is an
important consideration and the authority or authorities making such appointments should
be accountable to the people. A distinction is made between appointments and functioning.
While in the matter of functioning, the executive can have no say, it is said, the executive
must be necessarily involved in the process of appointment. The argument is that someone
must be responsible for the appointment made and since Chief Justice of India or his
colleagues are not accountable to the people, the concentration of power of appointment in
them is undemocratic.25
Apart from accountability, the present collegiums system also failed to keep pace with
vacancies stalled due to various caste, political, and communal reasons, according to
Ministry of law and Justice in 2004 there were 143 vacancies in 21 High Courts against
sanctioned strength of 714 leaving almost 20 percent vacant.26 Merit of Judges is again a
question in this system, here Judges are mostly appointed on the basis of seniority, but
again seniority does not guarantee merit, as the system is closed to public merit cannot be
easily determined. It is often lamented that India is the only democratic country where only Judges
appoint Judges.
It is often lamented that India is the only democratic country where only Judges appoint
Judges. Late Justice J.S Verma, former CJI and author of majority judgment in Second Judges
case (1993) describes M 199 judg e t, hi h holds the field, as e
u h
misunderstood and misused. It was in that context I said the working of the judgment now
for some time is raising serious questions, which cannot be called unreasonable. Therefore,
some kind of rethink is required. My judgment says the appointment process of High Court
and Supreme Court Judges is basically a joint or participatory exercise between the executive
a d the judi ia , oth taki g pa t i it .27
Analysis of three cases
The law commission in its 214th epo t a al sed the th ee judge s ase ith espe t to
constitutional aspect. The o d ollegiu
as o he e p ese t i o stitutio , a d as
fi st used i “.P Gupta ase i Pa a
The e
ust e a collegium to make
e o
e datio s et . It is su itted that a additio of o ds i the o stitutio
ould
186
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
not be permissible under the interpretive jurisdiction of the Supreme Court. The Supreme
Court has to interpret the constitution as it is.28
The President should always act on the aid and advice of the Council of Ministers (article
74). However, contrary to what was said in the Constitution, both the Judges II and Judges III
cases have laid down that consultation with the Chief Justice of India means a collegium
consisting of the Chief Justice of India and two or four judges as the case may be. Further, in
both the cases it was stated that it is the Chief Justice of India who should consult with
collegium of judges, whereas Constitution says that the President should consult the Chief
Justice of India and such judges as he deems necessary.29
Judicial Appointment Commission Bill, 2013
The last effort to replace the collegiums system in 2003 was made by then NDA government
but was unsuccessful. The then NDA government had introduced a Constitution
Amendment Bill but the Lok Sabha was dissolved when the bill was before a Standing
Committee. The Constitution (One Hundred and Twentieth Amendment) Bill, 2013 (herein
after referred to as Constitution Amendment Bill) and the Judicial Appointments
Commission Bill, 2013 (hereinafter referred to as JAC Bill) were introduced in the monsoon
session of Parliament in 2013. The Bill establishes a Judicial Appointments Commission
which shall be responsible for selecting judges of the higher judiciary.30
The Amendment proposes a new Article 124A to create a Judicial Appointments
Commission and provides that the structure, composition and functioning of the JAC will be
enacted in a separate law by the Parliament. The Amendment provides for the President to
make appointments on the recommendation of the JAC.31 This law – Judicial Appointments
Commission Bill, 2013 suggests the JAC will consist of 3 Supreme Court Judges, the Union
Law Minister, the Law Secretary as its convenor and two eminent persons appointed by a
body comprising the Prime Minister, Leader of Opposition and the Chief Justice of India. 32
The major advantage of JAC is that it creates a balance of power between executive and
judiciary in the appointment procedure in accordance to the separation of power.
The bill passed in upper house of the parliament but attracted a heated debate in Rajya
Sabha, where Ram Jethmalani seemed to be the lone voice in the Rajya Sabha against the
Co stitutio A e d e t Bill. Jeth ala i said that it as
holl u o stitutio al . I
particular, he said that the composition of the JAC should be reflected in the constitution
itself, and not in ordinary legislation. A major criticism of the bill is regarding section 3 (1)
which could be easily amended by the simple majority or ordinance. Otherwise, Jethmalani
a gued, Pa lia e t ould e a le to de olish the hole thi g a d su stitute it ith a
Judicial Commission which will consist of only the Law Minister. 33 After which the bill went
to standing committee for recommendations.
The bill needs to be protected under article 368 to safeguard the Independence of Judiciary
which is basic structure of Indian constitution. The Constitution Amendment Bill at present
permits Parliament to modify the composition of the JAC without going through the rigors
of a constitutional amendment. In future, Parliament can, for example, take even the Chief
Justice of India off the JAC without a constitutional amendment.34 Hence the bill at present
187
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
also needs certain amendment so as to avoid the commission to pass wholly into the hands
of legislature or executive.
Another shortcoming of the bill can be observed in section 9 (1) and (2) It merely states that
the JAC has the power to specify, by regulations, the procedure for discharge of its
functions. This is highly inadequate. The bill has to clarify the powers of the JAC in
discharging its functions but as it currently stands, the bill has entirely delegated this
authority to the realm of rules.35
The Bill i se tio
states that the pe so e o
e ded is of a ilit , i teg it a d
sta di g i the legal p ofessio . Cu e tl i p a ti e is a lo g esta lished o e tio of
se io it i appoi t e t of the Chief Justice. It may be suggested that there can be a
standardized criteria for evaluating merit. The recommended performance evaluation
criteria include-: legal ability, integrity and impartiality, communication skills,
professionalism and temperament, administrative capacity, necessary skills for jurisdiction
of court.36 Under the proposed Bill, there is no mention of a mandate to ensure a diverse
judiciary. A diverse judiciary can have a powerful symbolic value in promoting public
confidence in the fairness of courts, thus important in terms of access to justice. We
recommend that the Bill should encourage diversity in appointment, in terms of gender,
religion, caste and ethnicity.
The
th A e d e t Bill,
i “e tio
states on the recommendation of the Judicial
Appointments Commission as referred to in article 124A The use of the o d
e o
e datio is ou d to ause ultiple i te p etatio s si ila to the o ds afte
o sultatio i the u e t A ti le
of the Co stitutio . The proposed Article 124 of the
Co stitutio al A e d e t has to la if the atu e of the e o
e datio
ade
the
JAC and the discretion and powers of the President in the appointment of judges based on
the recommendations made by the JAC. The Amendment has to clarify whether the
President has the power to reject the recommendation or resend it to the JAC for
reconsideration.37 Hence concluding, these major changes are required in the bill making it a
balance and appropriate towards appointment procedure.
End-notes
Golak Nath v.State of Punjab, (1967) 2 SCR 762: AIR 1967 SC
2
Kesavananda Bharati v. State of Kerala, AIR 1973SC 1461
3
Article 368 in Indian constitution of 1949
<https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&sqi=2&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.indiankanoon.org%2Fdoc%2F594125%
2F&ei=8cCdU5DmJIuuASmjILADA&usg=AFQjCNFPwrztuawCmFvxgdq3ts6rSkPTfg&bvm=bv.68911936,d.c2E > Last
accessed at 15/06/2014 21:24
4
Tyagi, Himanshu, Doctrine of Basic Structure (Constitutional Law). <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.legalserviceindia.com%2Farticles%2Fthyg.htm
&ei=xsCdU_mXJYzJuATy34HQDA&usg=AFQjCNFVLjcLd8QXWzdNbtakBKSZtIurQg&bvm=bv.6
8911936,d.c2E > Last accessed at 15/06/2014 21:24
5
Minerva Mills Ltd. vs. Union of India (1980) 3 SCC 625.1
1
188
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
6
Galgale Ashlesha, Semester V ILNU, <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=9&cad=rja&uact=8
&sqi=2&ved=0CFYQFjAI&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.nirmauni.ac.in%2Flaw%2Fejournals%2F
previous%2Farticle2v1i2.pdf&ei=6cGdU7q_KpCeugTOiYDgDA&usg=AFQjCNGeueLUQcgHhqGuNboDdRLoMqm3
mQ&bvm=bv.68911936,d.c2E > last accessed at 15/06/2014 21:26.
7
Justice denied to judge, The Sunday times issue. <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=2&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CCAQFjAB&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.sundaytimes.lk%2F100221%2FInternational%
2Fint_01.html&ei=6PGeU5T1NZCMuATtYGoDA&usg=AFQjCNGctVr3qU_uq6Ifo7vsrSS58hTuQA&bvm=bv.68911936,d.c2E > last
accessed at 16/06/2014 19:03:02
8
A.D.M Jabalpur vs. Shivkant Shukla 1976 AIR 1207, 1976 SCR 17.
9
Caravan Magazine, Test of truth<
http://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&
ved=0CB0QFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.caravanmagazine.in%2Fperspectives%2Ftesttruth&ei=avKeU824Nc2cugSvgYLIDw&usg=AFQjCNFntv_aVDF9n8lmrRiX6Oxqa7K-Rw > last
accessed at
10
Observation research foundation, Analysis, Judicial appointments: Is the proposed JAC
better than the Collegium System? <
http://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&
ved=0CB0QFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.observerindia.com%2Fcms%2Fsites%2Forfonlin
e%2Fmodules%2Fanalysis%2
AnalysisDetail.html%3Fcmaid%3D56631%26mmacmaid%3D56632&ei=F_SeU4_pL4SuATwloHADA&usg=AFQjCNEkufw2UBZ9SPao7rAdJ0RK3JlPoQhttp://www.google.co.in/url?
sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&ved=0CB0QFjAA&url=http%3
A%2F%2Fwww.observerindia.com%2Fcms%2Fsites%2Forfonline%2Fmodules%2Fanalysis%2
AnalysisDetail.html%3Fcmaid%3D56631%26mmacmaid%3D56632&ei=F_SeU4_pL4SuATwloHADA&usg=AFQjCNEkufw2UBZ9SPao7rAdJ0RK3JlPoQ > last accessed at
16/06/2014 19:15.
11
How India missed getting its first women chief Justice. <
http://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&
ved=0CB0QFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.criticaltwenties.in%2Flawthejudiciary%2Fhowindia-missed-getting-its-first-woman-chief-justiceindia&ei=0_SeU4f4FMyhugSBsYK4DA&usg=AFQjCNGhLepOe3mIx6EPIasOZV0r3jkqbA > last
accessed at 16/06/2014 19:15.
12
Raghuvanshi Raghvendra Singh & Vaidya Nidhi, Independence of Judiciary- Indian
experiences. <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fssrn.com%2Fabstract%3D1558979&ei=iqmyU_mnI4
i7uATso4HAAg&usg=AFQjCNEBfnloXnzZjhSxlHv-q2uHCmS32g&bvm=bv.69837884,d.c2E >
last accessed at 01/07/2014 18:01.
13
Lellala Vishwanadham, Doctrine of Separation of Powers and Significance and Importance
of Judicial power in India. <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=5&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CDUQFjAE&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.vsrdjournals.com%2Fvsrd%2FIssue%2F2012_
06_June%2FWeb%2F5_Lellala_Vishwanadham_654_Research_Communication_VSRD_June
189
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
_2012.pdf&ei=T6qyU4jjMImVuASk_4L4AQ&usg=AFQjCNFS0_SXlhSZ8On8y6rPAq31VejvoQ&
bvm=bv.69837884,d.c2E > last accessed at 01/07/2014 18:03
14
Article 124 in Indian constitution of 1949
15
Article 50 in Indian constitution of 1949
16
A ti le
of I dia o stitutio : e e Judge of the “upreme Court shall be
appointed by the President by warrant under his hand and seal after consultation with such
of the Judges of the Supreme
Court and of the High Courts in the States as the President may deem necessary for the
purpose and shall hold office until he attains the age of sixty-five years:
Provided that in the case of appointment of a Judge other than the Chief Justice, the Chief
Justi e of I dia shall al a s e o sulted.
17
Gullapalli Vaidya & Narayan Jayaprakash, A National Judicial commission Judicial
appointment and oversight <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.prsindia.org%2Fuploads%2Fmedia%2FJudges
%2520(Inquiry)%2520%2Fbill88_2007100588_Judicial_Commission_NAC.pdf&ei=QquyU9jK
NZWfugSFuYDoAQ&usg=AFQjCNGJ2OC0--iUXWfo7bT_uNNWd2xnFw > last accessed at
01/07/2014 18:08
18
Justice Shri H.R Khanna, National commission to review the working of constitution: a
consultation on superior judiciary. <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Flawmin.nic.in%2Fncrwc%2Ffinalreport%2Fv2b114.htm&ei=UayyU4uuGouwuASc34CIBw&usg=AFQjCNFS2RRhW1QtnTa7Ojr7VH2k5jvh3w >
last accessed at 01/07/2014 18:11
19
S.P. Gupta vs President Of India And Ors. on 30 December, 1981 <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&sqi=2&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Findiankanoon.org%2Fdoc%2F1294854%2F&e
i=pqyyU6fsGpeiugSW14CYCw&usg=AFQjCNFLdD1ccfzrVK-W6AJe0TDpHMbw7g > last
accessed at 01/07/2014 18:13.
20
Ibid 17
21
Supreme Court Advocates-on-Record Association Vs. Union of India, 1993 <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Findiankanoon.org%2Fdoc%2F753224%2F&ei=q7CyU
5vyMMm7uATQ54KABw&usg=AFQjCNFTqgihzFNpdbAbhIbRheiQVEIEIg > 01/07/2014 18:30
22
Supra note 17
23
The collegiums controversy, Indian express, issue 24th August 2011 <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&sqi=2&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Farchive.indianexpress.com%2Fnews%2Fthecollegium-controversy%2F836029%2F&ei=dq2yU8GNdOfugST2IHQDw&usg=AFQjCNGxR4zz0TPu1Lzd1KBp1SqKNRmvUA > last accessed at
01/07/2014 18:16.
24
Ibid 23
25
Supra note 18.
26
Supra note 17.
27
Kumar Hemant, Collegiums system standoff <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CB0QFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Flawyersupdate.co.in%2FLU%2F8%2F1333.asp&ei=Z
190
Journal of Politics & Governance, Vol. 3, No. 4, October-December 2014
q6yU431IMyhugTon4HQBA&usg=AFQjCNHtTHWqtuHBrke8N_RwqassXJcCZQ > last accessed
at 01/07/2014 18:22.
28
214th report of Law commission of India <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Flawcommissionofindia.nic.in%2Freports%2Freport2
14.pdf&ei=fa-yU8ayEcySuATa4oD4BA&usg=AFQjCNGoNSmN3uXjGazKk9skKmJXAFHZRA >
last accessed at 01/07/2014 18:25.
29
Ibid 28
30
Rajiv Gandhi Institute for Contemporary studies, legislative brief, Judicial appointment
commission. <
http://client.webdweb.com/rgics/sites/default/files/JUDICIAL%20APPOINTMENTS%20COM
MISSION.pdf > last accessed at 01/07/2014 18:37.
31
JAC Working paper,
Recasting the Judicial Appointments Debate: Constitutional Amendment (120th
Amendment) Bill, 2013 and Judicial Appointments Commissioner Bill, 2013 <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=2&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CCMQFjAB&url=http%3A%2F%2Fclpr.org.in%2Fwpcontent%2Fuploads%2F2014%2F02%2FJAC-WorkingPaper.pdf&ei=Qf20U_IJiZW4BPrpgPgP&usg=AFQjCNH4ErJJ9XZR5SLO0WsxBGDfpUz2LA&bv
m=bv.70138588,d.c2E > 03/07/2014 12:29.
32
Ibid 30
33
The judicial appointment commission: a delicate balance, Journal of Indian law society <
https://www.google.co.in/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8
&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fjilsblognujs.wordpress.com%2F2013%2F12%2F16%
2Fthe-judicial-appointments-commission-a-delicate-balance%2F&ei=07OyU6abBsGuASn24GgAQ&usg=AFQjCNH4sih6RznWX8VFD1YrLd-Y-GPoEA} > last accessed at 01/07/2014
18:49.
34
35
36
37
Ibid 32
Supra note 31
Supra note 31
Supra note 31
191